Reflection On Wise Blood Essay Scholarship Essay Help

The main characters in the story are Enoch, Haze, Mrs. Flood, Asa Hawks, Sabbath Lily, Mrs. Hitchcock and Hoover Shots. The main character Haze, is displeased with Christianity and seeks ways to spread anti-religious messages.

Haze is from a strong religious background and several experiences weaken his devotion to Christianity. In the story, he is portrayed as an atheist who despises Christianity. However, he is still influenced by religion despite his loathing for Christian practices and beliefs.

Haze brings out his spiritual connections to Christianity in a strange way. Asa Hawks and Lily portray the manner in which the church and its leaders participate in immoral and corrupt practices for their own personal gain.

They represent the moral decadence that has negatively affected the sanctity of Christianity. Hoover Shots uses his trickery to take advantage of gullible worshippers to become rich yet he does not have a strong religious conviction.

Enoch, Haze, Hoover Shots, Asa and Lily show the manner in which religious beliefs are corrupted or misrepresented to achieve certain ends. Haze has a strong drive that encourages him to spread anti –Christian messages.

However, in his quest to do so, he finds out shocking details about the true nature of Asa, Hoover Shots and Lily. The three are not righteous as they claim and are only motivated by what they can gain from religion. The main characters in the story satirize Christianity and how it is practiced in different places.

These characters show how appearances are easily disguised by some people to portray a false image of what they are not. They interpret the concept of spiritualism and religion through bizarre methods to achieve different objectives.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The car represents the theme of death as shown in the story. Haze runs over Hoover’s false prophet using his car who later passes away. Haze also succumbs to injuries in the police car and later passes away.

The car is used symbolically to show the transitions Haze is going through in his life. Enoch’s gorilla transformation is motivated by his desire to show others how important he is. He uses the gorilla suit to make other people recognize his worth in the society because the job he does at the zoo makes him feel inferior.

The potato peeler seller in the street makes Haze meet with Enoch, Sabbath and Asa. This is symbolic because they are some of the main characters who help to advance the plot in the story.

O’Connor shows sacraments to be very important to Catholic devotees. Sacraments are used to signify that Catholics identify with doctrines their religion contains. Sacraments serve as a testimony to their faith which binds them together as devotees with common religious beliefs.

The aspect of mediation in Catholicism is used to make peace between two or more parties who have a conflict. Mediation encourages conflicting parties to tolerate one another as it is the only way through which people can co-exist peacefully.

This concept encourages Catholics to act as mediators during conflicts so as to be peacemakers in the society. The doctrine of communion is used to encourage people to relate their personal experiences and situations with their religious beliefs.

Communion makes Catholics stronger because they are able to encourage each other to live righteously which strengthens their faith. Communion also helps Catholics to learn from each other on how to live as responsible Christians.

We will write a custom Essay on Reflection on Wise Blood specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

Dana Hall: Funding a Mission Case Study essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Dana Hall School

The challenges that Dana Hall all-girls school was facing

Solutions/recommendations

Conclusion

References

Introduction The purpose of this case study is to evaluate the challenges in the administration of Dana Hall, a private all-girls school in New England. The case includes and examines how many non-profit oriented organizations are struggling to look for funding and fight the difficulties of staying true to their missions. Dana Hall faced several challenges and the main cause of most of the challenges was poor emotional intelligence that the administration applied.

For example, the shortage of teachers as a result of being dissatisfied with the state of affairs in the school. Within a duration of four years, three headmistresses had left the school creating serious rifts among the school faculty, the administration, and the school’s board of trustees.

Another challenge was that the school’s enrollment started to fall as a result of shifting away of social norms from single- sex education to bilingual education. Moreover, the modern vision for education of girls needed a lot of investment in sports and science (McFarlan, Leonard

[supanova_question]

THL Company Success Evaluation Essay essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Success of the Strategy used by THL

Strategy to be used by the Firm

New Zealand Verses International Market

Planning for Negative Contingencies

Overall International Strategy

Conclusion

Appendix – Financial Analysis

References

Introduction THL is one of the leading tour firms in the New Zealand’s tourism industry. The core business activities of the firm involve providing tourism related services which include rental motor-homes, car and couches rental services. Apart from New Zealand, the firm also operates in Australia, Fiji and South Africa.

THL’s mission is to utilize its attractions and investments in the overseas markets to become the leading operator in the industry. In order to realize its growth objectives, THL has always embarked on diversifying its investments and divesting its underperforming business segments. This paper thus seeks to evaluate the effectiveness of this strategy.

Success of the Strategy used by THL The financial analysis in the appendix indicates that the firm has been able to realize a steady growth in revenue for the last three years. Even though the net profit has been on the decline between 2006 to the year 2009, the firm is still financially stable. The decline in net profit is attributable to the rapid rise in cost rather than the growth strategy adopted by the firm.

This means that the firm’s growth strategy of acquiring related businesses and selling off its non-performing business segments has been successful. This can be justified by the following reasons. First, the firm has been able to increase its market share through acquisition of various firms or related businesses in both local and international tourism industry.

Through acquisitions, the firm has become the main player in the New Zealand and Australian markets. For example, the firm currently operates over 4300 rental motor homes after it acquired both Maui and Mount Cook motor homes. This has not only enabled the firm to increase its market share but has also contributed significantly towards the improvement of the visibility of its products.

Given the large number of motor homes operated by THL, the firm has been able to target two market segments with specialized products. For example, the Maui brand targets families while the Britz brand focuses on the independent travelers segment. The increase in market share has thus helped the firm to increase its revenue and product visibility.

Second, through acquisition of related businesses, the firm has been able to achieve economies of scale. The increase in revenue associated with the acquired businesses has enabled THL to effectively implement its marketing and expansion plan. Besides, the firm has a single central administration that manages all the business segments.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This has contributed towards cost reduction by eliminating the need to establish separate administrations for each business segment. Third, acquisition of related businesses has enabled the firm to increase its bargaining power. For example, through the acquisition of Caravan international, the firm now has full control over the terms at which it purchases campervans and motor homes.

Fourth, the firm has been able to offer a wide variety of products through acquisitions. Consequently, THL is in a position to satisfy the needs or preferences of clients from different parts of the world. For example, the firm’s clients can now choose to travel either through motor homes or through buses following the acquisition of Kiwi Experience. This not only improves customer experience and satisfaction but also leads to high revenue and profits.

Finally, divesting underperforming or non-core business segments has enabled the firm to concentrate on its most profitable segments. By focusing on the most profitable segments of its business, the firm has been able to create competitive advantages through high product quality. Besides, it has been able to eliminate the unnecessary costs associated with operating the non performing business segments.

Strategy to be used by the Firm In order to improve its profitability and to maintain or increase its market share, THL should continue to diversify into related businesses. Diversification will help the firm to remain resilient due to the following reason. First, the tourism industry is generally volatile across most markets. However, the degree of volatility and the response measures used to mitigate the risks associated with such volatility varies from market to market.

The high level of volatility means that the industry is not stable and thus a firm can easily collapse if it is not able to cushion its investment from the risks orchestrated by the volatility. Unforeseeable risks such as bad weather and acts of terror have adverse effects on the demand for tourism products. For example, the September 11th terrorist attack in US led to significant reduction in the level of tourist arrivals.

As a result, the firms that had no alternative sources of income were not able to sustain their operations due to the low demand. Thus diversification will enable the firm to utilize the profits accruing from its business segments that are not affected by the unforeseeable risks to boost the segments adversely affected by such risks.

Second, the business of tour operators is seasonal in nature. This means that it is characterized by periods of high demand and periods of very low demand. The seasonality is mainly attributed to changes in weather patterns which have direct impact on outdoor activities such as visiting parks.

We will write a custom Essay on THL Company Success specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The financial economies of scale resulting from diversifying into related business will thus enable the firm to write-off the losses incurred in its segments which are greatly affected by the seasonality of demand. During low demands, most firms lay off their employees in order to reduce costs. However, diversification will enable the firm to retain its employees by redeploying them to the related business segments.

Consequently, when the demand picks up, the firm will not face difficulty in searching for talent. This will enable the firm to create competitive advantages through skilled employees. Finally, diversification through acquisition of related businesses leads to quick expansion at relatively low costs.

Through partnering with existing firms, THL can easily join various overseas markets and begin its operations immediately. This can also be achieved by acquiring businesses as on-going-concerns. The firm will thus be able to realize returns on its investments within a relatively short period and this allows it to continue with its expansion plan.

New Zealand Verses International Market Even though the international market is characterized by high volatility or difficulties, THL should not concentrate solely in the New Zealand market. This means that the firm should focus on joining more overseas markets despite the challenges associated with them. However, the firm must first asses its ability to overcome the challenges associated with the overseas markets alongside the benefits associated with such markets.

Only markets that are likely to contribute significantly to the profitability of the firm should be considered. The decision to join the international market is informed by the following reasons. First, New Zealand, just like the overseas markets is prone to volatility. Research in the New Zealand tourism industry indicates that the failure rate for new entrants is 95%.

The incumbents are also adversely affected by the factors that lead to the failures of the new entrants. This means that the firm will be subjecting itself to very high risks if it concentrates only in the New Zealand’s market. By expanding into the international market, the firm will be able to spread its risks across the markets. This is because all markets can not experience periods of low demand or difficulties at the same time.

For example, while demand in Australia could be low due to poor weather, in South Africa the demand could be high due to improved weather situations. Thus the firm will still be able to make profits from the stable markets. Second, due to the interconnectedness of the tourism industry, shocks in the international market will still have adverse effects in the New Zealand market.

For example, “the occurrence of diseases such as foot and mouth” in Europe still affected the demand in New Zealand due to travel restrictions. Thus avoiding expansions into the international market due to the difficulties associated with it will not help the firm to mitigate the effects of such difficulties. It will be better to join the international market and take advantage of its large size.

Not sure if you can write a paper on THL Company Success by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Third, the large size of the international market is an opportunity for the firm to maximize its profits. Through its financial stability, the firm can easily increase its output in the international market, thus making more profits and value for the shareholders. Finally, joining the international market gives the firm the opportunity to take advantage of the cheap capital and unique scenic features in overseas markets.

Unlike New Zealand, various markets across Africa and Asia are associated with cheap labor. This will enable the firm to reduce its operating costs through low staff costs. Besides, a variety of unique tourist attractions are available in overseas markets. Joining such markets will thus enable the firm to acquire such features thereby increasing its portfolio of tourist attractions and products. This will translates into high sales volume and profits.

Planning for Negative Contingencies Even though the tourism industry is associated with volatility resulting from unforeseeable factors such as sever weather conditions or wars, the incumbent firms can still maintain their competitiveness if they plan effectively for such contingencies. THL can achieve this objective through the following measures. First, the firm should embark on horizontal integration in the markets it operates in.

This will involve investing in substitute products that will satisfy the needs of the clients in the event that the mainstream products can not be offered given the occurrence of a contingency. For example, when bad weather prevents tourist from flying to the tourism sites, the firm should be able to recommend alternative modes of transportation such as sea travelling.

The firm can partner with shipping companies to offer such products. Besides, the high costs of fuel can lead to low demand for the firm’s car and buses rental services as it transfers the high costs to the customers through high prices. This can be eliminated by partnering with or co-owning the local railway system to transport its clients. Thus the firm will not only help its clients to lower the cost of travelling but it will also share the profits accruing from the alternative mode of transportation.

Second, the firm’s strategic planning process should incorporate crisis management. This will involve developing a sound risk management framework which includes the following elements; “readiness, response, reduction and recovery”. THL should always be ready for contingencies by planning for them.

This involves setting a side a risk fund to cater for the losses associated with the contingencies. Response to the crisis will involve providing alternative products to customers. For example, in the event that the customers from the main markets can not travel to New Zealand, the firm should be able to offer them alternative products in their countries. This explains the importance of joining the international market.

The firm should also be able to reduce the effects of the crisis through rapid response mechanisms. It should be able to respond to changes in the market during crisis situations within a very short time in order to avoid losses. The aftermath of the crisis must also be evaluated and the results used for future planning.

Third, THL should clearly “define decision roles and responsibilities” in regard to crisis management. This means that the firm should indentify talented employees and entrust them with the responsibility of making sound decisions during a time of crisis. This will not only help in reducing the confusion in policy making during crisis situations, but will also improve the efficiency of making such decisions.

The overall result will be an effective policy formulation and implementation framework. Finally, the firm should maintain an optimum degree of flexibility in its operation as a response to the expected crisis. It should be in a position to raise the capital that may be used to alter the methods of service provision as well as being able to alter the methods of service provision through appropriate technologies.

Overall International Strategy As discussed earlier, the firm’s expansion plan through acquisition of related business and divesting underperforming segments has been successful. Consequently, it has been recommended that the firm should continue with its strategy of diversification into related businesses. This will involve joining the international market in order to increase the market share.

The above discussion also shows that joining the international market will be advantageous since the risks associated with it can be managed effectively. Thus in order to increase its market share and profitability, the firm should embark on internationalization through joint venture as its market entry mode. A joint venture strategy will benefit the firm as follows.

First, by using the assets of its partners, the firm will reduce the market entry risks. Second, it will enable the firm to gain knowledge of the overseas market and industry. Third, the participation of its national partners will enable it to gain access to national resources. For example, it can simplify the process of acquiring tourist attractions which may be reserved for local firms only.

Besides, the firm will gain the power to borrow in the overseas market. Finally, it will benefit from the goodwill of its partners to popularize its brand within a very short time. This will enhance market penetration and rapid growth.

Conclusion The above discussion indicates that the success of the firm is attributed to its rapid expansion through acquiring related businesses and divesting its segments that are underperforming. This strategy has enabled the firm to increase its market share and revenue over the years. Consequently, the firm’s future growth strategy should focus on diversification into related businesses.

Focusing solely on the New Zealand market is not advisable since shocks in the international market will still affect it. Joining the international market on the other hand helps in spreading risks and increasing the market share. Besides, the risks associated with the international market can be reduced as discussed above.

Consequently, the firm should consider internationalization through joint ventures as its market entry mode. This will enable the firm to increase its profitability and competitiveness as discussed above.

Appendix – Financial Analysis In 2010, the total revenue increased by 7% to 182 million. This translated into a net profit of 9.8 million which represents a 778% increase in profits. In 2009, the firm realized total revenue of 169 million which was 12% higher as compared to the previous financial year. However, the net profits reduced by 94.4% to 1. 1million.The firm’s total revenue in 2008 was 151 million, representing a 9.5% growth.

Despite the increase in revenue, the firm’s net profit declined by 12.4% to 17 million. In 2007, the total revenue was 138 million, which was 21.6% less as compared to the previous financial year. The net profit also reduced by 10.7%. Finally, in 2006, the total revenue increased by 4.7% to 176.1 million which translated to a net profit of 21.8 million. The net profit was however, less by 31.2% as compared to previous financial year.

References Akoorie, M.,

[supanova_question]

Comparing the Articles of Confederation with the Federal Constitution Compare and Contrast Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Similarities in the Constitutions

Differences between the Constitutions

Reasons for Change in Government

Conclusion

References

Introduction The idea of union in America had been a part of colonial political thought and from the onset of the eighteenth century plans were being made for a union of all the colonies. Following the declaration of Independence in 1776, the American colonies set out to define the terms of their union through a constitution.

The Articles of Confederation were the first constitution of the United States and they were ratified in 1981.

While this constitution was able to unite the country over the course of the American Revolution, the document proved to be inadequate in the following years necessitating the adoption of a new constitution eight years later.

This new constitution was referred to as the Federal Constitution and it has continued to serve Americans for over two centuries. While most of the framers of the Federal Constitution had been the authors of the Articles of Confederations a decade ago, the two documents held significant differences.

This paper will highlight the similarities and differences between the Articles of Confederation and the Federal Constitution and proceed to explain why Americans decided to change their form of government in 1787-1788.

Similarities in the Constitutions Both documents were committed to the establishment of an independent United States with the freedom of the American people being emphasized on by the two constitutions.

The American colonies were to exercise freedom from foreign control and the documents provided the basis for a common defense since each State was bound to come to the aid of the other in case of a war.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Federal Constitution asserted in its preamble that one of the major goals of the Union was to “provide for the common defense” of the States (King, 1871).

The Article of Confederation was written for the sole purpose of establishing a mutual defense among the States especially against Great Britain.

Article 2 of the Articles of Confederation declares that the states shall “enter into a firm league of friendship with each other, for their common defense and the security of their liberties” (King, 1871, p.456).

The Articles of Confederation and the Federal Constitution agreed on the title of “The United States of America” as the official name of the newly united colonies.

Even so, the status of each state within the union differed with the Articles of Confederation explicitly stating that “each State retains its sovereignty, freedom, and independence, and every power, jurisdiction, and right” (Swindler, 1981, p.168).

The Federal constitution on the other hand emphasized on the supremacy of the union over sovereignty of the states.

The preamble of the Federal Constitution begins with the words “we the people of the United States” therefore abandoning the Confederate concept of a loose association of states and in its place establishing a strong United nation (McNeese, 2001).

We will write a custom Essay on Comparing the Articles of Confederation with the Federal Constitution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Both documents were based on the idea of a union of the colonies and the notion that the government should be founded upon a representation of the people. The two constitutions agreed that the government should be run for the general welfare of its citizens.

The Federal Constitution asserted the role of the people in choosing their leaders by stating, “the house of representatives shall be composed of members chosen every second year by the people of the States” (King, 1871, p.33).

The Articles provided that for the interest of the State, delegates would be appointed and send to congress to represent the interests of their people.

The two documents gave the national government more power than it had previously held. While the Articles of Confederation emphasized on a form of confederacy or league among the independent States, it greatly increased in theory the powers of government.

For example, the powers of Congress were added upon enabling it to establish marine courts and judge between the states (King, 1871). The Federal Constitution gave the national government power over all the States.

Differences between the Constitutions A fundamental difference between the Articles of Confederation and the Federal Constitution lie in the apportionment of power between the states and the central government.

Jensen (1940) observes that while the Articles of Confederation gave the balance of power to the states, the Federal Constitution gave power to the central government.

The Articles of Confederation were based on the premise that the United Colonies “are, and of right ought to be, free and independent States” (Swindler, 1981, p.166). The Articles therefore regarded a central government as a restraint on the freedom of local legislatures.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Comparing the Articles of Confederation with the Federal Constitution by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Federal Constitution on the other hand sought to create a strong Central government. The Federal Constitution required the states to surrender certain powers to the federal government in order for the government to operate effectively.

The Federal Constitution therefore led to the formation of a Central government that had greater power than the constituent states.

There was a difference in the inherent power and composition of Congress in the two documents. Under the Articles of Confederation, each State had equal representation in Congress without consideration for the differences in population size among the States.

The Federal Constitution created a bicameral Congress that comprised of a Senate where each state contributed two senators and a House of Representatives where each state contributed a number of representatives based on its population.

The Federal Constitution declared that all legislative powers would be vested in a congress, which was to be made up of two houses: the senate and the House of Representatives. While a Congress existed under the Articles of Confederation, its abilities were greatly restricted.

The Congress lacked the authority to govern interstate commerce or enforce its demands on the States (Jensen, 1940). It also lacked the power to impose taxation on the States greatly weakening its efficiency.

The Federal government saw the powers of Congress increased significantly and this body was empowered to regulate interstate commerce.

The Federal constitution also gave Congress the right to “lay and collect taxes, duties, imposts, and excises, to pay the debts and provide for the common defense and general welfare of the United States” (King, 1871, p.152).

The two documents also differed on the number of votes necessary for the Amendment of the Constitution.

While the Articles of Confederation required a unanimous vote (13 out of 13 votes) for an amendment to be ratified, the Federal Constitution declares that “whenever two-thirds of both houses shall propose amendments to the constitution” it will be possible to ratify the amendments (McNeese, 2001).

The Federal constitution therefore made it easier for the Nation to implement changes since it acted on a majority basis instead of waiting for all the States to agree on an issue.

The Articles of Federation stipulated that only the State could act on behalf of its people. The central government did not have any powers over the members of the individual states.

The Federal constitution changed this by stating that both the state and the central governments could act on behalf of the citizens of the United States (Swindler, 1981). This constitution divided the sovereignty between the state and central government therefore making both key players in the lives of the citizens.

Reasons for Change in Government The Union of the States was proposed and implemented for the original purpose of effectively opposing Great Britain. This inter-colonial unity was favored by radicals who saw a union as desirable for carrying on the war against Britain.

However, these radicals wanted a union that would not infringe upon the sovereign authority of the individual states (McNeese 2001). The Articles of Confederation were effective in uniting the States into a loose confederation and increasing their efficiency in war.

Because of this, the USA was able to achieve victory against Great Britain during the American Revolution and therefore obtain its independence in 1783.

A state of unruly was experienced in the years after the great American Revolution. There was little unity among the states under the Articles of Confederation since each state maintained its sovereignty and was allowed to act as an independent country.

Each State therefore put its interests first and only supported the national government out of self-interest. This state of disorderly highlighted the weakness of the Articles of Confederation. McNeese (2001) states that this unruliness was caused by the factional rivalry that led to violence.

The Federal Constitution promised to break and control the violence of faction by exerting greater control over factions or interest groups under a national government.

Proponents of the Federal Constitution argued that a new Constitution would create a vast republic with diverse people therefore reducing the likelihood that smaller, influential groups dominating.

To address the inadequacies of the Articles of Confederation, Congress initially proposed for the amendment of this constitution by selected delegates from all the States.

For the states to act as a nation and reap the benefits of a nation there had to be a greater unification and this could only be achieved by the creation of a new legislative document that laid emphasis on the Federal government.

McNeese (2001) confirms that when the delegates of the Constitutional Convention began their work in 1787, they all had ideas on how to improve the government of the United States.

However, intense debate on the issue led to the proposal for the adoption of a new Constitution that would effectively lead to the establishment of a new form of government in the US.

The Federal constitution brought the nation together under one Chief executive who was the president of the States and he acted as a unifying factor for the States.

Conclusion This paper set out to highlight the similarities and differences between the two American Constitutions and explain why Americans adopted a new form of government in 1789.

The paper has noted that the Articles of Confederations and the Federal Constitution both advocated for a free and independent United States bud differed on the issue of sovereignty of the states.

However, the Articles of Confederations proved to be an inadequate tool for governing the newly independent nation. The Federal Constitution was able to address the inadequacies of the Articles of Confederation and help in the formation of a more perfect union of the States.

References Jensen, M. (1940). The Articles of Confederation: An Interpretation of the Social Constitutional History of the American Revolution, 1774-1781. Wisconsin: Univ of Wisconsin Press.

King, J. (1871). A commentary on the law and true construction of the federal constitution. Harvard University.

McNeese, T. (2001). U.S. Constitution: American Experience. Boston: Lorenz Educational Press.

Swindler, W.F. (1981). Our First Constitution: The Articles of Confederation. ABA Journal, 67(1), 166-169.

[supanova_question]

Implementation, Strategic Controls, and Contingency Plans Research Paper cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Introduction Tiffany Company is a renowned corporation that started its operations in the year 1837. The company’s core mission is to provide quality rings and luxury brand items that are associated with romance, quality and style. Since its inception, the company has recorded a remarkable growth financially and structurally. The growth in performance is attributable to its effective operating plans, strategic control measures, innovation and creativity.

However, the witnessed economic recession and diminishing prioritization of jewelry items by customers is threatening to impede the company’s performance. As such, the company has identified key strategic issues that it seeks to pursue with an aim of countering the effects of the diminishing factors. The strategic issues are set to facilitate its growth both in the established and emerging markets.

Firstly, the company strategizes on expanding its market by venturing into new market such as India. This is to stop over saturating US markets. The company also strategizes on how to mitigate the possible risks that the economic complications may present.

The objectives To identify potential change management strategies that would enhance successful implementation of contingency plans

To identifies key success factors for implementation and functional tactics

To provide credible information relating to budget, action items and forecasted financials

To provide reliable information pertaining to risk management plan and key success factors in the implementation process

Functional tactics for change management Functional tactics are operating guidelines and production systems that aid performance in institutions. They are also strategic measures and plan of activities that facilitate execution of duties (Barney, 2007). Imperatively, Tiffany Corporation should adopt new tactical approaches to production, sales, marketing, and distribution of products.

The tactics that include the adoption of lean administration concept and proper market segmentation will to steer the realization of its contingency plans. This is because they are instrumental in ensuring effective management of resources, designing of products and development of new business units.

Action items, milestones and a deadline As noted, the company has an obligation to implement key action items that hold the capacity of sustaining its performance capacity. The action items would ensure that the company is operated under conventional management techniques (Barney, 2007). They will also facilitate the implementation of the strategic plans.

The items include, integration of democratic management system, designing of quality and affordable products and proper market segmentation. Other action items include improvement of brand recognition, infrastructure, distribution network and favorable pricing. Consequently, the company has made tremendous milestones in the management of its expansion and contingency plans since its inception.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Its major plans and strategic missions are being executed within specified timelines (Pearce

[supanova_question]

Human Resource Management in China Analytical Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Challenges Facing Human Resource Management in China

Recruitment

Selection

Induction

Conclusion

References

Introduction In the normal operations of a given firm, there are several factors that affect the HR strategies that the management will adopt (Tookey, 2004). These factors can originate within the internal mechanisms of a given organization.

Consequently, external factors can influence the HR strategies of a given firm. Examples of external factors that can affect the HR strategies of firms within a given nation include:

Politics

The economy

Social and cultural factors

This paper will focus on the impacts of politics, economy, social, and cultural factors have on the recruitment, selection, and induction processes in Chinese firms. China has been chosen the preferred nation of study due to the rapid economic advancement that the nation has been experiencing for the last several decades.

Due to this fact, domestic and multinational corporations that are situated within the nation have adjusted their HRM strategies and policies to meet up with the changes in the social, political, economic, and cultural environments within the nation (Thompson, 2008).

Challenges Facing Human Resource Management in China China has been experiencing a rapid economic growth in the since the 1960s. This trend has played a significant role in enhancing foreign direct investment in the nation (Gee, 2003).

As a result, the political, legal, economic, and cultural environments have changed due to the arrival of foreign based firms, expatriates, and the advancement of the locals with regards to education and expertise. These changes have made managing the human resource of various firms within China to be a tedious task.

However, as Yao (2006) asserted, a well managed organization will result in the attainment of the goals and objectives that it has set. In this respect therefore, firms across China have been adjusting and modifying their HR strategies to keep up with the trends and changes that are being experienced in their field of operation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This will ensure that these firms have an effective recruitment, selection, and induction process that will enable them to have an effective workforce capable of attaining their set goals and objectives.

According to the study conducted by (Melvin, 2007), the rate at which Chinese firms have been modifying their HRM strategies is higher than the rate at which these firms modify their production technology, research and development strategies, or profitability levels.

Organizations in China are thus facing several challenges in the process of their operations. Firstly, organizations in China face the problem of cross cultural adaptation. Most of the organizations that were included in the study by Nakiye (2005) were multinational corporations that were based in China.

From the results of this study, it was evident that the HR department found it difficult to develop effective strategies that enhance their recruitment, selection, and induction processes.

Another problem that affects the HRM in China is the presence of different values among employees. Irrespective of the backgrounds, it is a common phenomenon to have employees within a given organization who have different values as compared to each other.

In some instances, the employees might have values that differ from the core values of the organization that they are working for (Pucik, 2007).

In this respect therefore, the HR department has to come up with effective inductive measures that put in place the needs and requirements of all its employees to ensure that the set values, goals, and objectives are beneficial for all the employees and the firm as well (Sussman, 2007).

We will write a custom Essay on Human Resource Management in China specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The management styles of Chinese firms also affect the HR strategies that have been put in place. Initially, Chinese organizations adopted a centralized organization structure where most of the recruitment, selection, and inductive policies and decisions were concentrated at the managerial level.

This structure was not effective as it barred communication across managerial levels and excluded employees from the lower levels of management to participate in the process of decision making especially in the process of developing job descriptions.

Due to its inefficiencies, Chinese firms experienced high rates of employee turnover. In the process, they spent a lot of money in the recruitment process.

Since the 1990s however, most Chinese firms have adopted a decentralized form of organization structure that has otherwise enhanced the recruitment, selection, and inductive processes. This structure enhances communication and participation from all the employees and liaising among departments.

It also fosters teamwork and enhances the presence of a strong organization culture that plays a significant role in achieving the set goals and objectives of a given organization by ensuring that a firm has the right employees for specific roles and purposes within the organization.

Recruitment Recruitment is an essential process in the running and management of an organization. After a firm has finished designing the job description of a vacant position, recruitment is the next process that the firm has to undertake to select qualified candidates to fill this post.

Chinese firms utilize various recruitment techniques to ensure that they acquire the most qualified candidates to fill the vacant positions that might be present in an organization (McLean, 2003).

The political stability of a given nation plays a critical role in determining the HR strategies that will be put in place to ensure that a firm operates in an effective and efficient manner (Boblitz, 2006). During the last century, China experienced several changes in its political system. Shi (2010) described these changes as:

Not sure if you can write a paper on Human Resource Management in China by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Soviet traditional (1949-79)

Reform and departure (1979-1990)

Deepening and Mixture (1990-present)

During the soviet traditional era, most of the corporations in China were owned by the state. Due to this fact, the authority to recruit employees was vested in the government under labour bureaus and planning agencies (Latta, 1998).

Therefore, it is these agencies that determined the policies, rules, and regulations that were used to run and manage organizations within the nation.

Through these agencies, it was the government that determined when it will recruit employees, how many individuals will be selected in a recruitment exercise, the mode of recruitment, the salaries to be paid, and the procedures that should be taken in an event of firing an individual from an organization (Shi, 2010).

Therefore, rudimentary techniques were applied in the process of job description, job advertisement, and interviews. These techniques reduced the output, efficiency, and employee productivity.

Under this regime, the managers of specific enterprises were merely figureheads whose main work was to implement the rules and policies that have been developed by the government.

These practices were abolished after the Third Preliminary Session of the 11th Central Committee was passed in 1978 (Shi, 2010). The enactment of this law was the first step towards the privatization of state owned corporations.

This move paved way for the adoption and implementation of effective personnel management practices that were being practiced by Western States (McNally, 2002).

To be precise, firms that were established as a result of foreign direct investment and the firms that were fully privatized were the pioneers of modern HRM practices in China (McNally, 2002). Thus, traditional firms in China learned from these corporations and adopted their strategies to enhance their operations.

It is during this era that many firms in China started to use the newspaper as the most effective way of advertising jobs (Porter, 2010). Despite its effectiveness, this method has several disadvantages. First, the presence of many employers led to a delay in the publication of advertisements.

For instance, an advert could be published four weeks after it was set hence reducing the effectiveness of firms due to lack of employees.

Consequently, firms started to recruit graduates from universities and individuals from other firms who were highly experienced. This move ensures that firms had the most skilled and qualified individuals as part of their personnel.

The economic development that was experienced in China during the late 1980s and early 1990s had a significant impact on the recruitment process. The recruitment practices that were applied during this era were relatively similar as compared to the ones that were applied in the reform and departure era.

Thus, firms still utilized avenues such as recruitment of graduates and individuals with experience from other firms, posting job advertisement on newspapers and other forms of print media, organizing work fairs, and recruiting individuals who were still in the universities and colleges (Goddal, 2006).

Furthermore, Chinese firms incorporated the concept of online recruitment. This concept has played a critical role in increasing the competition for jobs in China since individuals from all around the world are applying for jobs in China (Goddal, 2006).

Firms in China advocate for the online recruitment system since it is cost effective, quick, has a wider outreach as compared to other forms of media, has high chances of response, capable of exploring specific employment niches and most importantly, the give a firm a modern outlook.

Given its nature therefore, the ‘three system’ impacted on the macro and micro levels of the economy. For instance, it played a critical role in attracting foreign direct investment in China (World Bank, 2013).

Selection After the abolition of the centralised organization structure in Chinese firms, managers were given the power to develop and implement management strategies and policies that would enable their organizations to achieve their set goals and objectives.

This move therefore enhanced competition at a domestic and international level within China. This was an effective strategy of enhancing the selection process.

Initially, the selection process was inefficient and corrupt since it was conducted by government agencies that had no special interests in the operations of state owned agencies. However, once the decentralization mechanism was put in place, firms were given the right to hire and select their own employees.

Thus, after a series of tests and interviews, it was common for Chinese firms to have a special committee that comprised of members of the HR department and various managers and representatives to ensure that the most qualified individuals are selected.

This process ensured that the workforce of a firm was highly skilled and competent.

However, the selection process was enhanced during the 1990s as a result of the economic growth that China was experiencing.

At the same time, the government influence on the selection process was replaced by the free-labour market. During this era, the ‘three system’ was also launched (Shi, 2010). The aim of this system was to enhance the following segments of employment:

Labour and personnel systems

Wage and welfare system

Social insurance system

Therefore, firms had the power to select individuals based on their credibility, skill, and expertise. This ensured that firms in China employed the right personnel for the right job, hence increasing their overall performance and efficiency levels (Reynolds, 1997).

Thus, to ensure that the correct individuals are selected for specific jobs within a firm, the following strategies are used in China:

Interviews

Psychological tests

Assessment tests

These candidate assessment tools are essential since they are used to screen the applicants to determine whether they are consistent with the profile that an employer is looking for.

Consequently, these strategies have proven to be essential since they reveal whether the values of the applicants are in line with the organizational culture of a given firm (Broadhaust, 2012).

Through these tools, an employer is capable of determining the qualification of a candidate, his/her strengths and weaknesses, his/her present behaviour, and the overall outcome that the employer might expect from the candidate (Broadhaust, 2012).

However, it has emerged that these practices have their strengths and weaknesses thus many firms in China utilize these tools collectively as tools for assessing a candidate, making the final decision as to hire him/her or not and most importantly, to negotiate with the candidate with regards to the terms of the job at hand.

Social and cultural factors also affect the HRM strategies that will be implemented in a given state. The social and cultural factors affect the values, norms, and beliefs of a given individual or a group of individuals (Irmer, 2007).

In the Traditional Soviet era, the selection processes in Chinese firms were run in accordance with the culture and beliefs that were put in place by the state. During this time, a high percentage of the employees were natives of the state.

Therefore, their norms, values, and beliefs were predominantly based on religion and culture (Shi, 2010). However, this practice proved not to be efficient since it reduced the performance of employees based on cultural and religious barriers.

In contemporary China, social norms and culture have played a critical role in determining the selection strategies that managers apply. For instance, most firms apply the Guanxi concept in their selection processes. Guanxi is a Chinese word meaning respect (Zhou, 2006).

In China, most managers try to build strong working relationships with their employees as a strategy to enhance their productivity. Through this technique, managers have been successful in enhancing communication, values, and beliefs among their employees.

This concept has thus been influential in developing a conducive working environment hence enabling firms and employees to achieve their goals and career objectives (Pinder, 2012). Through this strategy, employees in Chinese firms have learned to work together as a team irrespective of their gender, age, or religion.

Induction In traditional China, employees were working under stringent rules and regulations. As Hodgetts (2003) asserts, employees during this regime worked under an iron bowl where they were guaranteed their jobs until they retired.

Despite the assurance of their job security, the compensation of employees under during this era was very low as compared to western states. However, the employees enjoyed benefits such as housing, meal, commuting, education, and health allowances (Shi, 2010).

Given these conditions, individuals rarely changed their jobs or moved from one career to another, a concept that Klein (2011) referred to as ‘a bird in the cage.’

The economic changes that were experienced in China had a lot of impact on the induction process as compared to the recruitment and selection processes. However, it is during the 1990s that most of the Chinese firms adopted modern HRM strategies.

The reform and departure era played a significant role in the development of the Chinese economy. Grebe (2005) regarded this period as the basis of the modern Chinese economy.

During the late 1980s and early 1990s however, firms in China required reforms to be put in place to ensure that the policies, rules, and regulations that will be implemented will be sustainable in the long run. Managers and employees needed to be assured about the sustainability of the adopted policies and structures.

Consequently, reformations needed to be put in place to ensure that the traditional practices from the traditional soviet era have been totally eliminated.

To realize this goal, the Labour Law was implemented in 1993. The aim of this law was to enhance a market-based labour relationship between corporations and their employees (Mendenhall, 2007). As a result, it became mandatory for employees to sign employment contracts with their staff.

This law therefore played a critical role in the induction process of employees since the contracts contained information such as the length of the contract, salaries/wages to be paid, the benefits to be earned, terms of services, and liability in an event of breach of contract (Oddou, 2011).

This strategy eliminated the control that the state had over the employment of workers in China. It also enhanced job security among employees and guaranteed increased performance from the viewpoint of employers (Moorhead, 2008).

The adoption of the ‘three system’ to enhance the operation of Chinese firms during the early 1990s had positive impacts on the inductive process in the nation. The adoption of the ‘three system’ led to the elimination of the egalitarian compensation structure.

This move saved firms a lot of money that was paid to employees who were not actively involved in the day-to-day operations of the firm. Instead, a more rewarding payment scheme was put in place.

Characterised with incentives such as bonuses and overtime pay, this strategy has been influential in enhancing the performance of employees in Chinese firms.

Unlike the wage system that was in place during the Traditional Soviet era, the new payment scheme was also an effective inductive system that improved the compensation of employees to ensure that matched with the cost of living.

Thus, the wage rate of employees varies from one region to the next depending on the cost of living.

Finally, social and cultural values negatively affected the management strategies in traditional China. The management gave strict orders to the employees at lower levels who were reluctant to work in accordance with them.

In this end, this system developed an organizational culture that is based on ignorance, lack of respect, and lack of the desire to succeed (Goddal, 2008). Individualism was a norm in these organizations since the employees never saw the importance of working together as a team to achieve the set goals and objectives.

This era was also characterized by high levels of discrimination with regards to gender (Goddal, 2008). It was a traditional belief that women should not be educated. This belief denied many females the chance to work. The workforce in many organizations comprised of men.

However, the enactment of the labour laws and the ‘three system’, enabled managers to come up with effective inductive strategies that would overcome the setback that Chinese firms were experiencing with regards to their culture and beliefs.

First, most firms adopted a decentralized form of governance where power was distributed across all levels of management. This greatly enhanced communication and teamwork spirit hence boosting the overall performance of an organization.

Conclusion Over the last century, China has experienced a lot of changes in its social, political and economic environments. These changes have played a critical role in transforming the HRM strategies that the firms within the nation have developed and implemented to ensure that they realize their set goals and objectives.

Thus, the firms have transformed their operations from utilizing traditional HRM strategies that were being practiced during the Traditional Soviet era to adopting and implementing modern HRM strategies that are common in Western States.

This move has greatly increased the effectiveness and efficiency of these organizations hence enabling them to achieve their goals and objectives.

References Boblitz, M 2006, ‘Looking out the window: Market intelligence for a view of the real world’, Healthcare Financial Management, vol. 1 no. 2, pp. 47-53.

Broadhaust, L, 2012, ‘Business and the risk of crime in China’, The British Journal of Criminology, vol. 2 no. 3, pp. 15-22.

Gee, P 2003, ‘The compelling case for perpetual strategic planning’, Service Line: Eight Essential Rules, vol. 2 no. 3, pp. 62-64.

Goddal, S 2008, ‘Foreing dilemmas in China: The case of FDIs in Shangai’, Asia Pacific Business Review, vol. 2 no. 1, pp. 1-21.

Grebe, M 2005, ‘Strategic financial planning: What every trustee needs to know about facility replacement’,Trustee, vol. 12 no. 4, 24-28.

Hodgetts, S 2003, ‘U. S. Multinationals’ expatriate compensation strategies’, Compensation and Benefits Review, vol. 2 no. 1, pp. 57-62.

Irmer, B 2007, Human resource capital, Sage, New York.

Klein, R 2011, ‘Compensating your overseas executives: Part three. Exporting U.S. stock option plans to expatriates’, Compensation and benefits review, vol. 6 no. 1, pp. 27-38.

Latta, M 1998, ‘Expatriate incentives: Beyond tradition’, HR Focus, vol. 75 no. 2, pp. 53-67.

McLean, R 2003, Financial management in healthcare organizations, Clifton Park, New York.

McNally, K 2002, ‘Compensation as a strategic tool’, Human Resource Magazine, vol 12 no. 1, pp. 59-66.

Melvin, S 2007, ‘Shipping out’, The China Business Review, vol. 2 no. 1, pp. 30-34.

Mendenhall, M 2007, Human Resource Management, Sage, Chicago.

Moorhead, G 2008, Organizational behavior: managing people and organization, Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston.

Nakiye, A 2005, International assignment reconsidered: Readings

[supanova_question]

The Vasa Capsizes Case Study essay help

The management of large-scale projects such as the VASA II in 1629 has real challenges which affect the project. As a project manager one has to be involved in all the logistics of such a large project.

I would assign the job to design the VASA II to a company that is competent enough to deliver the project to the desired quality and deliver the project on time. The selection of the right company has to consider a lot of factors.

The choosing has to look at the organizations ability to carry out such a project without being overwhelmed. Because the VASA II is to be better than the VASA I then the pressure is on the firm that is to get the contract.

Considering the factors that befell the VASA I then the firm has to be ready to work harder in the design of the ship. The firm has to be properly designed so that it will not fail as the VASA I did.

Because the VASA II has to be the largest and most glorious ship on the ocean then it will be designed with the specifications of the king. The firm that will meet these requirements will be awarded the contract to deliver the ship. (Kugeler, M.M, Rosemann, N.A., 2003).

Due to the financial nature in Sweden at this time then the firm has to be able to cope with the risks. Such a large project is prone to risks. These include running out of resources to complete such a project. There is also the risk of running out of time to deliver the project which will result in losses.

These losses suffered will be borne by the people so it is important for the firm to provide the project in the specified time. The scenario in the ship building industry is that the designs are not calculated mathematically in order to come up with the best and stable design. The shipwright has to design the ship.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a project manager one should ensure that the shipwright uses the design of previous successful ships to develop the best and most stable vessel. The reference from other designs will also improve the aspect such as loading of the ship and its weight ratios. (Miesing, P., 2004).

The process of project management should be followed keenly. After the planning and designing phase then the implementation of the design comes into action. This execution is the most crucial part because of the lack of proper mathematical ratios of the materials.

The shipwright has to determine the displacement volume, its form and weight stability. With such factors as these then the shipbuilder is crucial in the execution of the plan. The proper execution of the design depends on the craftsmanship, experience and professional skill of the shipbuilders. (Martin Stevens, 2002)

Due to the many battles that Sweden is involved in then delivery of the ship is crucial because it is expected to bring victories to the country. The delivery of the ship is crucial for protection of the country.

It will carry troops and supplies to the battlefields. It will also increase the revenue of Sweden by levying taxes on the cargo ships. The ship will also blockade the enemy ships that try to escape from any port.

With such demands on the firm then it will be crucial for the delivery in a timely manner. As the project manager then the delivery of the project is dependent on the organization chosen to build the ship. (Martin Stevens, 2002).

References Kugeler, M.M, Rosemann, N.A (2003). Process Management: A guide for the design of business processes. New York: Prentice Hall.

We will write a custom Case Study on The Vasa Capsizes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Martin Stevens (2002). Project Management Pathways: Theory and Practice. London: APM Publishing Limited, 2002.

Miesing, P. (2004). The Vasa Capsizes. Web.

[supanova_question]

Theories of Substance Addiction Research Paper essay help free: essay help free

Introduction Substance addiction refers to a condition where one develops heavy dependence on drugs. People use drugs and alcohol because of the pleasurable effects of drugs. Unfortunately, continuous drug use leads to development of compulsive behaviors. This often hinders one from living a normal life. Substance addition is characterized by physical dependence and emotional stress.

When a person develops physical dependence on a drug, the body becomes biologically programmed to the presence of the drug. Consequently, the drug fails to elicit the same effect and this leads to tolerance. The brain may also develop over reaction to the drug or related stimuli as a result of physical dependence on the drug (NIDA, 2007).

The mechanisms of substance addiction still remain contentious among many people, a majority of them believing that the people who abuse drugs generally do not have moral principles. Others believe that these people can cease substance abuse by just moderating their actions. However, scientific studies have shown that drugs alter the brain in unprecedented mechanisms, triggering compulsive substance abuse.

Substances of abuse contain certain chemical ingredients that act on the brain cells, interfering with the communication mechanisms and the nerve cell’s ability to receive, transmit and process information (Webb, Snlehitta

[supanova_question]

When the Fate of the Company Hangs by a Thread: the Significance of the Leader and the Choice of an Adequate Leadership Style Essay essay help site:edu

In the modern world, becoming a leader is often viewed as the pinnacle of a person’s career and the goal that one must strive for. However, very few people actually know what being a leader means and what responsibilities it involves.

In fact, one will definitely have hard times even trying to define what leadership is – there are too many opinions concerning what leadership involves, as well as what the functions of a leader exactly are.

For example, some scholars view leadership as an ability to lead the company to its ultimate success, therefore, focusing on the material effects of good leadership (Bass, 2008, 24).

According to another school of thought, leadership involves managing the conflicts that occur within the employees and solving the problems that are related to the specified business field (Bass, 2008, 24).

The third opinion on leadership claims that a true leader must be a perfect strategist and, therefore, praises a true leader’s ability to plan the course of the company’s actions ahead (Bass, 2008, 24).

As it often turns out, the truth lies somewhere in the middle; hence, the definition of leadership includes each of the above-mentioned aspects, since at present, the concept of leadership also includes “contributing to social order, introducing major change, giving meaning and purpose to work and organizations, empowering followers, and infusing organizations with values and ideology” (Bass, 2008, 24).

With that in mind, the merits of effective leadership arte not restricted to the increase in the company’s revenues, though the given effects are expected as well.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Effective leadership must lead to improving the relationships between the staff and the employer, as well as among the employees, help solve the conflicts that arise among the members of the team and between the employees and the managerial, control organizational behavior and keep it stable, and perform many other functions.

To approach the situation in a specific company and improve it greatly, as well as set the course for the firm’s further development, however, a general idea of leadership is not enough.

To solve a particular problem, a particular kind of leadership must be used, which is why several leadership styles, with the help of which different problems can be addressed, have been distilled.

Autocratic Presupposing that the leader has complete power over his/her employees and the working process, autocratic leadership seems to have become quite out of date, since it does not allow for much creativity.

Bureaucratic Following only by-the-book principles and not allowing the employees to make any decisions other than the ones prescribed for each specific occasion, bureaucratic type of leadership often leads to the company’s decay.

Charismatic When the leader relies completely on the effect that (s)he has on the employees, (s)he chooses the charismatic leadership style. In contrast to the transformational style, the given model does not presuppose any changes within the company.

Democratic As one might have already guessed, democratic leadership style involves the practices that allow the employees feel that they have an impact on the company decisions. Leading to job satisfaction, the given approach seems one of the best.

We will write a custom Essay on When the Fate of the Company Hangs by a Thread: the Significance of the Leader and the Choice of an Adequate Leadership Style specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Laissez-faire Translated loosely from French as “leaving things the way they are”, laissez-faire leadership allows the employees make their own decisions that influence the production process and presupposes little control over the staff.

People-oriented Quite a recent innovation in the sphere of business, the given approach demands that the leader should take into account the employees’ specifics and demands when assigning them with certain tasks. People-oriented approach has several features of a democratic leadership style.

Servant Unlike one might have thought, a leader does not have to be necessarily recognized among the employees. As long as the leader can give commands and be certain that people will follow them, leadership can be considered effective. Therefore, a leader does not necessarily have to stand out of the crowd.

On the contrary, a leader can do the same task as the rest of the employees, which the servant leadership style presupposes.

Task-oriented It is quite peculiar that a task-oriented style of leadership can also have certain features of the autocratic one. Setting the task completion as its ultimate goal, task-oriented leadership style often presupposes the revenue-over-people policy. In a way, the given approach is the exact opposite of the people-oriented approach.

Transactional Rather paternalistic and quite controlling, a transactional type of leadership presupposes that the leader has the power both to observe the working process and to intervene it, as well as punish the employees for not performing their functions the right way (Betrocci, 2009, 48).

Transformational Traditionally considered one of the best types of leadership, transformational leadership style aims at transforming people’s attitude towards the work that they do, which is carried out with the help of engaging them into the activities that they prefer and learning about their likes and dislikes.

Environmental The given leadership style demands that the leader of a group of people carefully analyze the environment in a specific team and build the leadership strategy around the specifics of the environment in the given group.

Not sure if you can write a paper on When the Fate of the Company Hangs by a Thread: the Significance of the Leader and the Choice of an Adequate Leadership Style by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The downside of the given strategy is that the leader has to follow the moods within the group, which practically means that employees set the course for the leader to follow, which is quite unnatural.

Visionary When an organization needs a change, visionary leadership style is typically preferred over the rest of the leadership styles, since it helps set the course for the company to follow, and develops a clear strategy for the employees to comply with.

It is worth mentioning that, in contrast to Cooper, Johnson and Holdsworth, Northouse (2010) offers a slightly different classification that is, in a sense, more general than the above-mentioned one. Therefore, the features of each approach listed above can be found in the ones that are suggested by Northouse.

To show graphically the differences between the traditional approach offered by Northouse and the recent innovation with a few new types of leadership coined by Cooper, Johnson

[supanova_question]

Organizational Culture in Change Management Research Paper scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

List of References

Introduction The success of a story of a company depends on certain conditions. These conditions can be thought of as mandatory when starting a business. The conditions being referred to are:

Tapping the market of products and services that has little or no competition.

Offer services or products that cannot be provided by anyone else.

If a product owns a large share of the market, then the organization has no worries regarding its competition.

Getting rid of the competition by letting them compete against each other.

If the company is the sole buyer of a product, then it is easy to negotiate a price with the supplier.

These factors seem like the ideal situation to start a business and would most probably generate high revenue. But, in reality the top leading companies of the United States never even applied one of these rules, and yet their stocks rocketed in the capital markets from 1972 to 2002.

So the question arises: What was their secret of success? What was the factor that made these companies one of the best companies of all time? The answer is quite simple organizational culture.

Discussion It is understood that there is no universally accepted definition of organizational culture; however, we can say that organizational culture is the factors and the points that contribute the surroundings of an organization in multiple ways.

These factors can range from the belief of an individual to the acts of an entire group the organization culture of any institution plays a huge role in its productivity. But, applying changes to the organizational culture is not easy it takes a lot of hard work, effort, and can be a time consuming process.

A culture that develops within an organization is quite difficult to change and if someone joins the organization they have to adapt to the new culture, and eventually he or she becomes a part of that culture. These employees eventually try to preserve that environment to which they have gotten used to.

Those who do not fit the culture usually tend to leave the place. Some institutions tend to penalize the person whose behavior is not in accordance to the culture that prevail wit in that organization. Learning within an organization is a difficult phase, but it is an important one if the person is to maintain his job (Todd, 1999).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Research on the management of organizational culture and organizational control is very limited. Moreover, through studies it has been established that there is a relation between the two it is still not clear to what extent is the effect of organizational culture and how to control or manage it.

Little has been known on the phenomenon of organizational culture, and there has still been no proper way known to measure it.

While some believe that there is no method to measure organizational culture, others believe that some factors can be taken into account to measure organizational culture (Lawson

[supanova_question]

Value Psychological Testing Coursework essay help: essay help

A comparison and contrast of psychological tests In the fields of research and psychology, it is important that cases be measured in precision. Psychological testing therefore comes in handy, whereby valid results are arrived at after correct administration of treatments.

It is after psychological testing that researchers understand the behavior and character of an individual. As such, it is a way of solving problems for the psychologists by identifying the strengths and weaknesses of a person.

There are different types of psychological testing some of which determine the personality of individuals while others determine their IQ. Thus, psychological testing can be divided into clinical interviews, personality assessment, assessment of Intellectual Functioning, and behavioral assessment.

Other psychological tests include aptitudes and management skills tests. Each of the aforementioned psychological tests differs from the other in terms of evidence base and the type of results obtained with regard to validity and reliability.

Validity is defined as the honesty of the response given by a respondent in a survey while reliability is the consistency in results obtained when tested suing different testing methods (Viswanathan, 2005).

Clinical Interview vs. personality assessment The two are similar given that they present an opportunity for the professional to obtain much information with regard to family data and individual background of the persons being assessed. Both tests also create a face-to-face discussion between the researcher and respondent.

However, they differ in terms of setting and the fact that the clinical interview normally lasts for about one to two hours while the personality assessment could take as much time as possible (Gregory, 2007).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition to this, personality assessment is objective based while the clinical interview is open allowing the researcher to seek as much information as they may deem fit.

Different types of decisions I-O practitioners might make using results of psychological tests Industrial/ organizational psychology entails the scientific study of the psychology that have an impact on the productivity of individuals at work. As such, I-O psychology works to improve the working conditions and environment of people.

Thus, I-O practitioners normally seek to generate solutions to the problems that people face at their places of work. I-O practitioners could use tests such as biographical data, integrity tests, job knowledge tests, interviews, and physical ability tests just to mention a few (Kaplan and Saccuzzo, 2009).

Once the aforementioned tests are tested on individuals, results are obtained hence decisions are made. I-O practitioners could either make individual or institutional decisions.

Individual decisions are those that the researcher comes into a conclusion after they have carried out the specific tests while institutional decisions are those that other people make after looking at the results obtained by different researchers.

Comparative decisions could also be made by comparing the different scores obtained by different researchers in a specific test (Kaplan and Saccuzzo, 2009).

Recent trends in the use of tests in organizations It is clear that research has found its way in almost all organizations in the recent past. Employers have been noted to carry out internal research as well as incorporating external practitioners to establish the unfavorable working conditions for their workers. This is because of employee motivation, which is seen as the backbone of productive and quality output by the employees. Thus, psychological testing has tremendously grown to become a norm in every organization that is competing globally.

We will write a custom Coursework on Value Psychological Testing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Reference List Gregory, R. (2007). Psychological Testing: History, Principles, and Applications. California: Allyn

[supanova_question]

Modernization Theory and the Developing Countries Essay argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Definition

Modernization theory and the developing countries

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Modernization theory is one of the theories of development that seeks to justify why developing countries are not developed. This theory considers the emulation of the developed countries as the best way the third world countries can achieve development.

Definition Alexander Dolgin in an article titled manifesto of the new economy defines modernization theory as “A version of market oriented development theory that argues that low-income societies develop economically only if they give up their traditional ways and adopt modern economic institutions, technologies, and cultural values that emphasize savings and productive investment”(Dolgin 126).

Modernization theory and the developing countries Modernization theory postulates that development can only be realized by adopting the policies that were used by the developed countries (Zapf 48). This theory seeks to use the developed countries as the role models and that the path to development they followed is the best.

It states that developing or the third world countries particularly in Asia, Africa and Latin America and the Caribbean will only be developed if they follow the route of development used by the western countries. The proponents of modernization theory include W.A Lewis, Walter Rostow and Talcott Parsons. These scholars sought to explain why poorer countries were not developing.

These features of modern societies according to Talcott Parsons relates to basic institutions which may include competitive democracy, liberalized market economy, mass consumption as well as welfare state (Zapf 50). Proponents of modernization theory believe that the introduction of modern technology in manufacturing, technology and agriculture will lead to industrialization and development of the developing countries.

This is because internal factors in the developing countries like illiteracy, lack of division of labor and rooted agrarian system (Zapf 49) are associated with their underdevelopment and only a change away from these factors is a tactic for development. It is true that these factors are largely impediments to development. Issues like overpopulation, political instabilities, massive corruption and poor governance have prevented developing nations from making steps towards economic prosperity.

Since modernization theory involves moving away from ancient ways to modern ways of social, economic and political systems, this means that development in the third world can not be achieved without adopting the policies that the already developed used. Scholars of modernization theory argue that underdevelopment in third world countries are as a result of internal factors like poverty and indigenous culture.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The recent revolutions in the Middle East and the Maghreb and the political conflicts witnessed in Kenya and Ivory Coast have supported the arguments of contemporary modernization scholars. This is because developing countries have to adopt a liberal democracy which is associated with the political stability and prosperous economies of the developed world.

This theory has been criticized because of its ethnocentrism which seems to ignore the importance of social institutions and only seeks to westernize the worlds; modernization theory has also widened the inequality between developing and developed worlds (Inglehart and Berker 19).

Conclusion Modernisation theory has contributed significantly to the development of the third world countries. This has been achieved through elimination of factors that hinder development. An example is the adoption of family planning; this has led to population control in the third world countries. High population growth was largely associated with the chronic poverty of the developing countries. Mechanisation of agriculture which replaced traditional ways of agriculture is credited for enhancing food security.

Works Cited Dolgin, Alexander. Manifesto of the new economy. Second invisible hand of the market. Web.

Inglehart, Ronald and Berker, Wayne. Modernization, cultural change, and the persistence of traditional values in American Sociological Review. Web.

Zapf, Wolfgang. Modernization theory and the non-western world. Munich: Post Dam university press, 2004. Print.

[supanova_question]

Company Lifecycle in Business Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction Company lifecycles are the stages of development through which a business goes through. New businesses are faced with various challenges throughout their lives. Failure to deal with the problems will lead to the downfall of a business due to financial losses. The current paper focuses on the differences between the lifecycle and financial strategies adopted by a company that focuses on domestic expansion and a company that focuses on international expansion.

Business Lifecycle Seed stage

The first stage of a business is the seed stage. Business ideas and plans are developed at this stage. The challenge of this stage is market acceptance. Many companies concentrate on one market segment to enhance success. Money and resources should be used effectively during this stage. The company stipulates its focus on such areas as skills, experience, and passion.

Other key elements of this stage include business ownership structure, business planning, and accessing professional advisors. The source of capital for expansion becomes a challenge to many companies since they rely on owners, friends, customers, banks, and government grants. A company that focuses on international expansion draws clear guidelines to attract international investors. It has to invest in a wide range of products to offset the risks of business failure.

Start-Up

It is the second stage in business establishment. Business exists legally at this stage. The challenges of this stage include lack of money and time for marketing. The business owners have to take time to determine whether or not the business is on the right track (Hitchcock

[supanova_question]

Cirque du Soleil’s- HRM practices Case Study essay help: essay help

Cirque du Soleil is a Canadian based company that deals in the organization and staging of entertainment events. The company hosts its events in different countries in the world.

Due to its international inclination, Cirque du Soleil ought to create an inclusive and accommodating environment for all its employees and stakeholders in order to enhance its reputation.

The main question to ask is how a company can effectively adopt human resource practices in order to be in a position to manage diversity. The main issue in this case is the problem of managing diversity in Cirque du Soleil.

The employees of the company are drawn from different countries, which depict a lot of diversity in terms of the corporate culture (Pawar 2). There was also the problem of accommodating employees with medical conditions, as is the case of discriminating against an HIV positive performer in the company (Pawar 2).

As mentioned in the preceding part, Cirque du Soleil was facing main issues in the structure of its human resource practices to capture the dynamics in the company. The dynamics in the company were necessitated by the expansion of operations of the company into other regions of the world.

The nature of the operations of the company makes it exposed to different work environments with diverse conditions. This requires the change in human resource policies to capture the managerial diversities that feature in these environments.

This called for the development and implementation of strategic management policies. Such policies are often desired as they help a company to respond to human resource issues amicably. From the look into the case, it has come out that the company is facing issues to do with managing diversity in human resource (Pawar 6).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This called for major changes in human resource practices of the company. These changes were to be developed by the human resource department, in liaison with the top management of the company. These are the two main parties in finding a solution to issues of management diversity in Cirque du Soleil.

The first and perhaps the most critical step in solving human resource problems within the organization is the appreciation of the fact that a problem exists in the organization. This is one of the key responsibilities of top organizational managers (Armstrong 112).

Concerning the issue of discriminating an employee on the grounds of his status of health, the Vice President of Human Resources was sorry about the incidence and noted that the company had a set of anti-discrimination policies that needed to be revised (Pawar 2).

The position of the company’s management was that the company needed to come up with better human resource policies and practices that could help it deal with the issue of human resources management that it was facing.

The position of the human resource department was that the company needed to ensure that its human resource operations were flexible in order to capture the human resource needs in each destination where the company staged its performance (Pawar 6).

The principle that underlies this position is that each region in the world is governed by human resource policies and legislations that may differ with the culture of human resource management in the company.

Therefore, the company has to set corporate headquarters in different regions in the world, which could help them set human resource policies to govern their events in those regions.

We will write a custom Case Study on Cirque du Soleil’s- HRM practices specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Concerning the issue of recruitment, Gagnot noted that the company needed to embrace the recruitment of young and inexperienced people in order to encourage creativity (Pawar 6).

The stakeholders of any company are often termed as the main determinants of the success of the company. In this case, the main stakeholders to the issues facing the company are:

The top management of the company

The human resource department of the company

The employees and,

The spectators, who are also the customers of the company.

The primary stakeholders to the issues that are presented in this case are the employees, the top executive of the company and the human resource department. The company faces a crisis in the the formulation and implementation of human resource policies and practices.

The employees are directly affected by the human resource practices in the company, such as was the discrimination against the employee who was discriminated on health grounds.

Due to the fact that the employees of the company performed in different regions of the world, their remuneration was also affected by the diversity of human resources policies in different regions (Pawar 6).

The top management of the company, with the help of the human resource department, is charged with the key responsibility of ensuring that they devise strategic policies for managing employee issues in the company.

In strategic human resource management, employees are often taken as the key resource in any given company. The management of Cirque observed that the goodness of the company depended on its employees (Pawar 6).

All the human resource policy improvements in Cirque du Soleil were to be developed and enforced by the human resource department. This makes the HR department of the company the central player in the issues that were facing the company.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Cirque du Soleil’s- HRM practices by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The HR was responsible for creating a favorable work environment for the employees (Pawar 8). On the other hand, the customers are considered as the second stakeholders in this case.

Most of the developments in the company were geared at enticing more spectators in the event of the company, thereby attracting more earnings (Pawar 5).

The company has to embrace strategic principles amidst the efforts to streamline the human resource practices in Cirque du Solei. This is noted in the manner in which the company’s human resource department embraced changes in the employee management process.

The company has to compromise most of the cultural practices that had been utilized for a relatively long period of time. For instance, the company changed its policy in recruitment by choosing to employ young and inexperienced artists and training them to perfection (Pawar 7).

As part of initiatives to attend to the needs of its employees, the company was forced to pursue an open human resource policy that encouraged feedback from the employees.

This is attributed to the fact that employee feedback is critical in determining the positives and negatives of any new HR policy that is introduced in the organization (Pawar 11). Failure to listen to the employees often results in a smoldering crisis in the company.

As observed in the case, Cirque du Soleil, juts as many other companies, was affected by problems of managing employees due to diversity in the company. Whenever a company is faced with an issue of management, the management ought to appreciate the existence of such a problem.

This gives room for policy change, thus the devise of solutions to the challenge (Dessler 2). This is what happened in Cirque du Soleil; the recognition of the presence of discriminatory policies in the company by the Assistant President in charge of human resource in the company.

This same line of actions is utilized in the company throughout the sustenance of the various stages of human resource management in Cirque du Soleil. This implies a high level of application of strategic HR practices in the company.

Works Cited Armstrong, Michael. Strategic Human Resource Management: A Guide to Action. London: Kogan Page, 2008. Internet resource.

Dessler, Gray, and Biju Varkkey. Human Resource Management. Delhi: Pearson, 2011. Print.

Pawar, Manasi. Cirque du Soleil’s Human Resource Management Practices. ICMR Center for Management Research: India, 2007. Print.

[supanova_question]

Planning History: Utopian Planners Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Ebenezer Howard and the Garden City

Frank Lloyd Wright’s and the Broadacre City

LeCorbusier and the Radiant city

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction Urban planning has evolved into different forms throughout the history of cities and city planning. Urban planning aims at improving a city to cater for the future social and economic needs of its inhabitants. It seeks to link the existing knowledge with the appropriate forms of action (Sager 1992, P. 67). Planning, therefore, has to be visionary with an appropriate idea about the future design of a city and the implementation of that design.

Modern urban planning entails two different approaches; visionary city planning that involves radical changes in the design of the city with substantial social and economic changes, and the institutionalized city planning, which proposes changes to the existing city structures and is affected by the prevailing economic and political forces within the city.

Historically, urban city planning began in the nineteenth century with the sole purpose to regulate the new urban growth brought about by industrialization and improvement of transport and communication following the invention of the railway (Sitte 1965, P. 43). Military strategies to control territories and aesthetics of expression of cities significantly influenced visionary urban planning in the nineteenth century.

Although visionary city planning made many achievements in city building, many of which are still monumental and beautiful today, it remained insensitive to the wider needs of the society and would have been disastrous if implemented on a large scale. The poor living conditions of the urban poor, forced most middle class urban dwellers towards the end of the nineteenth century to begin agitating for reforms in city planning, which culminated into utopian planning (Cherry 1970, P. 87).

Central to this movement was Ebenezer Howard, who conceptualized the ‘garden city’ to be the ideal alternative to the city planning of the nineteenth century. The garden city was an attempt to connect the vision for a new social order to the spatial expression of the city (Fisherman 1977, P. 23).

Le Corbusier conceptualized the “Contemporary City for Three Million People” in 1922 and the “Radiant City” in 1935 both of which proposed a centralized city with high population and many facilities including skyscraper buildings and residential apartments (Cherry 1970, p. 89). Frank Lloyd Wright on the other hand, envisioned the Broadacre City plan in 1935, which was a decentralized city with low population and suburban residential homes (Mumford 1946, p. 42).

Ebenezer Howard and the Garden City The garden city was a brilliant idea conceived by Ebenezer Howard in response to the environmental and social changes that were results of industrial revolution in Britain. Industrial revolution encouraged migration into urban areas and consequently led to poor and unhealthy living conditions in cities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In a bid to curb overpopulation in cities and the associated deterioration of social facilities, Howard envisioned an organized planned dispersal, whereby people could set up industries in towns to provide the services and various occupations to the people of a particular culture within the town (Gossel

[supanova_question]

The Seven Deadly Sins of Outsourcing Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

The concept of outsourcing enables external vendors to carry out organizational activities on behalf of a particular company. An organization can decide to outsource all or part of its functional activities depending on its capacity. Outsourcing was traditionally meant for those companies that were struggling financially.

In recent times, outsourcing has become a common service even for those companies that are doing well financially. Some of the commonly outsourced services include information technology, accounting, human resources and telecommunication services.

The performance of many firms has significantly improved due to outsourcing. The operating income of companies can increase as a result of outsourcing. Some company executives are of the view that outsourcing is a very powerful tool when it comes to reducing the cost of production.

Outsourcing helps organizations to focus on their core business and competencies and at the same time allocate the possible distractions to outside vendors.

Despite the economic advantages, outsourcing has got its limitations and does not always guarantee success. Outsourcing can sometimes fail due to some deadly sins that are committed by organization.

The first deadly sin that organizations commit is outsourcing for some services that should not in the first place be outsourced. There are some activities that are very important to a company’s business and should not be outsourced.

The company is bound to suffer a lot if the vendor goes bankrupt or fails to deliver the services according to specifications. Managers should have a better understanding on the kind of services to outsource rather than simply copying what competitors do.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Managers should carefully examine the prospective vendors to determine if they have the required qualifications and capacity to deliver quality services.

Selecting the wrong vendor is the second sin that organization commit when outsourcing. This is why it important to critically analyze vendors and check their capacity to deliver before outsourcing for their services.

Some selected vendors can end up not living up to expectation even after signing contracts with organizations. Outsourcing can only be successful if the management selects a vendor with the capacity to deliver.

It is also necessary for organizations to look for the quality of services being offered by vendors rather than being excited by vendors with the lowest bids. Service providers must meet certain basic qualifications before they are selected.

Some of the necessary soft qualifications include flexibility, having a good cultural shift, trustworthiness and the desire to facilitate continuous improvement. The hard qualifications include the ability to provide the best solution at a lower cost.

It is also important to note that cutting costs is not the only reason why firms outsource. Organizations should only rely on first hand information about a particular vendor in order to make the right decision when it comes to outsourcing.

The third deadly sin that firms commit when it comes to outsourcing is writing poor contracts. Rushing to sign a contact with a vendor without careful consideration can lead to problems in the future.

We will write a custom Essay on The Seven Deadly Sins of Outsourcing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The outsourcing contract should be precise and should also include a clause that allows a firm to measure the performance of a vendor in an objective manner. The outsourcing contract should allow a firm to switch vendors if the expectations are not met.

A balance of power between organizations and vendors can only be achieved through a well crafted contract. A good outsourcing contract should be precise, complete, incentive based, balanced and flexible.

Overlooking personnel issues is the fourth deadly sin that firms commit in the outsourcing process. It is important for managers to ensure that their employees understand the reason for outsourcing.

An organization can lose some of its valuable employees who may view outsourcing as an underestimation of their skills.

Outsourcing may also lead to industrial strikes because the employees feel that their jobs are at stake due to outsourcing. It is important for management to strike a balance between outsourcing and the job security of its employees.

The fifth deadly sin that firms commit in the outsourcing process is the tendency to loose control over the outsourced activity. The client should be able to have a complete control over the outsourced activity by actively managing the vendor.

Organizations should select some managers with some technical skills and the ability to manage vendors. Firms may be forced to hire new employees with a special mission of managing vendors.

The sixth sin that firms commit when it comes to outsourcing is overlooking the hidden costs of outsourcing. The viability of outsourcing can be threatened by some of the hidden costs that some firms tend to ignore. Some of the hidden costs include contracting and vendor management costs.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Seven Deadly Sins of Outsourcing by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The rationale for outsourcing can only be challenged when the firm pays attention to some of the hidden costs associated with outsourcing.

The seventh sin that firms commit when outsourcing is the failure to plan for a clear exit strategy. It is important for managers to anticipate the possibility that an outsourcing contract can come to an end at any time. Reversibility clauses should be included in an outsourcing contract as one of the best exit strategies.

[supanova_question]

Max Weber. Natural and Social Sciences Exploratory Essay essay help

Introduction Max Weber’s contributions in the field of sociology remain unparalleled. He is a classical sociologist whose ideas, themes and theories influenced the course of sociology. Importantly, Weber was opposed to the idea held by positivists that empirical research was the most effective way of understanding social reality.

He advocated for qualitative research in analyzing human behavior and actions. To him, patterns of interaction are not static since they change overtime (Honigsheim 2003, p. 73). As such, it is incorrect to suppose that the causality of specific human actions remains the same.

This paper intends to use various concepts held by Max Weber regarding the differences between natural science and social science. Can natural science be in a position to evaluate social reality?

To answer this question, the paper will use ‘Weberian’ concepts of value relevance, ideal type, social objectivity and most importantly, anti positivism.

Weber’s Value Relevance and Ideal Type: Arguments against Natural Science Weber was an anti positivist and rejected the idea that it is possible to generalize social reality. Weber believed that human actions are subject to change and that natural science generalizes before proceeding to study the subject matter.

To him, only by understanding the behavior that man exhibits that a scientist is able to comprehend the social reality. Importantly, Weber addressed the concepts of value bound and value neutrality in research.

According to Honigsheim (2003, p. 78), the concept explains that the differences between natural and social science lies in the intentions of the researcher as opposed to inapplicability of empirical principles of research.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The major distinction between the two sciences therefore is the interests and the intentions of the researcher as opposed to the various methods used to study the subject matter.

Unlike natural scientists, Weber argues that social scientist should uphold value relevance in research. To him, value relevance is the ability of a social researcher to withhold his or her values when undertaking a social research.

The values imparted on the researcher should facilitate him or her to comprehend the social contexts he/she intends to observe (Smith 2003, p.132).

The rationale is that working against the prevalent values in a society overlooks the historical and social environments that have influenced the values imparted on the researcher during the process of socialization.

To that end, Weber articulates that natural scientists tend to undermine the influence of value relevance of the researchers and assume that they are objective (Beetham 1989, p. 312). To the contrary, their intentions and actions during the research depend heavily on the values they hold.

Weber says that natural science can never suppose that their results are always objective. Objective knowledge is impossible in natural science since the researcher does not make choices objectively.

In other words, he says that natural scientists are subjects of the social environment they live in and they ought to withhold their values when seeking to analyze human behavior (Smith 2003, p. 142).

We will write a custom Essay on Max Weber. Natural and Social Sciences specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Unlike other subject matters, human beings are constantly changing and any research on behavior should rely on the relevance of the actions vis a vis their ascriptions.

It is therefore impossible for natural science to pursue ‘objective knowledge’ without integrating their methodologies with the principles of social science (Honigsheim 2003, p. 77). They also need to submerge themselves in the society of subject matter without considering their values and values held by others.

Max Weber argues that social object refers to something that has value and meaning for groups and society. At the onset of socialization, individuals learn the values and norms of a society. Honigsheim (2003, p. 78) asserts that the values become an indelible aspect of human being.

To this end, Weber says that individuals who constitute the subject matter of social research are valuable and that their actions have different meanings in the society.

This is contrary to natural research where the social object has no meaning to the researcher and as such, he or she utilizes empirically tested methods of research to identify the cause and consequences of certain actions.

What the natural sciences leave out is the fact that researchers belong to a specific value system that could influence their objectivity in analyzing and studying human behavior (Hadden 1997, p. 60). To overcome the challenges in understanding social objects, Weber prescribes a new way of observing reality.

He articulates that an individual may be able to understand social reality by reorganizing it in a specific way and use social imagination to comprehend it (Beetham 1989, p. 314).

His interpretive approach has considerable benefits for social sciences in the sense that it is able to reduce the subjectivity associated with natural sciences. A social researcher should immerse himself in the society under study and interpret human behaviors and action from an objective view devoid of influences of values he hold.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Max Weber. Natural and Social Sciences by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Nonetheless, Weber does not dismiss the attempts to have an objective study in social science. He articulates that sociological imagination is imperative in analyzing human behavior.

It is possible to understand (verstehen) human behavior through abstraction given that social scientists are able to reorganize the social reality and imagine it from an objective perspective (Smith 2003, pp. 34-87).

The social researchers should utilize conscious imagination to understand the actual interpretation of specific human relationships and behaviors. This way, social scientists are able to distinguish the ordinary interpretations and actual interpretation of human behavior.

Weber therefore seeks to uphold the superiority of interpretative methodologies used in social research as a means of gaining an objective research. Social scientists apply social imagination and reconfigure the social reality to understand the human and social object of natural sciences (Honigsheim 2003, pp. 73 – 94).

Treatment of value judgment according to Weber should be the role of the social scientists. However, the researcher ought to be wary of various generalizations that other sciences make due to their redundant laws and formal logical arguments that they present.

Max Weber prescribes the use of ‘ideal type’ in observation of reality by social scientists. He argues that ‘ideal type’ is the only way in which social scientists are able to imagine reality and form patterns that could be important in explaining human behavior in a particular and general way (Smith 2003, p. 161).

The concepts emphasized in the ‘ideal types’ include rationality and protestant ethics. They help the social scientists to compare the causes and the consequences of human action overtime.

Besides, the imaginary construction of a social reality helps a social scientist to compare different social and historical environments that the human behavior occurred (Beetham 1989, p. 311).

Moreover, Weber says that ideal types do not only allow the researcher to isolate the important aspects of the subject matter but also allows the comprehension of behavior of different people in different contexts.

To come up with an ideal type, the social scientist ought to ensure that they undertake a thorough study and use their thoughts and conscience to analyze the observations.

Although use of imaginary construction assists the scientists to arrange and organize complex reality, it does not aim at making a conclusive law of predicting the cause and consequence of certain actions.

Weber recognized that absolute and rigid laws typical of natural sciences are inadequate to address the concept of social dynamism.

For instance, an individual may behave in a specific way due to a certain cause but it does not imply that other societal members behaved or will behave in the same way in the past or in the future.

Further, Weber argues that analyzing human behavior and action through imaginary construction does not amount to ideographic methodology of studying social reality (Smith 2003, p. 231). The rationale is that the aim of social science is not to analyze human behavior in a way that the human actions are predictable.

To the contrary, social imagination leads to understanding the behavior of the social objects that form overtime.

This implies that scientists who apply social imagination will not only study the sole aspects of human behavior but also will study the entirety of human actions and analyze them through the patterns they form overtime (Hadden 1997, p. 62).

It is important to note that ‘ideal type’ is a utopian model that does not feature in any social reality. To this end, Weber argues that the ideal type does not always imply validity in the manner in which the social scientists reproduce the results and compare them with reality.

Weber pinpoints that the validity of ideal type of research is measured in terms of adequacy, which is a lacking aspect of positivism.

Weber defends the use of fictional methodology to unravel social reality vehemently. Beetham (1989, p. 312) articulates that researchers’ value commitment is important in carrying out an objective research. The value commitment is an unavoidable aspect of researchers however subjective.

Thus, he acknowledges the subjective nature of natural sciences and says that the researchers are usually ‘one sided’.

For this purpose, Weber says that ideal type of social reality is important to construct in order to remove the vagueness that natural science has experienced due to value commitment of the researchers as well as the interpretes.

As such, ideal type is value free and integrates ethical considerations while at the same time attempting to confront the inadequacies that historical and social knowledge possess. The rationale is that knowledge is subject of natural science and has been subjective overtime.

The ‘ideal type’ construction inculcates the need for virtue, objectivity and clear sightedness in a scientist and as such, he or she becomes committed passionately to the revelation of the truth that is free of subjectivity and illusions (Hadden 1997, p. 79).

Weber proposes that the use of universal laws that is typical of natural science is not enough in the field of social sciences. In other words, he says that social scientists should utilize such models as ‘ideal type’ in order to organize the complex social reality.

Although he says that the models do not aim at arriving at a general law or principle (verified by empirical principles), they provide the researchers with a platform to isolate specific key aspects of social object (Honigsheim 2003, p. 95).

To him, ideal type model is the most rational way of comprehending social phenomena and reality. For instance, he demonstrates the use of ideal type in the analysis of social phenomenon by referring to command and free market economies.

Although none of the two market types exists, Weber has the conviction that their imagination helps in isolating key elements of markets (Beetham 1989, p. 312). This way, social scientists are able to choose the aspects that are fundamentally important in an economy.

Analyzing the economy from abstraction therefore serves to unravel other aspects that natural science can rarely find using its methodology and law.

In essence, Weber’s arguments on the inadequacies of natural science are valid to some extents and continue to apply in sociology. The field of social science ought to understand the concept of value relevance during their research.

Social objects that are subject matter of social research are able to exhibit different behaviors that may change over time (Swedberg 2005, p. 165). To this end, it is almost impossible to understand human behavior since every behavior and action has its ascriptions that are defined by a value system of a specific society.

To this end, Weber accuses natural science for having used the researchers’ values or values of others to make conclusions and device general laws of understanding human behavior. This in turn leads to subjective nature of social knowledge.

Nonetheless, Weber says that objective knowledge is possible when social scientists adopt a social model derived from social imagination and reconstruction of reality.

The rationale is that the researchers are able to remove their values in the study and understand complex reality in a more objective way than in natural sciences.

Despite spirited efforts to understand human behavior, critics accuse Weber of ignoring major points in his analysis of social objects and value relevance. Particularly, they assert that it is difficult for a person belonging to one culture to understand the cultural and social structures of other societies.

To that end, the critics say that Weber overlooks the inability of a social actor to imagine a social phenomenon of another society since he or she does not belong there. As such, the mental and imaginary construction of a social phenomenon in another culture is impossible.

For instance, it is particularly difficult for an individual to envisage another sort of economy if his or her culture subscribe to capitalism or socialism. Second, arguments that imagination and abstraction is the most objective way of capturing social reality are misleading.

By using one’s knowledge to recreate social reality, the social scientists ignore observable facts that natural sciences emphasize (Swedberg 2005, p. 167).

Finally, value commitment is a major aspect of thought processes and is unavoidable when constructing ideal type models. Weber’s assertion that social scientists should be value free and objective is not easy to achieve.

Conclusion In summary, Weber believes that natural sciences suffer immense challenges when attempting to explain social reality. Weber subscribes to anti positivist school of thought that argues that social reality is not measurable through data and static natural laws.

Instead, human being who is the subject matter of social research experiences changes in the social context making him or her to manifest specific behavior that scientist cannot generalize. Swedberg (2005, p. 168) says that values that an individual holds lead to subjectivity during research.

Besides, the social scientists ought to imagine ideal reality to comprehend social actions and phenomenon. To this end, Weber agrees that natural sciences suffer challenges that undermine their importance of analyzing human behavior.

References Beetham, D 1989, ‘Max Weber and the Liberal Political Tradition’, European Journal of Sociology, vol. 30 no.3, pp. 311–323.

Hadden, W 1997, Sociological Theory: An Introduction to the Classical Tradition, Broadview Press, Peterborough, Ontario.

Honigsheim, P 2003, The Unknown Max Weber, Transaction Publisher, New Brunswick, New Jersey.

Smith, M 2003, Social Science in Question, Sage, London.

Swedberg, R 2005, The Max Weber Dictionary, Stanford University Press Stanford.

[supanova_question]

Summation of Jeremy Barthelemy’s ‘The Seven Deadly Sins of Outsourcing’ Essay essay help online

Outsourcing is an essential strategy taken by various firms to reorganize their production by focusing on the main business operations. It is lauded for its ability to cut costs, and improve the performance of the organization.

However, in his article ‘the Seven Deadly Sins of Outsourcing’, Jeremy Barthelemy claims that the management fails during outsourcing undertakings as a result of seven sins.

Backed by survey data from companies across Europe and USA, Barthelemy claims that these companies outsource activities that ought not to be outsourced, choose wrong venders, come up with a poorly written contract, and overlook personal issues.

He further discovered that these companies lose control over the activities they have outsourced, fail to notice the veiled cost of outsourcing, and fail to plan for an exit tactic as discussed in this paper.

First Sin: Outsourcing Activities That Does Not Meet the Threshold Barthelemy claims that organizations commit a grave mistake by outsourcing activities not supposed to be outsourced. Some firms outsource an area where its competitive advantage lies thereby ruining its competitive edge.

In this case, firms ought to consider resources and activities unique to its operations and focus on it and outsource other areas. Outsourcing a company’s core business activities makes a company hollow thereby losing its competitive advantage.

Second Sin: Selecting the Wrong Vendor According to Barthelemy, most firms select a vendor based on the vendor’s ability to produce products and services at a low price. However, this is a wrong criterion because outsourcing is not for cost cutting alone. Both soft and hard qualifications should be considered when selecting a vendor.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Hard qualifications can be verified easily and they include a state of the art product or service and low cost. Many firms go for hard qualifications without knowing that these qualifications change, depending on the market conditions thereby affecting the outsourced activities negatively.

However, soft qualifications are not tangible yet they are the most crucial. They include the vendor’s ability to remain credible for a long time, cultural fit of the business among many.

Soft qualifications can be identified through the first impressions the vendor makes with the firms and also through studying the history of the internal and external environment of the vendor.

Third Sin: Writing a Poor Contract Barthelemy claims that firms focus on vendor partnership and give the contract a little consideration. They develop trust-based relationships with vendors and run their operations on partnership management.

However, partnership management is dangerous as it does not give formal provisions for commitment of short term and long-term goals, and does not give an outsourcing firm the provision to set its expectations.

Barthelemy advises that a firm should spend quality time with vendor mulling over a contract negations. They should thereafter come up with a contract which is precise, inclusive, incentive based, flexible, and balanced.

Fourth Sin: Overlooking Personal Issues Employees generally view outsourcing as an attempt to underestimate their input in the company. Failure to consider the personal issue can result in industrial action like strike or mass exodus during or even before the actual process of outsourcing.

We will write a custom Essay on Summation of Jeremy Barthelemy’s ‘The Seven Deadly Sins of Outsourcing’ specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Barthelemy (95) states that firms should consider two key personal issues during outsourcing to avoid an industrial action. First, employees vital to the company should be motivated and retained. Second, the vendor must provide a commitment to the workers within its premises, and those transferred to the vendor company.

Fifth Sin: Losing Control over the Outsourced Activity Companies normally outsource their activities when there is a lapse in performance. However, lapse in performance is sometimes caused by poor management and thus when outsourced, such activities lack managerial expertise to draft strategies for its success.

This means the company should not outsource if the main reason is lack of management expertise. On the other hand, a firm should allow part of its management team to work with the vendor company for the success of the activity.

Sixth Sin: Overlooking Hidden Cost Although the main purpose of outsourcing is for cost reduction, there are some costs overlooked by vendors. The first cost is called outsourcing or vendor search cost incurred by firms when looking for vendors.

Second is cost incurred when managing outsourced contracts. It involves the cost incurred by the firm during monitoring of the contract obligations.

Seventh Sin: Failing To Plan an Exit Strategy Many firms fail to make a provision exiting a contract because they anticipate long-term relationships with vendors. However, they fail to see an outsourcing contract as a continuum. At one end is a business relationship where one or both parties have made investment relationship.

On the other hand, an outsourcing contract also can be seen as a market investment in which the client has the freedom of choosing or switching vendors at a minimum cost, depending on the prevailing conditions. This means there should always be an exit plan in the contract.

Conclusion Based on the information in this article, it means important factors should be considered at all stages of outsourcing relationships. When making plans for outsourcing, a contract should be written professionally to provide a balance of power for both parties.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Summation of Jeremy Barthelemy’s ‘The Seven Deadly Sins of Outsourcing’ by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In addition, a core versus a noncore business approach should be considered before selecting the right vendor. At the beginning of the relationships, various issues, such as hidden costs, personal issues, and management issues should be considered carefully.

Lastly, a firm should ensure a reversibility clause is included in its deal. The issues handled by the author are essential, and involves the internal as well as external environment of the company.

Works Cited Barthelemy, Jerome. “The seven deadly sins of outsourcing.” Academy of Management Executive 17.2 (2003): 87-97. Print.

[supanova_question]

Limitations of Research Critical Essay essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Self report bias

Attrition or parental withdrawal

References

Introduction The key limitations in this research were self report bias and attrition bias caused by parental withdrawal. These limitations affected the reliability and validity of the research in different ways.

Self report bias The research relied upon self report assessments to establish relationships between the parameters. Subjects filled in assessment forms during and after the intervention but biases affected the reliability of the research.

The main challenge with this method of data collection is it is difficult to control the level of honesty among the participants. Some of them may not be honest about certain subjects that they perceive to be personal.

This bias is difficult to accommodate in the research analysis because one cannot assess a participant’s honesty levels. It all depends on their personality and their interpretations of the research parameters. In addition to intentional dishonesty, some of the participants were liable to introspectability.

In self report research, subjects may perceive themselves in a totally different way than is the case. Even if that participant may genuinely want to be honest, he or she may not know that he or she is representing an incorrect view of himself or herself (Miller

[supanova_question]

Apple Inc Products Research Paper cheap essay help

Executive Summary Apple Inc is one of the leading manufacturers of electronic products globally. Besides the production of computers and other electronic products, this firm is also known for the production of phones. IPhone 5 and iPad are some of the newest series of products that this firm has produced in the market.

This is one of the Apple’s products, which have been very successful in the market today. This firm was able to sell 2 million pieces of iPhone within 24 hours after the launch.

On the third day after launching this product, the sale of this product hit five million. The purchase of this new product within the initial stages was in the United States markets.

There is a need to take this product to other parts of the world. It has been a success in the home market. It must be taken to the global market. The management must therefore come up with a supply chain strategy that will ensure that this product reaches the world market using the least possible costs.

The supply chain strategy that this firm should apply must enable the firm to distribute its products efficiently and at the least cost possible. The management should try to predict, and determine the markets where these products are popular.

The management should then assess the purchasing power of the market before determining the volume of the products that should be taken to the market. This will ensure that products are distributed successfully in the global market. It should also embrace the modern technologies as a way of reducing costs of operations.

Introduction Apple Inc. is one of the most prosperous electronic firms in the world. Two scientists, Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak, started this firm on April 1, 1976. These two individuals were electronic enthusiasts. They were interested in turning their skills in electronics into a large business unit.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Steve Wozniak, popularly known as Woz, was an astute electrician with a keen interest in computers. It was during this time that computers were started. Steve Jobs on the other hand was a shrewd businessman.

Although Woz was more knowledgeable than Jobs in the art of designing computer hardware, Jobs was smatter in entrepreneurship.

While Woz considered his skills in making computers as a hobby, Jobs saw a huge potential of stating a computer firm that would rival the then leading computer firm, the IBM. Jobs managed to convince Woz of the importance of commercializing their skills, and together, they started this company.

They later incorporated Ronald Wayne, a rich businessperson who came in to help the two financially. The trio formed a formidable force, which culminated into a company that is prosperous and very profitable.

Although this company had various challenges that saw it eliminate its Chief Executive Officer, who was one of the founder members, in 1985, the firm was able to overcome these challenges using a number of strategies.

Steve Jobs, having been forced out of the firm in 1985 as the chief executive, made a came-back in 1997 with strategies that transformed this firm to what it is currently.

Lafuente (2005) says that Apple is one of the firms that were able to overcome the wave of.com crisis of the early twentieth century that brought down many firm, especially those that were computer based.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Apple Inc Products specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This firm has a number of electronic products that have received a lot of acceptance in the market. IPhone 5 is one of the most recent products that this firm has introduced into the market. This product has received a huge success in the American market.

Within the first three days that this product was introduced into the market, the firm was able to sell 5 million pieces majorly in the American market. The management had to find the best approach of making this product reach other parts of the world.

It has to develop a strategy would make it possible to distribute the product globally using the least cost possible, and at the fastest speed ever. The management must determine the market size and purchasing power before releasing the products.

It must also determine other factors that may hinder successful operations in all the markets it targets before releasing the products. This research paper focuses on the operations of Apple Inc in the global market, and how this firm can ensure that the costs are minimized in order to increase its profitability.

Evaluation of the Financial Condition of Apple and its Ability to Achieve its Strategic Objectives as Discussed in the Annual Report

In order to understand the financial position of this firm, it is important to look at the financial statements of this firm for the last three years. Below are the income statement, cash flow and the balance sheet of this firm for the last three years.

The financial reports above show that this firm has had a consistent growth in its asset for the last three years. The net tangible asset of this firm has grown by about three times within the last three years. The Total Stockholders’ equity has also expanded by about 150% within the last three.

This is a clear sign that the firm has had a stable financial growth for the last three years. This firm has a capacity to meet its objectives given the growth of the firm’s asset base. The income statement and the cash flow statement show that this firm has a capacity to meet its short term financial obligations.

This firm can achieve both the long term and the short term financial obligations given the fact that it has been able to maintain a healthy cash flow into the firm. With its financial strength, this firm can easily undertake various activities that would help it realize its dream.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Apple Inc Products by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Company’s Profitability Trends and Recommended Strategies to Improve or Capitalize on These Trends

The financial status of this firm shown above is a clear demonstration that this firm has been successful in its operations for three years. The firm has been very profitable and this explains the massive growth it has had within the three years.

This firm uses various competitive strategies in the market in order to manage competition that is very rife in this industry.

First, the firm has employed two of the porter’s competitive strategy of low cost and differentiation. The firm moved its production from US to China in order to cut the cost of production.

China, unlike the US, has cheap labor that would eventually translate to lower cost of production. This makes it easy for this firm to sell its products at lower prices but still make profits (Helfert, 2001). Other than the cost strategy, the other strategy that this firm has employed is the differentiation strategy.

This firm has made their products unique. Some of its present products are differentiated from other conventional products in the market, making it acquire a special niche within the industry. The iPhone 5 is a product that is yet to find its rival in its special niche.

The timing tactic of this firm in launching new products has also been superb. This firm always come with a new product at such times that the market feels that they need a better product to serve their current needs. It introduced the iPhone when the market needed a better phone with so many integrated features.

This has seen their new products receive huge acceptance in various markets when introduced. The firm has also been keen to employ cooperation strategy whenever needed.

During its early years, it formed a joint venture with Microsoft when it realized that its computer languages were not efficient enough to make competitive products in the market. This strategic alliance saw it gain market share both in the home markets and abroad. It also enhanced its distribution process.

This firm has also been able to implement Porters five forces. To tackle the threat of new competition, the firm has been keen on producing new products to rival those of new competitors.

To manage the threat of substitute products, Apple has developed different lines of products to satisfy different markets so that it may not be adversely affected if one line is invaded by substitute products.

To increase its bargaining power with the buyers, it has continued to produce high end products with qualities that make it easy for the customers to appreciate their high prices (Gill

[supanova_question]

Students Project of Software Evaluation Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

In every project, there are always component stages that make it a complete project. These stages are the activities that are to be conducted in the process of bringing the project into a successful completion. There are generally five stages that a project will always go through from the inception to conclusion.

The first stage component is the initiation of the project. This is where the project is outlined so that project members can understand what the project involves.

The second stage is planning the project. In this stage, all the involved parties gather together in order to discuss some of the important deliverables in the project, and how every task shall be accomplished.

The third stage is the project execution. This involves putting into practice, all the activities that were planned in the previous stage.

The next stage is project control. This involves monitoring and evaluation of the project. The last component stage is project closure. This comes after the stakeholders have confirmed that the project has met all the requirements that it was meant for.

Project life cycle basically involves the stages described above. A project life cycle is the activities that that are undertaken by project team members from the inception stage to completion.

At inception, the project manager will have the responsibility of explaining to the members what the project entails and the main objectives that are to be realized through the project.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the second phase of planning, the technical team members of the project comes together in order to have a clear blueprint on how every activity of the project is going to be accomplished.

The third stage is the execution. At this stage, all the stakeholders are assigned different duties as per the specification of the blueprint. This stage in the lifecycle is very important because it is the actual process of implementation.

The next stage of project control involves the actual monitoring of the project, and determining the extent to which the project has been successful, and some of the changes that might be necessary to make the project realize its dream.

The last stage in the lifecycle of project closure would always come automatically. When a project is successful in meeting its obligations, the project managers, project members and all other stakeholders who are involved in the project, will determine when the project should be brought to a closure.

This always happens after all the important stakeholders are satisfied that a project has successfully met the expectation of the involved parties.

A project is part of operational activities within a firm. It is important to appreciate the fact that a project is not an independent activity from activities carried out within a firm. It is only special because there are specifically meant to achieve some objectives.

Upon completion, the project is always brought to a closure, and a new project is brought forth. Project therefore, fits in research and development arm of a firm. Within a firm, there will always be the arm responsible for research and extension.

We will write a custom Essay on Students Project of Software specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This arm is responsible for ensuring that the firm comes up with new ideas that will make it competitive in the market. Projects therefore, fall in this department. Projects are creative ideas that are put into practice in order to make a positive change within the firm.

Research and development unit is best positioned to monitor and fund the activities of various purposes for it is the very reason for its existence.

There are a number of approaches in managing a project. Each is suitable depending on the type of project involved, and some of the expected constrains. Traditional approach to project management is always popular when handling projects which had been handled before.

This is because the project manager is always aware of the events that may be expected in the project. Traditional approach fits well when there is a clear understanding of some of the challenges that the project may face is the process of accomplishing it.

Critical chain approach is another approach which is a little different from the traditional approach to project management. In this approach, the project manager and team members assumes that there might be a constraint or two that may hinder the normal flow of the project.

This is always the case when dealing with new projects that the firm has no clear focus on. The project members will be forced to use behavioral and mathematical science in predicting, analyzing and finally removing constrains that may affect the normal success of the project.

Another standard approach is the extreme project approach. This approach is always recommended when the project entails a highly dynamic situation. In is a situation where there is high likelihood that some of the current constrains may easily change along the way.

The approach is therefore designed to manage these changes. Finally, events chain projects approach may also be appropriate when dealing with some projects.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Students Project of Software by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In this case, there is always the suspicion that one constrain may create a chain of constraints that may have an impact on the project success. It is therefore designed, not only to manage any constrain that may arise, but also to deal with the issue of one constrain spilling over to affect other constrains.

In order to ensure that there is success in a project, it is always important to ensure that there is an effective project management environment.

An effective project management environment offers all members a perfect environment where they can participate in project activities and give their best to ensure an overall success of the project.

There are a number of ways in which project manager, projects coordinator and other senior officials of a project can take to ensure that the project is successful. One of the most important activities in ensuring that there is a good environment is to ensure that all members of the project can express themselves freely.

All the involved members of the project should be offered opportunity to express their views about the project, and how the project shall be brought into a successful completion.

There should not be any form of high handedness when implementing policies in the project, and every member of the project should feel appreciated.

The project manager should clearly define activity of every member of the organization in order to avoid cases where there is overlapping of duties, or confusion when it comes to assigning of tasks within the firm.

Availing all the needed materials for the project also helps in ensuring that the project environment is made more successful.

Communication is one of the key factors in ensuring that a project is made successful. A number of scholars have pointed out the fact that a project that succeeds is a project that has a clear communication system between different stakeholders.

It is through this communication that various departments will be able to coordinate in order to achieve the desired result. There should be a clearly defined vertical and horizontal flow of communication. The chief executive will communicate with the project manager and members through the projects coordinator.

The chief executive will inform the projects coordinator of his or her expectations of the projects, and some of the special areas that there should be special attention. The projects coordinator will then pass this communication to the project manager who shall finally pass it to project members.

Any communication from the members should follow the same channel up. When a member communicates directly to the chief executive or projects coordinator without informing the projects manager, the act can be considered insubordination.

This can discourage the projects manager and this may hinder success of the project. It is however, a common phenomenon for a chief executive, or the projects coordinator to speak generally to all the members in one sitting, especially when giving a piece of advice to them or an encouragement.

Members should be able to communicate freely among themselves.

A business case is always fundamental in supporting a project. It is always a general belief that when committing any resource of a firm to any project, there should be a strong reason for doing so.

Accountability of all the funds of a firm is one of the reasons why there is always the need to ensure that the top management is able to account for every cent used in the firm.

A project case is therefore, a strong justification why a given project is important, clearly defining some of the benefits that the firm stands to benefit from the project either in the short run or the long run business plans.

The business case will be justifying why the project should be undertaken, and how the resources used in it shall be recovered, and the overall benefits it will have to the firm.

A project case is always useful when a project is presented to the board of directors or senior management team of the firm for approval. A strong business case will be able to convince the decision makers that there is need to carry out the project.

Project Plan Purpose of the Report

This report is meant to advertise car tracker software developed by a group of students within the campus. Although my society members consider universities as institutions for inventions and innovations, they have not taken seriously the fact that very good products can come from these universities.

The fact that students lack enough money to bankroll expensive television commercials, their products always fail to get public attention, making it difficult to get the market they need. Their invention ends up being stolen, if not cheaply bought by major companies which have the capacity to commercialize the product.

This project aims at helping these innovative students by ensuring that their products receives the much needed public attention that will help make the known in the market.

Background of the study

Students have been complaining that they work hard to come up with various innovative ideas but the ideas are never developed. They state that they come up with ideas, but because of enough money, their ideas are always bought cheaply by companies who use them to earn a lot of money.

In some cases, they are always surprised by unethical actions of some companies which steal their ideas at their inception. This group that came up with this project worked very hard to ensure that the project is a success.

Sure enough, they have been able to test and confirm the fact that the device works well and can help reduce cases of theft of cars.

The main concern is now to ensure that the device reaches the market in time, and that the developers of the software get to benefit, and not greedy companies that are always ready to steal these ideas.

Activities of the Project Project Scope

As stated above, the scope of this project is limited to advertisement and other mechanisms through which the software can be known in the market. The scope of this project does not include any technicalities of the product.

It is also important that this project does not cover delivering the product to the market. It specifically focuses on the awareness creation of the product in the market.

Project Objectives

It is always important to specify objectives of a project. In this project, there were specific objects that the project manager, together with project members, wishes to achieve.

Creation of general awareness of the product within the domestic market within a period of four months.

Make the market know the existence of the product and some of the features that make the product unique.

Deter any form of piracy, or an attempt to mimic this technology by major industry players through massive advertisement and warnings.

Help the students who developed this idea take their product to the market.

Project Deliverables

Project deliverables are some of the tangible and intangible outcomes of a project. In this project, some of the project deliverables include the extent to which people will be aware of this product after four months that the project plans to take.

Another deliverable in this project includes the amount of income that the developers shall generate through the sale of their project. The ability of the product to be sold in the market without any form of piracy is also another deliverable in this project.

Constrains

In every project, there are always project constrains that should be considered in making the project successful. In this project, the first constrain was time. As a student, it was not easily to get free time to conduct a massive awareness of the product in the market.

Another constrain was finance to enable project members move from one corner of the country to another; and to use some of the major media stations in this country.

Risk Management, Project Quality, Monitoring and Control

It is always important to understand some of the risks that are always presented in any given project, and how to manage them. In this project, the management of project risks will be conducted by a special group which will be responsible for quality management.

They will be responsible for detecting and managing of the risks in time. The team will be responsible for monitoring various activities within the firm, and determining the best control methods for these risks and other issues that may arise in the process of project implementation

[supanova_question]

Mid-Nineteenth Century Liberalism Critical Essay online essay help: online essay help

Introduction In the early 19th century, societies of the world struggled to establish equity of rights for both the proletariats and the bourgeoisie. This struggle led to the emergence of liberalism. The proletariats constituted the peasant people who were also property-less.

The bourgeoisie owned all factors of production besides exercising control over the proletariats. The bourgeoisies were known to be materialistic who constantly strived to gain respectability from the proletariats.

Essentially, the bourgeoisie established the production systems and employed the proletariat in the capacity of what historian termed as slaves. Liberalists were against this kind of economic relationship between the two.

Consequently, over the nineteenth century, liberalisms became an ideology, which later culminated into a reform movement in Europe advocating for both economic and political equality and equity among members of different social classes.

In this analysis paper, the author investigates the liberalists’ achievements by 1851 through an analysis of two articles on liberalism appearing in the British liberal magazine: The Economist.

The articles are “The Exhibition –The Crystal Palace” (The Economist 93-97) and “The First Half of the Nineteenth Century: Progress of The Nation and Race” (The Economist 97-100).

Although both articles talk about the great exhibition of 1851, they have an incredible focus on the self-image coupled with the worldview of liberal and liberalism in the mid 19th century.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Bourgeoisie and Liberalism in 1850 In The Economist, it is evident that, by 1851, when the great exhibition was held, the liberalists had begun to celebrate the achievement of their belief that politics has central roles in preservation coupled with maximization of people’s freedoms of choice including making a choice to work or not.

Although the Bourgeoisie of 1850 needed to have their industries run by people from the lower social classes who owned no property, they could not force people to work for them or even exploit them at the advantage of their individualistic gains in the threshold of the 18th century.

The Economist supports this argument when it reckons, “in the early ages, when labor that was necessary to procure subsistence was performed by the slaves with the work of slaughter being the only toil performed by the free men, most kinds of useful industries were considered degraded and degrading” (94).

In this extent, it is arguable that the machineries, works of art, and other things that were being showcased at the great exhibitions were produced with minimal exploitation of people within the past half century.

In this end, The Economist informs, “the proposed exhibition marks the great fact that useful industries have now wholly escaped from contamination of slavery, and is raised to post of honor” (94).

Therefore, although the bourgeoisies’ way of thinking in 1950s was still driven by their economic materialism coupled with philistinism, there was a limitation for violation of human rights to satisfy these key drivers of bourgeoisies.

This limitation was brought by force due to embracement of liberalism ideologies in many nations including the United States and the nations located in Europe in the 19th century.

We will write a custom Essay on Mid-Nineteenth Century Liberalism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Bourgeoisies’ Achievements Within the first half of the nineteenth century, the bourgeoisie encountered several achievements. The achievements were related with integrating liberalism in their economic, legal, material culture, and political operations. Some of these achievements are discussed below.

Politics: Constitutions- Representative Governments

Liberalism advocated for peaceful political regimes as the basis of economic growth.

This view is conspicuous in the argument, “the convocation of all nations to meet in London in 1851 has already had, in part, some of the best effects expected from it, and has contributed to dispose men’s minds to peace, and secure political response to nations” (The Economist 94).

In this context, it is arguable that, through enactment of constitutions and political representations, political harmony was the key driver of economic success of the bourgeoisie.

This new dimension of thought driven by paradigms of liberalism was central in the evaluation of the impacts of political-driven warfare on production systems.

Liberalists agree that appropriate government representatives who foster peace was necessary since “increased friendly communication between distant and too-often hostile communities had some influence on the minds of those who were lately sharpening their words to go for war” (The Economists 94).

In the past, the wars were caused by disagreements in the allocation and distribution of resources among the bourgeoisie. Thus, in the liberalist view, constitutions and government representatives are critical in ensuring equality and equity in resource distribution and accessibility.

Law: Individual Rights and Property Rights

Any nation operating on liberalism ideology needs to have strong legal frameworks that make provisions for equity among all people. In terms of law, liberalists accept that incredible strides were made by mid 19th century in terms of protection of individual rights.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Mid-Nineteenth Century Liberalism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Economists support this assertion by further informing, “a great improvement in this respect is obvious in all classes” (96) and that “the poor are not so rude, the rich not as arrogant as they were” (The Economist 96).

In this perspective, it is arguable that bourgeoisies had flexed their stands on equality to permit progression of the low class persons towards economic independency as a fundamental human right. Property right is yet another phenomenal issue that surrounds the ideologies of liberalism.

The Economist argues that, by 1850, a progress was recorded so that “another and a larger class are ever prone to seek refuge from baffled exertions, disappointed hopes, and dissatisfied desires in a distant future in which all expectations, reasonable and unreasonable, are to have their fulfillment” (98).

This effort was a major stride in enhancing protection of property rights irrespective of social classes of people. From this discussion, liberals emphasize issues of defending private property. They are also interested with the impacts of concentrations of various private properties on the operation of the economy.

Economic: Commercial Codes, Free Trade, Stock Markets, Laissez Faire

Liberals are not engaged in the laissez-faire policies in all times because, to them, market systems never guaranteed various conditions that define their existence.

Within the first fifty years of the 19th century, a shift was observed from the norm in which “economists were supposed to be, by nature and occupation, cold, arithmetical, and unenthusiastic” (The Economist 98).

Being arithmetical implied focusing on the facilitation of free trade, stock markets, and establishment of commercial codes to increase returns to bourgeoisie.

Consequently, the call of the liberal was to ensure economic equity among people of different classes. In the 19th century, a major progression was made towards this effect.

Material Culture: Urban Renewal, Monumental Architecture

The liberalism of 1950 paid much interest. They celebrated changes in the material culture of people. There was an increased production of materials both economically and in large quantities.

This increment pulled down the cost of materials thus making it possible for people in low social economic backgrounds to afford material culture, which was essentially a reserve of the bourgeoisie.

For example, The Economist argued that the change of state of art and production systems would make it possible for the crystal palace to “adopt ordinary dwellings, and may be applied to improve the houses of the poor” (98).

Liberals also celebrated the achievement of improvement of urban and monumental architectures, which included improvement in railway transport system in which both bourgeoisies and proletariats could be equalized by the fact that they would board the same trains.

Cultural Hegemony From the liberalists’ perspective, cultural hegemony of the bourgeoisie is characterized by mass consumption of luxury goods that were mass-produced. Such goods are of high quality.

The Economist describes the achievement of such a cultural hegemony, “while preparing the house for our residence during the last winter and spring, it was filled with all sorts of furniture, books, pictures, and piano…nothing received any injury” (95).

Comparing this description of bourgeoisies’ Darley with the palace where the exhibition was to be held, it is clear that an incredible transition in the cultural hegemony of the bourgeoisies and proletariats had been achieved within 19th century.

Although the elegance of crystal palace reflected a typical bourgeoisies house, The Economist claims, “the light and elegant, the cheerful and airy, the cheap and whole some style of building the crystal palace may be adopted for ordinary dwellings , and may be applied to improve the houses of the poor” (95).

In this context, the view of liberalism on aspects of equality is explored. Creation of methods of making housing similar to those occupied by the higher class people in an economic way gives the proletariats an opportunity to attain equality with the with bourgeoisies.

Indeed, even by 1850, differences in the consumptions of mass-produced products were still valid on the gourds of economic capabilities of different people.

This argument is evidenced by the position held by The Economist, “ as the ease and comfort of the increasing multitude will be more cheaply and better provided for, lands will be everywhere adorned with crystal palaces” (95). At the time of holding the great exhibition, there was only one crystal palace.

Its state of art was arguably affordable for the bourgeoisies. Making it possible for the low-class people to have equal accessibility to means of putting up similar palaces was a subject of equality and equity in the distribution of resources including land.

Unfortunately, the application of liberalism concepts was a challenge since land remained a reserve of bourgeoisies. This argument means that production of materials to suit the elegancy of cultures of the bourgeoisies’ elegant dwelling places would continue to be a cultural artifact of the bourgeoisies.

As opposed to the liberalism perspective, there needs to be equality in the society so that people would have an equal accessibility to all materials and items that constitute cultural artifacts of a particular group of people.

Under the Surface: Danger for Liberalism and its Followers Advocating for equality based on perspectives of economic balance driven by concepts of “sense of social charity and justice, religious freedom, and political wisdom” (99) opens liberalism and its followers to criticisms. These challenges are discussed below.

Old age hangs on and is not assimilated into the liberal world view

From the position of the liberalism, all societies need to transform collectively to attain social success in which all people ought to be equal in all key pillars that define a society such as politics and economic endowment levels. However, the old age hangs on.

It is hardly incorporated in the worldview of the liberals. In this context, The Economist argues, “too many of us are disposed to place our golden age in the past especially the tendency of the imaginative, the ignorant, and the old” (99).

The old here implies the resistance to alter aristocratic thoughts and the materialism culture of the bourgeoisies to permit liberalism culture to flourish. Indeed, in any social system, there must be producers and a class of workers who provide services to the bourgeoisies who own the factors of production.

This perspective is explored even by the modern-day capitalist nations following the failure of socialism.

Although liberalism attempts to create a justified society, which promotes equity and enjoyment of moral rights, religious rights, political rights, and protection of private property, in the economic sense, the old hangs on.

To promote equity economically, liberalism and its followers needs to demonstrate how bourgeoisies would be economically equal with proletariats while at the same time maintaining their status and performance of the economy.

The working class grows and is not assimilated into the liberal world view

While the adoption of liberalism concepts in the formation of the 1950s’ governments guaranteed equal rights for all people irrespective of their social classes, the working class grew though it was not assimilated in the liberal worldview.

The Economist makes this point clear when the magazine argues, “another class and larger classes are ever prone to seek refuge from battled exertions with disappointed hopes and dissatisfied desires in a distant future” (98). The larger class constitutes the working class or the proletariats.

From The Economist’s position, even though the 1850 liberalism developments brought up the living conditions of the working class, it was still hard to incorporate them fully into the liberal worldview. In fact, The Economist asserts, “we confess that we cannot share their disappointment nor echo their complaints.

We look upon the past with respect and affection as a series of stepping stones of that high and advanced position, which we actually hold, and from the future, we hope for realization of those dreams” (98).

Consequently, even amid the achievements of the working class in the 1850, they were still entangled in class struggles.

Internal contradictions: capitalism and meritocracy Under the surface of liberalism, perspectives of capitalism and meritocracy existed. This case challenged the liberalism advocates coupled with its followers.

The Economist informs that production of materials cheaply had the overall impact of making sure that the working class would afford both cultural artifacts and other elegant things that were in the past a reserve of the bourgeoisies.

This argument perhaps explains why “in 1850, population of nearly 30,000,000 paid 50,000,000 pounds of taxes while, in 1801, population of 15,000,000 paid not less than 63,000,000 pounds” (The Economist 100).

For the materials to be cheap such that the proletariats could afford them, there was high deployment of machines for mass production.

This attempt meant that the bourgeoisies would continue leaping large profits from the sales of the material now not from the small wealthy class but from the larger less wealthy class by virtue of economies of scale.

Therefore, even though major strides seemed to have been attained at the surface, fostering equality of the bourgeoisies and the proletariats in terms of buying power was problematic since capitalism and meritocracy was still persistent.

Works Cited The Economist. “Early liberal thought and practice.” The economist 9.1(1851): 93-100. Print.

[supanova_question]

Managing For Environmental Sustainability Essay essay help online

Executive summary Scholz Industries is an electric products manufacturer and air conditioning firm, which treats environmental goals as part of its strategic advantage. However, the company lacks environmental information gathering mechanisms. Furthermore, no organisation-wide team exists to handle environmental matters. The CEO is committed to the environment but mid to low level employees do not share this enthusiasm.

Nonetheless, the company has a series of initiatives in office operations, manufacturing processes and product management that ensure it maintains environmental safety and some degree of conservation. It was recommended that the company revise its environmental sustainability goals to make them more realistic. The firm needs to train employees on the relevance of the environment in their work. It should also set information gathering systems, response plans as well as use other operational avenues for sustainability.

Introduction Scholz Industries is an Australian-based air conditioning and electrical manufacturing firm. The company has been in business for 15 years and has built a brand name for itself among stakeholders in the industry through high quality, immediate delivery and strong customer support. The firm consists of two key divisions: Scholz Industries Electric and Scholz Industries Climate division.

The Climate group has two sub divisions, which merged into one entity; Air Additions and Rayson industries. Rayson specialises in sheet products like flexible ducts, kitchen canopies, grilles, and other customised duct products. Air Additions focuses on the production of cooling, ventilation as well as heating products. Conversely, Scholz Electric focuses on electric products.

It carries out manufacture, research and distribution of the merchandise. Some of the subsidiaries of the Electrical division include Solar Spec, Lumex Lighting, BPT, Opal Air and Appliance Test Tags. The latter group provides lock out and electrical test tags to manufacturers. Opal Air deals with the provision of ceiling fans and other air conditioning equipment.

BPT is a supplier of home automation solutions that facilitate door entry. Lumex Lighting is an LED lighting specialist while Solar Spec offers solar installations in homes and commercial areas (Scholz Industries 2013a). The Scholz family owns the company with Oliver Scholz as the founder and Erik Scholz as the managing director. It is a propriety company that possesses shareholders who are less than 50.

Through partnerships with other organisations, ownership has also been spread among a series of other stakeholders. Scholz shows a strong market presence in the air conditioning and electrical industry. The company sells its products to almost all regions of Australia and even has presence in New Zealand.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Its consumers mostly come from the manufacturing sector although other commercial organisations also contribute substantially to their profit margins. It had an annual turnover of approximately 4 billion Euros. The company enjoys this huge success due to great business decisions, as well as high quality products. It often engages in alliances with organisations that are good at what they do.

A case in point was the merger of Rayson and Air Additions in the Climate division. Rayson Industries was a mature brand that had a track record for high quality sheet making. This ensured that Air Additions would be better able to offer its clients the best products in the market.

Major products sold by the firm are lighting equipment, home automation products, ceiling fans, test tags, and several other ventilation, cooling, and heating equipment. The firms also sells sheet metal products like kitchen canopies or home canopies, spiral ducts, grilles, Zoning systems as well as accessories that accompany the installation of the above-mentioned products.

Definition of the company’s key target markets Scholz mostly targets large institutions in various sectors of the economy. Some of them may be public facilities like hospitals or recreation centres. Alternatively, others may be commercial establishments such as commercial kitchens or cold stores. The firm often works with plants and industries as these organisations require various sheet products.

Its electrical clients could either be pre-existing commercial entities or builders. Such individuals may be interested in upgrading their electrical systems or installing new ones in ongoing constructions. Geographical coverage for the company extends across various sectors of Australia and New Zealand. Its large projects testify to this vast coverage.

For instance, the organisation installed ducts for an Ice Skating Centre called Henke Rink in West Melbourne. It also did ventilation ducting for a Cold Store at Oxford. Scholz also installed exhaust hoods for a Golf Club at Riversdale and placed ventilation ducts at a Children’s Hospital in Parkville (Scholz Industries 2013b). The provision of services spans across different parts of the region.

Transportation and communication for the firm largely revolves around air freight, sea and trucking of packages. Although the firm manufactures most of the commodities that it sells, its raw materials are imports from different parts of the world. Furthermore, some products also come when fully manufactured such that Scholz only has to import them and sell them as they were originally.

We will write a custom Essay on Managing For Environmental Sustainability specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Since their clients are also in different parts of Australia and New Zealand, it needs to organise the delivery of these items safely. Consequently, sea and air transport are essential in the delivery of products. Locally-delivered products rely on road transport as this is both economical and convenient. During transportation of the products on roads, it may sometimes be difficult to maintain the shapes and structure of certain ducts or hoods unless transportation arrangements exist.

If a hood is 15 by 6 metres, it cannot fit into a typical truck, so the firm must use unconventional trucks for this work. Customer buying habits are different from one person to another in this industry. It depends on the person interests. Many of them often buy electrical products after doing extensive research on product specifications.

They may focus on the nature of the product rather than price. Therefore, they do not compromise on quality. For instance, if a buyer requires solar panels, he or she will buy one that can use sufficient power for his or her needs. It should be noted that the buying process is sometimes a complex one in which the client has the favourable position.

Large projects may entail offers in which Scholz has to compete to prove that it is capable of meeting its consumers’ needs (Scholz Industries 2013b). Most times, the buyer and Scholz will sign contracts if the firm is convincing enough to those who are concerned. Buyers also respond positively to complementary services such as installation efficiency, customer support and good order tracking.

Several customers in this industry want a company that delivers its services quickly. The distribution system within the organisation is involved with contractors and electrical distributors. Most of them carry out multiple functions such as sales, marketing, logistics handling, and customer service (Scholz Industries 2013b).

In order to make a good relation with Scholz, the company must ensure that contractors and distributors have a proper understanding of their products. They also train them on how they would like their products to be sold. Marketing communication takes place through a series of avenues, and these include the company website as well as other associate websites, conferences, brochures, trade nights and event sponsorships.

Scholz Industries has a comprehensive website in which it informs its clients about various components of business. The firm talks about what it does and describes the products and services that clients can buy from them. The website also contains visual representations of the items as well as unique features about each of them. Contact information is also available for those buyers who want details about making a transaction.

The website also summarises some of the projects that the company has engaged in as well as the strategic decisions that it has made. This creates a better understanding of the company’s workings among its clients. Scholz Industries’ representatives often attend conferences on energy efficiency, carbon footprint reduction and other climate-related issues.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Managing For Environmental Sustainability by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This exposes the company to stakeholders who will require their services or products in order to achieve their environmental goals. Furthermore, the company also interacts with potential suppliers or partners in these events. Trade nights are also another significant source of marketing communication. The company will display some of its products in such programs and thus expand its market base.

Additionally, sponsorship of events is another element of marketing communication. In this channel, target clients will get information about the firm’s capabilities from a third-party, which adds credibility to their marketing message. Pricing at Scholz depends on the quality of products sold. The firm is neither too expensive nor cheap.

It tries to offer clients value for their money by charging them amounts that match product input (Scholz Industries 2013c). If a certain product requires much preparation, customisation and pre-assembly, then concerned individuals need to pay a premium for this price. However, it sells finished and non-customisable products at standard rates.

Comparison of Scholz products with competitors’ products Some of the key competitors for the organisation are Pierlite and Clipsal. Pierlite is a lighting solutions provider that sells different types of luminaries such as lamps, LEDs, floodlights, emergency lights and roadway lighting products. Conversely, Clipsal is an electrical solutions provider that specialises in electric products like cabinet lights, switches and power points, energy saving solutions and circuit protection.

Scholz is unique in that it offers products from both its competitors’ portfolios; that is lighting services and electrical solutions. Furthermore, its products are targeted at environmentally-conscious clients. Its high product diversification allows the company to merge competencies from its primary divisions in order to give clients the best offer possible.

In addition, the company is a proud of itself in the level at which it incorporates new innovation and designs in its products. This ensures that buyers get value for their money by enjoying a longer product life. Most of Scholz’ products often have longer life than that of their competitors. Although Clipsal and Pierlite have green products, Scholz is the only competitor that has dedicated an entire division towards green objectives.

As a result, the firm is better able to meet the unique needs of environmentally-conscious consumers. Scholz’s products also come with a series of complementary services such as installation, assembly and usage tips. Clipsal also offers this service, so it is a force with which to consider. This competitor also has a loyalty program known as Club Clipsal, where it rewards clients for repeat business.

Such a strategy makes it hard for competitors like Scholz to attract customers away from Clipsal. Perhaps another key component about the nature of competition between these firms is the fact that the products in each firm are unique. Pierlite mostly has large-scale products like floodlights for sports arenas and bulkheads (Pierlite 2012). Conversely, Clipsal mostly sells electrical circuit systems and technologies.

Scholz’s electrical products revolve around green consumption like LED, solar specifications and many more. Therefore, the highly specialised nature of products from all the organisations makes competition less dramatic. Nonetheless, there are situations in which similar products can be found in all three organisations. It is for these products that competition becomes stronger.

Pricing in all three firms depends on the quality of products sold. Scholz always tries to offer reasonable prices in comparison to the quality of products. Most of the competitors often avoid price competition because this may undermine the amount of effort put into the production of their commodities. In fact, the lack of price competition is not an uncommon feature in the electrical industry because products are not fast moving.

Fast moving consumer goods often attract price competition because value differentiation is difficult to achieve; this is not the case for products within this industry. Promotional strategies for Scholz focus on selling at fixed prices on bulk purchases. For instance, the company offers free bulbs if a customer buys 20 or more. Additionally, it encourages individuals to purchase similar products as a bundle.

They often promote the purchase of solar and LED products together as buyers are likely to respond to such green initiatives in a similar manner. As mentioned earlier, Clipsal has a promotional strategy that involves loyalty points while Pierlite also gives discounts for certain purchases. On the other hand, other promotional strategies like sponsorship and trade nights also allow Scholz’s competitors to gain exposure in the industry (Scholz Industries 2013c).

Pierlite even has an annual magazine that highlights some of the lighting conferences attended or products that buyers can get from the institution. Distribution of products from all three competitors occurs across Australia. Just like Scholz, Clipsal has a range of wholesalers and distributors throughout the country. Pierlite also sells most of its products through distributors.

The company mostly has wholesalers for trade goods or products targeted at commercial enterprises. They sell some of their products in New Zealand, as well. Scholz has the largest market share in the industry because of its business strategies.

It has operated for only 15 years but has partnered with players who have been in the industry for over half a century. Leveraging on other business’ expertise has won the company substantial support. Clipsal is the second most important competitor while Pierlite has the least amount of shares among the three competitors.

Planning In corporate planning, Scholz intends on growing and developing its current branches. It wants to reach markets that had previously been ignored by the organisation. Since the company’s branches are only six in number, it is essential to ensure that the services and products sold at those branches are high quality. The company can work on logistics, customer care as well as other areas of production in each of the branches.

It can also standardise high performance so as to create a satisfactory image among the clients (Damall et. al. 2006). The strategic plan spans across manufacturing, human resources, marketing and environmental sustainability. In the human resource department, the firm intends on training its workers concerning the business.

This will create a culture of efficiency within the organisation. Furthermore, it will create a lot of morale and set the stage for organisational development in the company. Scholz intends on conducting a training needs analysis and responding to it by educating its workers. Since innovation is a vital part of the company’s corporate strategy, it intends on encouraging this phenomenon by equipping workers with the knowledge needed to achieve this.

In manufacturing, the company plans on increasing the number of lights manufactured using solar power fittings like RASYN. This will meet its sustainability goals and ensure that the firm delivers green products to those who require them. In addition, the company wants to increase the number of locally-made electrical products.

Importing products not only creates additional financial constraints for the firm, but it also weakens its environmental sustainability goals. This would allow the company to pass on cost savings to consumers or it could reach a new set of buyers who consider ecological footprints of products during production (Gulland-Milner

[supanova_question]

Legal Gun Ownership Opinion Essay essay help online: essay help online

In the US, the increase in cases of gun violence has generated heated debates over legal gun ownership (Krouse 33). Thirty-three states permit its lawful citizens to own firearms. The Right to Carry (RTC) law allows law-abiding citizens to be issued with gun permits. Critics assert that the current increase in the number of gun related crimes results from the country’s lenient gun ownership law.

According to critics, appropriate gun policies and legislations would reduce the ever-increasing cases of violence in our society. However, those who advocate for gun ownership have challenged the belief that amendments of gun ownership laws would reduce the number of criminals with firearms. Proponents assert that having more guns in private hands would reduce the level of crimes.

Based on the above arguments, this paper seeks to highlight the reasons why gun ownership law should not be amended. My position differs from those who propose that gun legislations should be reviewed. I believe that the introduction of gun control measures in the US would violate the people’s rights as stipulated in the US constitution.

This implies that the government is obliged to safeguard individuals’ rights by ensuring that all Americans are allowed to protect themselves, their loved ones, and their properties. Gun rights advocates estimate that up to 3.6 million defensive uses of gun are reported annually (Ferro 153). According to the US Department of Justice, the figure is said to be higher since most self-defense scenarios go unreported.

Through these incidences, it is a fact that citizens can successfully defend themselves with guns. Similarly, individuals who own guns should be aware of these rights, and acknowledge that the right of an individual to own and bear arms is not just a slogan but central part of the Second Amendment.

In the society, several factors influence the prevalence of crime and violence. Poverty, drug abuse, and psychological issues are the major factors to blame for the increase in the rate of gun related violence in our societies. Similarly, unavailability of strict gun law has been blamed for the increase in the murder and suicide cases in the US (Roleff 90).

Sociologists suggest that relevant stakeholders should tackle with these underlying issues for the gun related violence in our society to reduce (Sheptycki 310). Researchers have indicated that if gun control were enacted in the US, law-abiding gun owners would reduce in number. On the contrary, the number of criminals with guns might not reduce.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is postulated that if private gun ownership was banned, criminals would still access these weapons using other illegal means. This implies that crime rate might increases, as criminals would be the only ones armed leaving the public unprotected. Through these recommendations, gun proponents argue that the current gun legislations are the most effective means of reducing crime if they are fully implemented.

I believe that if more citizens that are law-abiding own more guns, criminals would be more scared to commit acts of violence. This theory bases its effectiveness on the fact that criminals fear to attack armed individuals. According to classic and neoclassic theories, criminals are rational individuals who can reduce the violent acts if the perceived costs of crime prevail over the perceived gains from committing a crime (Wintemute 156).

This implies that an increase in the number of legally permitted guns would lead to a reduction in gun related violence and crimes due to the increase in the cost of committing such crimes. Similarly, research findings indicate that states that enforce laws permitting legally abiding citizens to carry concealed guns have realized a drop in crimes and violence.

The drop in crimes and violence is attributed to reactions criminals, especially those without guns, respond to when the cost of committing crime increases. Notably, it has been pointed out that criminals shift their criminal activities to conducive states without RTC laws when RTC laws are enacted in specific states. In some instances, criminals have shifted to other types of crimes such as larceny because of enforcement of RTC laws.

In this regard, the government should stop its initiatives of trying to implement tougher gun control measures. Instead, the government should increase sentencing penalties and waiting periods to discourage criminals from committing their wrongful acts.

Those who oppose RTC laws have presented several arguments as to why allowing law-abiding citizens to carry concealed guns is dangerous (Lott

[supanova_question]

Market Metrics Evaluation Essay college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Business environment

Business review

Assessing sales growth

Conclusion

Recommendation

Reference List

Introduction Organisations can incorporate different categories of marketing metrics in an effort to appraise their performance. Examples of such metrics include customer-based and traditional marketing metrics. Some of the traditional marketing metrics include market share, customer satisfaction, sales growth, customer loyalty, and ad awareness.

However, “market share and sales growth are the most popular traditional marketing metrics” (Davis 2007, p.96). Kumar and Reinartz (2012) assert that traditional marketing metrics were formulated after it turned out difficult to obtain individual customer data. Consequently, such metrics are deficient for they do not give customer-level insight.

However, the availability of customer information over the past few decades has led to the formulation of new metrics that assist managers to develop a comprehensive understanding of individual customer and the value of a given customer to the firm (Hauser

[supanova_question]

Assessing in the Field of Marriage and Family Therapy Exploratory Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Purpose of Assessment

Assessment without Judging

Why Marriage and Family Therapists should be allowed to Diagnose

Philosophical Challenges in Marriage and Family Diagnosis

Impacts of Diagnosis on Marriage and Family Therapist

References

Introduction Assessment refers to the treatment process of identifying the signs and symptoms, which are associated with mental and emotional disorders. The disorders are then compared with the standardized disorders.

It should be noted that the treatment process should be based on the health condition of the patient because patients differ based on their coping abilities. The therapist develops a treatment plan after completing the process of diagnosis. The treatment plan helps in the process of alleviating the symptoms.

Some instruments are utilized in the process of diagnosis and measuring the condition of the patient, including psychometric instruments (Barraca, Yarto,

[supanova_question]

Demand Forecasting Case Study college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Demand and supply

Price elasticity of demand

Income elasticity of demand

Market forecast

Demand and supply Demand and supply are the foundations of any economic analysis as the interaction of the two forms a market. The law of demand and supply works in the divergent ways in the sense that, when the prices of commodities changes, demand and supply will change in opposite direction holding other factors constant.

Market equilibrium for is attained at the point of intersection of demand and supply curve. Equilibrium condition is not static as any factor which affects demand and supply may distort it. The demand or supply of some goods will respond more to changes in price as compared to others.

This brings us to the concept of elasticity of goods. In addition, it is not only price that affects demand and supply of goods, there are other factors that would affect the market such as changes in technology, income, climatic conditions, and government regulations such as taxes.

This paper carries out the calculation of price elasticity of demand and income elasticity of a commodity. It further carries out the computation of market forecasts.

Price elasticity of demand Elasticity is a measure of responsiveness of demand or supply to changes in market condition. Price elasticity of demand measures the sensitivity of quantity demanded of a commodity to a unit change in the price of the commodity holding other factors affecting demand constant.

An increase in the price of a commodity results to a decline in quantity demanded. A commodity has a perfectly inelastic demand curve when the price elasticity of demand equals to zero one (0 < PED < 1). For inelastic demand, the price elasticity lies between zero and one.

Elastic demand has an elasticity that lies between one and infinity. A calculation of price elasticity of demand is shown below.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ed = [(Q2 – Q1) / (P2 – P1)] * [(P1 P2) / (Q1 Q2)]

= (111,000 – 106,000) / 145 – 150) * (150 145) / (111,000 106,000)

= (5,000 / -5) * (295 / 217,000)

= -1.3594

The arc price elasticity of demand of the commodity is -1.3594. This shows that the commodity has elastic demand. That is, the percentage change in quantity demanded changes is more than a unit change in the price of the commodity.

Income elasticity of demand Income elasticity of demand measures the sensitivity of changes in quantity demanded of goods and services to change in real income of the people consuming the goods and services, holding other factors constant. For a normal good, the income elasticity of demand is positive.

Computation of income elasticity of the commodity is shown below.

We will write a custom Case Study on Demand Forecasting specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Ed = [(Q2 – Q1) / (I2 – 11)] * [(I1 I2) / (Q1 Q2)]

= (111,000 – 106,000) / 358,786 – 361,381) * (358,786 361,381) / (111,000 106,000)

= (5,000 / -2,595) * (720,167/ 217,000)

= -6.3945

The arc income elasticity of demand for the commodity is -6.3945. Negative income elasticity of demand implies that the commodity is an inferior good. This implies that if income declines by one unit, quantity demanded will increase by 6.3945 units.

Market forecast Market forecast will be obtained by multiplying the price elasticity of demand and income elasticity of demand as shown below.

Market forecast = price elasticity of demand * Income elasticity of demand

= -6.3945 * -1.3594

Not sure if you can write a paper on Demand Forecasting by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More = 8.6926

[supanova_question]

The Curriculum of the Business Strategies Reflective Essay writing essay help

Introduction Students learn different courses at the universities in a bid to gain white collar employment at the end of it. This is meant to bring food to the tables and perhaps make some savings for future investments. In most occasions, people supplement their white collar jobs with a bit of self employment in order to make ends meet.

This is championed by the fact that most employments do not earn employees enough cash to meet their budgets. Sometimes, employees need to secure their financial stability by starting other independent businesses apart from the employment they already have.

Recent statistics indicate that self employment is probably the most common form of job creation in the United States of America (Tyler, 1949). It is important to note that this case does not only apply to the United States of America but also to quite a number of nations across the globe.

This is so because self employment offers an extent of convenience and satisfaction that cannot be easily achieved by other forms of employment. Additionally, people tend to have the urge to have private businesses alongside their jobs in order to increase their income.

The unemployed society in a given country is also more likely to think along business lines as opposed to seeking employment elsewhere. All these play a significant role in increasing the number of private businesses (Knowles, Holton, and Swanson, 2012).

The ability of a businessperson to come up with a business idea, create and manage the business may be termed as entrepreneurship. An entrepreneur may also be referred to as a businessman. One who intends to start a business must first be well acquainted with business procedures, setbacks and management policies.

Even though starting a new business is usually a big risk, it pays off well if managed because the entrepreneur always has the freedom to manage his/her own business. That aside, the businessperson is able to balance his/her personal life by creating a business schedule that best suits him/her.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, private businesses always need funds for their inception. This could be quite a challenge especially for first-timers. The incorporation of risks in private businesses is also another challenge that might hinder people from starting businesses (Tyler, 1949).

An entrepreneur can only maneuver his/her way through all these variables by learning how to manage a business. The curriculum created on how to manage private businesses will play an integral part in this paper. This paper is meant to give an insight on the course.

The most relevant concepts of the course There are quite a number of relevant concepts in the course. They play a vital role in ensuring that an entrepreneur comes up with just the right business idea in his/her niche and evaluate whether the business is viable or not.

The concepts also assist businesspeople in making relevant hypotheses concerning their businesses. These concepts include the following.

Marketing segment

This involves the simple details of a proposed business plan.

It incorporates things like business name, slogan, targeted customers in terms of their ages, gender and sometimes financial status, ways of reaching the customers and perhaps the competitive advantage the proposed business would have over other related businesses.

This is important in ensuring that a business idea is well scrutinized without leaving any loopholes (Barrow, and Brown, 2012).

We will write a custom Essay on The Curriculum of the Business Strategies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Feasibility study

This is always done after coming up with a business plan and establishing the location of the business and perhaps its competitive advantage.

This study involves presenting a few potential clients with questionnaires that focus on the viability of the business. It is meant to give feedback and sometimes recommendations from the perspective of clients. It is important in customizing the business in relation to customer specific needs and wants.

Marketing plan

This is intended to give a blueprint on the advertising and promotion ideas meant to market the business to its potential customers. Entrepreneurs must be aware of the available marketing strategies.

They are important in getting the business idea to the clients. Some of these promotion ideas include business cards, posters, flyers, brochures, internet marketing, sales calls and mailings amongst others (Barrow, and Brown, 2012).

Legal issues of the business

There has to be legal obligations in any particular business. These include licenses, certificates for ownership and many others. In some occasions, the ownership of a business may be sole proprietorship, corporation, partnership or a non-profitable organization.

All these types of businesses are accompanied by their specific legal obligations. A businessperson should, therefore, be aware of the legal requirements for his/her business.

Capital

This is the most fundamental concept of a business. Before someone knows how much he/she needs to start up a business, it is important to determine all the items needed to commence (Biech, 2008). It is from these that prices will come in and perhaps transportation costs.

The manner in which the concepts impact on me professionally These concepts have significance to me. Even though I do not have employment experience, my family business has nurtured me in the field of business and taught me the basics. I have worked in an acting capacity in the family businesses of real estate, supermarkets and gas stations.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Curriculum of the Business Strategies by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More I have thus gained some considerable experience in finance and marketing. The concepts in the course have enlightened me on how to come up with the most comprehensive marketing and funding segments. They have advanced my knowledge in the key areas that need strict observation while coming up with a business idea.

The marketing strategies, for instance, have expanded my scope of thinking. Initially, my perception of marketing had been limited to business cards alone.

Today, however, I have known the convenience and affordability of using other marketing strategies like interment marketing and mailings. I have understood that these are the most reliable means of marketing a business.

The things that have made professional impacts on me for the past three months that I have been progressing through the course

Apart from knowing the basics of initiating a business and measures of ensuring that only a small percentage of risk is involved, I have also had other experiences that have made professional impacts on my business career.

For instance, the course has provided comprehensive strategies on how to attract, satisfy and maintain clients. When I get back to actual work, this will form an integral part of my daily operations. I have learnt the importance of trying to encourage first time clients to revisit.

In business, first-time clients are not as important as revisiting customers (Friere, 2000). This has impacted a lot on my strategy to apply all measures possible to ensure that a customer is satisfied and that he/she revisits another time.

The things contained in the course that are most likely to have an impact on me as I move forward with my career

Quite a number of things contained in the course will have a great impact on my career as I carry on. I have a special interest in the finance department and the things I learnt concerning finances will have a considerable impact when applied in the real life.

For instance, annual and quarterly financial projections contained in the course will have quite some impact when I apply them practically. The projections in terms of sales and expenses are forecasted financial goals that are supposed to be met given the different variables put in place for this purpose.

I am certain that these will assist in coming up with obtainable goals in my business. They will also provide the right channels for applying all the necessary machineries to ensure that objectives are met.

The costing procedures provided in the course are bound to have an impact in my career too. They are systematic and easy to understand.

Unlike the previous, complex procedures I used to apply, these simple formulas will most definitely ease my work especially when I get back to Saudi Arabia to manage one of our family supermarkets (Biech, 2008).

The things that I would do differently from now onwards considering the fact that I know what I know from the course

The very first thing that I will do differently from how I used to is the marketing strategy. I was so fond of using business cards alone. They had negligible effect as far as marketing our family businesses was concerned.

However, I kept using them because I had limited or absolutely no prior knowledge on the other viable strategies for marketing a business. I am glad I now know that internet marketing, especially through the social media, is able to draw enormous traffic to a business.

I will most definitely apply the use of internet marketing as well as other forms of marketing like direct calls and mailing in order to grow my business (Tyler, 1949).

Conclusion In conclusion, therefore, it is imperative that most if not all of the business strategies and ideas mentioned in the course are applied in order to meet organizational goals. Just like me, other colleagues have had so much to learn concerning incepting and growing a business. We all shall apply the things learnt from the course.

References Barrow, C., Barrow, P.,

[supanova_question]

Intervention of Western countries Essay best essay help: best essay help

The foremost idea that is being promoted throughout the course of Michael Walzer’s article The Case against Our Attack on Libya, is that, contrary to the assumption that it is specifically the protection of human rights and freedoms that represented the involved Western countries’ main agenda in Libya, this having not been the actual case.

According to the author, it was not only that the Western support of these rebels did not help to prevent the humanitarian catastrophe in the region, but it in fact created objective preconditions for this catastrophe to assume dramatic proportions.

Hence, Walzer’s suggestion that there is absolutely no rationale to believe that anything positive may ever come out of the military attack against Qaddafi forces.

Kenneth Roth’s article Was the Iraq War a Humanitarian Intervention? does resonate with the one, mentioned earlier. In it, the author went about justifying his suggestion that, even though American governmental officials used to justify the America’s invasion of Iraq, as such that was concerned with achieving purely humanitarian objectives, it did not result in lessening the extent of the ordinary Iraqi citizens’ vulnerability to the violations of their human rights.

In its turn, this provided Roth with the justification to conclude his article by suggesting that the U.S. invasion of Iraq could be referred to as anything, but the ‘humanitarian operation’.

Mahmood Mamdani’s article Responsibility to Protect or Right to Punish? can be well defined as another analytical piece, meant to expose the fallaciousness of the assumption that the pretext of ‘human rights protection’ justifies the violation of the independent countries’ national sovereignty.

After all, as it was pointed out by the author, the idea that the protection of ‘human rights’ should account for the international law’s cornerstone, contradicts this law’s classical provisions, which are absolutely clear about the fact that there can be no good enough excuse for any third-parties to meddle in the internal affairs of independent countries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Part 1 of the Gareth Evans’s book The Responsibility to Protect: Ending Mass Atrocity Crimes Once and for All is concerned with the discussion of how the concept of R2P (Responsibility to Protect) came into being.

Throughout this particular part of his book, the author also provides readers with an insight, as to what he considers the major challenges, faced by the members of the international community, on the way of eliminating the possibility for the state-sponsored genocidal atrocities to take place in the future.

As it appears from the book’s Part 1, it is specifically the fact that R2P is being inconsistent with the provisions of the 1648 Peace of Westphalia (which even today remains the foundation of an international law) that undermines the effectiveness of internationally enacted atrocity-prevention policies.

There can be only a few doubts, as to the fact that the earlier mentioned articles (book excerpt) do contain a number of discursively valid ideas, as to what should be considered the de facto implications of the R2P’s practical deployment.

At the same time, however, there are also a number of weaknesses to these articles (book excerpt).

The foremost of them is the fact that; whereas the authors discuss the concept of human rights, in general, and R2P, in particular, from the Constructivist perspective, it would make much more sense doing it from the Realist one.

The reason for this is apparent – as of today, it became clear to just about everybody that the true purpose that the ideologeme of ‘protection of human rights’ actually serves, is ensuring Western countries’ undisputed geopolitical dominance in the world, and allowing them to exercise a unilateral control over the world’s natural resources.

We will write a custom Essay on Intervention of Western countries specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Evans, Gareth. The Responsibility to Protect: Ending Mass Atrocity Crimes Once and for All. Washington: Brookings Institution Press, 2009. Print.

Mamdani, Mahmood. “Responsibility to Protect or Right to Punish?” Journal of Intervention and Statebuilding 4.1 (2010): 53-67. Print.

Roth, Kenneth. “Was the Iraq War a Humanitarian Intervention?” Journal of Military Ethics 5.2 (2006): 84-92. Print.

Walzer, Michael. The Case against Our Attack on Libya. Web.

[supanova_question]

Analysis of Japan’s Energy Policy Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

The Energy and Environmental Council of Japan (2012) points out that, the oil price shock that was experienced in 1973 had a fundamental impact, as far as the energy policies of many countries is concerned.

According to The Energy and Environmental Council of Japan (2012), this event resulted in many countries reconsidering their energy policies, whereby many countries started considering implementing policies that will secure their energy supplies in the event of a global energy crisis.

Most countries, including the United States, sought for policies that would reduce their dependence on fossil based energy sources, but instead encourage the use of renewable energy sources.

In addition to being environmental friendly, they would ensure that they are in a position to attain some degree of independence, as far as the supply and consumption of energy is concerned (Johansson, 2007).

Since this period, the governments of many countries have turned to alternative energy sources such as geothermal, solar power, and hydro-electric energy to supplement their use of fossil based energy.

In the long run, this has enabled them to significantly reduce their dependence on fossil energy (Maczulak, 2003).

As much as there has been considerable success on this front, Toyoda (2012) points out that the level of use of these environmentally friendly renewable energy sources has largely remained insignificant, as compared to most country’s overall energy consumption.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This has resulted to a situation where most countries still heavily rely on fossil based energy sources, despite the presence of numerous policies aimed at limiting their use.

In addition to the alternative (green) energy sources, another source of energy that has been and is still in use by many of the developed countries is nuclear energy (Rathore

[supanova_question]

International Management: Ethics and Culture Critical Essay essay help site:edu

Introduction Ethics is a discipline that is concerned with evaluating an individuals’ or a society’s moral standards. As a result, ethics determines what is acceptable or non-acceptable in a society (Weiss, 2009, p.1). In the business environment, it is vital for the parties involved to appreciate ethical issues because the existence of ethical congruence is vital for there to be a successful relationship between the various stakeholders.

For example, adherence to ethics enables a firm to develop an environment conducive for working. However, there are no universally accepted standards that define ethical conducts practiced around the world. Therefore, managers are required to develop ethics which will aid their firm to succeed.

According to Ralston, Egri, Casado, Fu and Wangenheim (2009, p. 374), dealing with ethical issues is challenging especially in the international business environment. This is due to existence of cross cultural issues. Corrupt societies are not effective in developing relationships. This has the effect or reducing foreign direct investment.

In an effort to understand how life stage and societal culture impact subordinates influence on ethics, the researcher undertaken by Ralston et al (2009, p. 374) evaluates the on ethics in the workplace. This is achieved by evaluating how the various ethical perspectives are integrated by organizations subordinates in an effort to influence top management or the seniors.

The researchers’ core emphasis is on how life stage and societal culture influence subordinates.’ This is attained by taking into account the existing cultural diversity which is revealed by existence of differences in moral standards and ethics within a society across countries. The study has also taken into consideration both experiential and conceptual objective in an effort to evaluate the various multi-level and multi-country aspects related to life stage theory and societal culture.

Hierarchy of ethics Studies conducted on the three dimensions which form the hierarchy of ethics reveal that they are evident in different countries. The 3 hierarchy of ethics evaluated include the following behaviors;

Organizationally beneficial

Self-indulgent

Destructive

The study considers organizationally beneficial behaviors to be the most important in the operation of an organization. These behaviors relate to the code of conduct which employees are required to integrate in executing their duties. These behaviors are beneficial in the performance of a firm.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For example, employees are required to portray expertise in their executing their duties. This significantly contributes towards the organization operating effectively and efficiently. Additionally, employees are required to develop a good working relationship with the employees. This will play a vital role in creating an environment conducive for working.

For example, emphasizing on development of organizationally beneficial behaviors by managers can lead into development of an environment conducive for creation of teamwork within the firm. The resultant effect is that the firm will be able to executive its projects more effectively and efficiently.

Self indulgent behaviors Self indulgent behaviors occur when employees are concerned with their own self interest. This means that the employees are not concerned with the attainment of the organization goal but their own interests. In addition, the employees are not sensitive of the interest of the other employees the firm. This leads to development of ‘me first’ attitude.

According to the study, these behaviors can harm the organization. For example, due to existence of such behaviors, the employees may conflict with each other especially if they perceive that they are standing in their path towards attainment of their personal goals. The resultant effect is that employee productivity is adversely affected.

Additionally, they may negatively influence the managers in their decision making process so as to achieve their personal interest. Therefore, it is vital for firms’ managers to manage such behaviors effectively to ensure that they do not negatively affect the firms operation.

One of the ways through which the managers can instill ethics amongst the employees is by ensuring that they understand that their personal success is dependent on the success of the firm. As a result, all their efforts should be geared towards attainment of the firm’s goals. In addition, managers should ensure that they are efficient in organizational conflict resolution.

Destructive behavior These behaviors are similar to self-indulgent behavior in that they may harm the operation of a firm. However, destructive behaviors are extremely self-serving in that they are directly aimed at harming others. Some examples of destructive behaviors include sexual harassment.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on International Management: Ethics and Culture specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Issuing threats of giving outsiders such as the competitors’ sensitive customer information if one’s demand is not met, and offering sexual favors to individuals in senior positions. Such behaviors should be discouraged by ensuring that the employees understand the legal consequences associated with such behaviors.

How of life stage and societal culture impact subordinate influence on ethics

The study explores two main issues which influence ethics. These include life stage and societal culture. The study has conducted a comprehensive analysis of how life stage influences subordinate influence ethics. To achieve this, various demographic variables are taken into consideration in the study.

One of the demographic variables used in evaluating the effect of life stage on ethics at the micro level is age. Findings of various studies conducted by a number of scholars revealed that age difference is a key predictor of existence of behavior differences amongst various individuals (Mellahi

[supanova_question]

Various Leadership Practice Styles Exploratory Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Overview: Personal Energy, Self-Believe, and Commitment Impact on Leadership Leadership is the most essential bit in an organization. Leadership enables the successful achievement of set goals and objectives in an organization. Personal feelings and characteristics of a leader are capable of determining the direction and overall leadership success of a team or an organization.

Various leadership styles exist, which enable leaders and managers to employ them to achieve the right results during varying conditions or situations.

While these leadership approaches are important, the individual characteristics of a leader, in terms of the self-belief, personal energy, as well as general commitment, play a crucial role in determining the success of the leadership in general.

Leadership Styles Democratic leadership

This style is also known as participative leadership and encourages employees in an organization to give their contributions as far as the decision-making process in the organization is concerned.1

A democratic leader constantly informs his employees of the things that affect their work, sharing with them the responsibility of solving any arising problems as well.

The leader in this regard should be a coach with the final say, although the information to be used in making the final decision is actually gathered from the members of staff.

This style has the ability of producing both high quality, as well as high quantity of work for a significant period. Because of the trust that the employees receive from their managers, the workers respond with high degree of cooperation, high morale, and team spirit.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, the main drawback of the participative or democratic leadership style is the fact that it requires highly experienced employees.

Laissez-Faire leadership

This style is referred to as ‘hands-off’, where the manager offers very little, or in some instance, no direction at all to the employees.2 This alternatively gives the employees a lot of freedom in the performance of their work.

In this regard, therefore, the employees have full freedom to determine goals on their own, make decisions on their own, as well as find the perfect solutions on the problems that they encounter.

Adopting the Laissez-faire kind of leadership, however, calls for a highly skilled workforce, use of external experts to support the workers, as well as trustworthy and highly experienced workers.

Failure on the part of the manager to offer regular feedback and the lack of understanding of responsibilities could easily jeopardize the overall performance of this leadership style.3

Practical Value of a Leadership Style to a Manager Working situation 1

A large multinational firm with operations that span across several nations may not necessarily require the physical presence of the company’s chief executive officer to ensure operations go on as planned.

Additionally, such an organization will face varying challenges to its subsidiary businesses because of the unique business environment that each country faces. This kind of a working environment would perfectly require a participative kind of leadership to ensure the organization’s objectives are easily met.

We will write a custom Essay on Various Leadership Practice Styles specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Employing this leadership style would allow workers in the various countries where the firm owns subsidiaries to be the key players in decision-making.

Although the organization as a whole may have its chief executive at the headquarters as the final decision maker, the decisions he will adopt will have to bear the angle of the workers in the branches.

This style has the potential of influencing positive business performance of the organization as a whole because the decisions that will be adopted in each of the countries will be customized for the market.

Working situation 2

A large car company with significant varied operations divides its numerous operations according to departments, including new car sales, old or used car sales, and service related sales.

Workers in each of the departments will be required to focus on their specific areas, which will vary considerably with the operations and activities in the other departments but within the same organization. The laissez-faire type of leadership will be most appropriate in such a working environment.

Because of the varying working conditions and demands in each of the three departments, the leadership should allow the workers to set their own goals, and work towards achieving the goals.

However, these targets should be communicated to the company’s manager so that the expectations are evaluated against the actual performance. Equally, it would allow the overall company manager the many opportunities to plan on the resources needed to help in achieving the results.

Because it will be upon the department managers and their respective employees determine their own departmental goals and targets, this style of leadership will definitely result in healthy intra-organizational competition.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Various Leadership Practice Styles by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Situational Variables Likely To Influence the Choice of a Leadership Personal commitment, self-belief, and energy can potentially affect the overall performance of a leader and the general leadership style adopted.

When an individual leader understands what drives or motivates performance, he gets to understand the potential motivators that could as well influence the workers into providing the desired performance or results.

The organizational culture has the potential of determining the choice of leadership style to be adopted. Organizational culture literally spells out how leadership will be performed in an organization through execution of the numerous organizational processes.

Key influencers of the decision making process and general activities reflect on the things individuals constantly encounter and admire within their social environment.

If a person resides in an area that is socially deprived, there is a high likelihood that such constructs of the social environment would have a bearing on their behavior. Thus, leaders need to get counter-influenced by other stronger values, which will help in positively shaping their overall leadership styles and decisions.

Conclusion Leaders can employ numerous leadership styles to help them achieve their organizational objectives and goals. These different styles of leadership include democratic leadership and laissez-faire. The democratic leader allows decision-making process within the organization to be provided by the employees.

The leader only collects the suggested decisions from the employees and implements them. The benefit of this style is in the confidence and self-belief that the employees build because of the role they play in making the organization’s decisions.

However, this type of leadership requires the workers to be highly skilled and in possession of significant work experience to be able to make reliable decisions on their own.

The laissez-faire type of leadership is a ‘hands-free’ kind of leadership that sets the workers free to set their own goals and objectives, and work towards achieving them.

The CEO only gets involved in terms of planning for the necessary requirements and offering support. Multinational organizations would perform well under such leadership style.

Bibliography Daft, RL, The leadership experience, Thomson Higher Education, Mason, 2008

Kunstler, RA,

[supanova_question]

Leadership Styles: A Critical Discussion Coursework essay help free

Today, more than ever, management scholars and practitioners seem to be engaged in unending debate about what constitutes an effective leadership style which can be employed within organizational settings to spur performance and sustain competitiveness. This debate has served to show the popularity of the leadership concept (Mohammed et al., 2012), but more importantly to demonstrate the combination of traits, skills and behaviors that characterize different leadership styles (Iqbal et al., 2012).

The present paper aims to explore some underlying concepts related to three commonly used leadership styles, namely transformational leadership, transactional leadership and servant leadership. The term ‘leadership style’ denotes a set of traits, skills, experiences and behaviors that a leader uniquely adopts in his day-to-day responsibility of leading others (Bhat et al., 2012).

The set of traits, skills and behaviors demonstrated by a particular leader is essentially grounded on his/her beliefs, ideas, norms, values and education (Iqbal et al., 2012). These authors further posit that different theories and assumptions lead to a multiplicity of leadership theories, some of which are discussed in the subsequent section.

Burns (1978) cited in Mohammed et al (2012) defined transformational leadership as “…a process of positive influence through which leaders motivate their followers to achieve organizational objectives beyond what is originally stated” (p. 52).

Transformational leaders not only inspire followers by aligning their own and followers value system with an important moral underpinning, but they are responsible for trying to inject motivation and enthusiasm in the followers (Iqbal et al., 2012), and depend on how followers perceive them in terms of goal setting and motivation to achieve the set goals (Bhat et al., 2012).

Extant literature demonstrates that transformational leadership style emphasizes the creation of a vision for and values of followers, in addition to developing an orientation of justice, loyalty and trust so as to transform the performance or fortunes of followers (Mohammed et al., 2012).

Transactional leadership, according to Bhat et al (2012), “…is the traditional style which works on contract or agreement in between the leader and the follower, about objectives” (p. 349). Here, the followers are motivated to perform and achieve the set organizational goals through the promised rewards, and are indeed rewarded on accomplishment of the set goals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Consequently, transactional leaders are mainly task-focused and employ task relevant information as criteria to evaluate the inconsistencies between targeted and actual follower performance. It therefore follows that transactional leaders do not develop any motivating or boosting positive environment to assert their authority and achieve extra ordinary performance and willingness from the followers; rather, rewards are used to spur performance (Bhat et al., 2012).

The third leadership style that will be discussed in this short paper is servant leadership. This leadership style is typified by many positive attributes such as servanthood, authenticity, morality, respect, value and spirituality. Extant literature demonstrates servant leadership is not so much about leadership but rather the exposition of servanthood attributes that initializes with a discovery of felt and existing needs (Sendjaya

[supanova_question]

Outsourcing and In-sourcing IT Service Component Research Paper online essay help

Introduction The Emirates Airways is the leading airline company in the entire Middle East region. This firm was started on October 25, 1985 by the government of United Arab Emirates. The government was keen on transforming this country into a business hub, and a tourist’s destination. The government had improved the infrastructure of the country and the city of Dubai was first turning into a global business hub.

The government was therefore concerned that there was no national airline that would travel from this city directly to other parts of the world (Sandhusen, 2008). The leadership of this country decided to start this company to take care of the national interests. The government therefore, funded this firm and offered it an enabling environment to prosper in this industry.

The Emirates Airways has made a lot of effort to ensure that it meets the expectation of the government and that of the customers. With the increasing market competition, the management of this firm realized that the only way it could prosper in this market would be through coming up with ways through which it could emerge as the preferred firm.

The management therefore, developed various strategies that would meet the expectations of customers. In its quest to attract customers, the firm became the first airline to install entertainment facilities in all its planes in the entire Middle East region (Liew, 2009). Most of these technical activities were initially outsourced.

However, the firm changed this strategy to in-sourcing after the realization that it had the capacity to build its own workforce. This has seen the firm become the leading airline in this region, and the fourth in the entire world.

Specific Business Unit and Component to be outsourced In every project, there must be a clear schedule that should be followed to ensure that it achieves its objectives. Emirates Airline was concerned of the state of the IT within the firm. Some of the delays were experienced in the process of booking, and there was need to improve the system in order to enhance efficiency of the firm.

The management therefore, developed a project that would ensure that it improves its internal communication and the inter-departmental connectivity within the firm (Lamb, 2012). This was the reason why the management decided to outsource external labor to work on this project as it was apparent that the available labor force lacked the capacity to perform this activity.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, the firm acted prudently by making their employees work alongside the hired technicians. The firm soon developed a workforce with the capacity to handle this activity. This allowed it to revert to in-sourcing of the activities internally. The Gantt chart below specifies the activities that were carried out in this project

Gantt chart

Time: 2012 January February March April Project Activity: Improving IT of the Firm Project Planning Project proposal development (Outsourcing) Project proposal approval Selecting an appropriate external workforce to undertake the project Implementation and Internal Learning Detailing requirements of the components of IT to be improved within the firm. Development of prototype by the outsourced firm. Approval of the prototype by the top management of Emirates Airline. Development of a version by the outsourced firm Test the version by both the outsourced firm and employees of Emirates Airline in the It department. Apply the correction on the version Approve and implement the final version In-sourcing Train all the users Using the internal workforce to improve this project. The above Gantt chart demonstrates all the activities that were accomplished within a specified duration. The firm started out by outsourcing the services, and when its workforce had developed understanding of the facts, the firm then tasked its employees with the duty to improve the project.

An Overview of the Business and Business Model Emirates Airways is currently the leading airline in the Middle East. The firm has its headquarters in Dubai, at Dubai International Airport. This firm operates in to four largest destinations across the world. The firm operates in more than 100 destinations in 74 countries. The company has managed to overcome stiff competition that is in the current market.

According to Charantimath (2007), the airline industry is very competitive. This scholar notes that this competition has been rising in the past decade with the entry of new airlines into the industry. It becomes a big challenge for a firm to operate in such a competitive market if it lacks proper competitive strategies. This scholar notes that the aviation industry has been consistently on the rise in the past one decade.

The emerging technologies have brought in a lot of changes in this industry, and firms are forced to adjust their operations in order to meet the market demands. The emerging trends in the aviation industry cannot be ignored. It would force a firm to embrace these changes in order to realize the benefits that this industry has to offer. This is what the management of Emirate Airline has been keen on.

This firm has received enough financial support from the government to enable it manage the emerging trends in the aviation sector. Some of the technological inventions always demand that the firm gets experts to handle various aspects of technology. It sometimes forces the firm to look for this expertise outside the firm. Effective marketing has seen this firm become the largest airline in this region.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Outsourcing and In-sourcing IT Service Component specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to Bissoondoyal (2006), marketing has changed from what it used to be in the past. Marketing was considered as part of production about 50 years ago. By then, competition was low, and the main concern was to increase production of the firm. The market was readily available in the global world. However, this has systematically changed over the years.

Firms have come to realize that customers have various options to choose from when they want to make a purchase. Given such independence of the customers, firms have come to realize that they have to come up with strategies that would enable them attract customers. This has resulted in a scenario where every firm is struggling to come up with appealing strategies through which they can capture the attention of the customers.

This competition is very stiff in the aviation industry. Such leading airlines like the British Airways, the Virgin Atlantic, Air France among others; the Emirates Airways is forced to come up with a strategy that would enable it capture the market in the best way possible. IT plays a central role in enhancing success of the firm in the market.

Service Components Outsourced As stated above, the aviation sector is very competitive. Firms have come to embrace technology as a way of managing this competition. The top management of Emirates Airline was concerned of the time that it takes to process details of customers while booking a flight with the firm. Other major airlines like the British Airways and even Qatar Airways had developed mechanisms that allowed them to reach out for the customers easily.

They had improved their system in a way that their customers could easily book for the plane through online means. These IT leaders of this firm appreciated the fact that its workforce had no capacity to develop a system that will enhance communication between the firm and the customers, and even within itself (Hartman, 2002). The system that was in existence was weak and could not be relied upon to deliver the expected results.

The management of this firm therefore had to outsource external skills in order to improve the IT department of the firm. The management of this firm hired expects to help improve the system to enhance booking of the plane online. The system was developed to allow all the booking offices to have instant communication amongst themselves and with the customers. The management decided to improve the internal workforce in the process of developing this system.

The Rationale for Outsourcing Outsourcing is one of the new trends in the current world. Initially, a firm would be involved in all the activities within the firm. The management would determine all the activities that should be undertaken within the firm. The management would then assign the activities to various departments within the firm to accomplish. This was working well in those olden days, especially after the Second World War.

Firms did not have to struggle looking for the market. The global market was very large, but firms that were doing mass production for various products were very few. There was therefore no serious competition in the market (Handlechner, 2008). The main focus of most firms was to increase their production capacity because of the readily available market.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Outsourcing and In-sourcing IT Service Component by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, this was changing as the world was getting globalized. Various firms were coming into existence from various corners around the world. With the emerging technologies, the world was fast turning into a global village. Many countries also considered opening up their markets for foreign firms. This brought about serious competition as firms had to convince the market that their products are the best.

Outsourcing was first witnessed in the aviation industry. This industry still remains the leading outsourcing industry in the world. The airlines in many countries across the world realized that most of their employees did not have the capacity to offer quality service to the planes for maintenance purposes. These airline firms struggled to look for employees with the capacity to take care of the maintenance of the planes.

The process of looking for such experienced individuals was not only costly, but also very tiresome. It would take a lot f time getting an individual with enough knowledge in this area, and retaining them within the firm was another problem. This condition was worsened by the fact that such tasks would require a number of individuals to work as a team. The following are some of the justifications of outsourcing by Emirates Airline.

Increasing of the Operations Efficiency Outsourcing is one of the best ways of increasing operations efficiency. It is common to have cases where a firm lacks proper expertise to undertake certain activities. This is very common when dealing with the emerging technologies. It may take a very long time for a firm to train its employees on certain activities within the industry (Gerber, 2008).

Outsourcing therefore comes out strongly as the best strategy that allows the firm to operate with the highest efficiency level even if it lacks expertise in some fields. Employees who have knowledge and experience will be retained in their departments to increase their efficiency. Those tasks that the firm lacks proper expertise will be assigned to other firms with enough capacity to deliver good results. This way, the operations of the firm will be very efficient.

Increasing Time to Focus in Other Core Activities According to Ferrell (2011), it is always a strenuous and time consuming process trying to undertake a task that one has limited knowledge in. Such an individual will be performing two tasks at a time. The first task will be learning how to perform the task, while purporting to perform the task.

This takes a lot of time that would have been used to undertake other activities. When such activities are outsourced, it allows the firm more time to focus on activities that it can perform best. This way, the management, and the employees will be left with ample time to focus on other core activities of the firm.

Improving Management of Information Information is one of the key components of a firm that always dictates success or failure in the market. A firm that is able to develop an information flow has the capacity to succeed, unlike another with disrupted information strategy. Information management is always very important.

Outsourcing enhances information flow. When a firm outsources another firm, it would mean that the firm will have a reduced number of employees. Coordinating the reduced number of employees is much easier. The management will use the leadership of the outsourced firm to ensure that its employees work within its expectations.

Reduced Cost of Operations Firms are currently fighting to reduce costs of operations. Customers are demanding more for a lesser cost. The suppliers are demanding more money for lesser suppliers they deliver, citing increased cost of operations. Emirates Airline is pressed between these two forces.

It has to find a way of meeting the needs of the two forces. Outsourcing offers firms this opportunity. When a firm outsources another to perform certain tasks, this would mean that the firm will not need to hire individuals in these departments. This reduces the cost of labor for the firm.

Reduced Risks The process of outsourcing reduces the risks of errors in performing certain activities. This is very common in the aviation industry. When these tasks are assigned to experienced individuals, chances that the activity will be done in a faulty way are minimized. This reduces risks that would be met if the activities were done by inexperienced employees within the firm.

Quick Implementation of New Technologies The emerging technologies are very important in the modern world. It is important that the management of Emirates Airline ensures that it has the capacity to manage the emerging technologies. Outsourcing other firms in various departments within the organization helps in quickening the implementation of new technologies.

To implement new technologies as quick as may be desired, there is always need to ensure that there are individuals who have an understanding of such technologies (Evans, 2012). The management f this firm will only need to go for a firm with experience and knowledge of the new technologies. Outsourcing their services will enable the outsourcing firm to implement new technologies at a faster rate.

Compliance to Security In most of the industries, there are some rules and regulations set by relevant authorities to protect the public. In the aviation sector, there are safety and security rules set up by various aviation bodies. The same case applies to various other departments.

Some sensitive industries like the aviation industry would require individuals with a deep understanding of the requirements put forth by the regulators. When a firm outsources such sensitive tasks to other firms, it makes it easy for the firm to comply with the security and safety rules. This would eliminate any possible cases of litigation.

Staffing Flexibility One of the biggest tasks that human resource department and the IT unit have to handle is the flexibility of the staff. The staff of any given organization must be flexible. It must be able to approach the emerging trends in the market and be able to come out successful. However, this is not very easy because of specialization that comes with division of labor.

When an individual is assigned a specific task, it would be difficult to make them perform other activities that are different from their current tasks. However, there must be flexibility of the workforce to enable the firm withstand the emerging trends. Outsourcing is the best way to enhance staff flexibility.

A firm will only need to hire individuals with understanding of the emerging trends as and when needed. Employees will be given time to develop understanding of these new trends and master them, before they can start performing such tasks.

Development of the Internal Staff It is import to develop the internal workforce. Development of the staff can come in various approaches. One of the most common ways of developing the workforce is through in-service learning. In this strategy, employees’ capacity is improved while they are at work. Outsourcing is very vital in this strategy. The management will outsource a firm with the desired skills in a particular sector.

The management will then select the workforce that should learn the desired strategy and assign them to work alongside the outsourced firms. The employees would be expected to learn how to handle certain tasks by getting involved in doing them (Ferrell, 2011). The outsourced firm will not only be helping the firm in performing that particular activity, but also in teaching and developing the local staff.

The firm will therefore develop a strong workforce that has the capacity to handle various activities within the firm. The above are factors that made the firm consider outsourcing the services of external workforce in improving the communication system of the firm.

The Decision Makers in Outsourcing The decision of outsourcing some activities within the firm is always an involving activity. It is always important that various senior management officials get to agree on some of the factors to be considered when outsourcing. When Emirates Airline made the decision of outsourcing the services of external workforce in the IT department, the recommendation came from the head of the IT department.

Following complains that were received by customer care unit from the customers over the inefficiency of the firm, the management instructed this department to adjust the system to reflect on the emerging trends in the market. The IT department admitted that it lacked the capacity to improve the system to the levels that were expected. The department recommended hiring firms that had the capacity to improve the system to the world’s standards.

The IT management team played a major role in bridging the communication gaps between top executive. The executives had to be convinced that the firm lacked the capacity to undertake these duties by itself. The IT head therefore, had a huge responsibility of ensuring that all the officials who were responsible for giving a node to the project were convinced beyond any reasonable doubt that the best way was to outsource these services.

The Decision to In-source the Activities and Role of IT leaders in improving communication and rapport

The management of Emirates Airline was keen on ensuring that the contract for the activities lasted for about three months. The above Gantt chart clearly demonstrates this. The reason why the management was forced to outsource for these activities was due to lack of a proper expertise internally. One of the terms of the contract was that internal workforce would be working alongside the outsource workers.

It was therefore a decision of the top management that after some time, the internal workforce would assume the activities that were carried out by the outsourced labor. The internal workforce therefore, took the responsibility of maintaining the system on the run, and making improvements whenever this was necessary. The IT department has fully resumed all the activities that involve communication and coordinating information within the firm and also with customers.

Booking is now mostly done online, and customers have registered satisfaction with the services they receive from the firm. The process of moving from outsourced services to in-sourced services did not raise a lot of concern. This was because the IT department had stated initially that they only needed support from the external firm on how to adjust the system to reflect on the emerging trend.

It was agreed that the outsourced firm would only take about two and a half month, after which their contract with the airline would expire. It was therefore, not a big challenge for the IT leaders to inform other members of the department that they had decided to use the internal workforce to carry on with the activities that remained.

The Current Status of the Firm

Emirates Airline current status can be analyzed from various fronts. The move by the firm to outsource the IT services only to change the decision later on has had a number of benefits to the firm. The current status of the firm can be analyzed from a number of fronts. The following is an analysis of the current status of the firm from a number of fronts.

The Current Marketing Strategies of Emirates Airline

The move by the firm to outsource the IT services has had a massive impact on the firm’s marketing strategies. The team formulated a strategy that involved technological advancement in various departments. The firm then moved to the implementation strategy before coming up with evaluation and control procedures.

Emirates Airlines is one of the current success stories in a group of companies that have managed to be successful in the face of increasingly competitive environment. This is attributed to its strategies that have helped it manage the competition in the aviation industry. The world is getting transformed with the emerging technologies. One of the defining technologies that are transforming the world into a global village is the communication technology.

The phones and the internet have made communication very easy. The firm has made it possible for the customers to make bookings through internet irrespective of their location. This has seen this firm expand its operations to regions beyond this country. As such, this has seen this firm expand its customer base and the number of routes it takes.

The strategies are very important because in such a market, any misstep by a firm may lead to automatic fall of the firm and therefore, every step must be calculated very keenly. According to Hartman (2002), the current world market is very competitive. This scholar notes that this competition is not only created by the fact that there are several firms producing the same product, but also the fact that customers are informed.

The current customers are very knowledgeable and know exactly what they want. They have the knowledge of where to get that which they need and at what price. They know the alternatives that are available and this makes them more demanding. As such, turning these individuals into loyal customers of a firm is not easy. It forces a firm to develop a strategy that would enable it remain relevant in the market

The Current International Marketing Campaigns used by Emirates Airlines around the World

In the current market, customers are very demanding. This firm is constantly under pressure to perform exceedingly well in order to manage the competition in the market. It faces a lot of pressure from the suppliers. The jet fuel is constantly on the rise. The airline firm has to otherwise but to pay the increased price of fuel. The cost of maintenance is also high.

This increases the cost of delivering products to the customer. The firm also needs to improve on the quality of the products in order to ensure that they outmuscle other competitors. When the product is delivered to the customers, the customer will demand reduced prices simply because they have other alternatives. This would force the firm to find a way of generating profits in such a harsh environment.

The outsourced services helped a great deal in overcoming this challenge. The Emirates Airways has come to realize that it has to develop means through which it can develop promotional campaigns for its products in the global market. The Emirates Airways has developed a brand in the local market, and the entire region of Middle East.

The region appreciates the fact that this company offers the best travel services in the region. However, there is a very strong competition from another regional airline, the Qatar Airways, which is posing threat to this firm. It forces the firm to come up with strategies which can enable it attract the customers in the region. Regionally, this firm has positioned itself as a company that takes care of comfort, safety and security of the passengers.

One of the leading concerns of most passengers is the comfort of the plane. This is because the distance is always very long. This would require some comfort for the passengers in order to reduce fatigue. The passengers are also concerned with their security once on air. This is because of the rising insecurity in most cities. Terrorist attack on the airplanes has become very common in the current globalized world.

Passengers want reassurance that they will be safe when they embark on such journeys. This market proposition has seen it win trust of the local market. This firm has also made concerted effort to attract travelers of other nations. In order to reach out for the customers, this firm has tried to use both the social media and mass media to communicate their message to the customers.

The firm made the decision to use social media marketing after the management decided to outsource the IT services. Locally, the firm has actively engaged in promotional campaigns in the mass media. It has developed television commercials that help it reach the local market. The social media has been very vital in reaching out for the international community.

The YouTube has helped this firm in airing its television commercials to the international community. The Facebook and Tweeter have also been very vital in communicating to the customers in the international market. When the firm decided to stop outsourcing the services, the internal workforce has been able to manage this strategy.

The Impact of the Decision Stop Outsourcing IT Services When the management decided to stop outsourcing the IT services, it was a little challenging for the employees of Emirates Airline to run the system on their own. They did not find it easy to take full control of the new system especially because of technicalities involved. The top management did not have issues with this change of approach because they were informed before the project was started.

The head of IT department had a little challenge filling the gap which was left by the technical team that was hired to improve the system. The head of this unit had to convince the employees in this department that they had the capacity to handle this project on their own. The employees in this department also had a big challenge trying to adjust to this new system.

It was difficult for the employees to take control of a system where most of the bookings and paying the fare was done online. The top management also exerted a lot of pressure on this department to come up with advanced strategies that would ensure that passengers are entertained while they are on air.

The Financial Status of the Firm The decision by the firm to improve its IT system by outsourcing the services from external experts has had direct positive financial impact on the firm. There have been an increased number of bookings per day. This can be attributed to the fact that customers can now make bookings online. Online booking has made it possible for customers to book for flight irrespective of their locations. The IT department has also improved entertainment services for the customers, further attracting them to the firm.

References Bissoondoyal, U. (2006). Total quality management: a practical approach. London: New Age International.

Charantimath, C. (2007). Total quality management. New York: Pearson Education.

Evans, D. (2012). Social media marketing an hour a day. Indianapolis: Wiley.

Ferrell, C. (2011). Marketing Strategy. New York: Cengage Learning.

Gerber, K. (2008). Marketing communication. Cape Town: Pearson Education.

Handlechner, M. (2008). Marketing Strategy. München: GRIN Verlag GmbH.

Hartman, M. (2002). Fundamental concepts of quality improvement. New York: ASQ.

Lamb, C. (2012). Marketing. Toronto: Nelson Education.

Liew, J. (2009). Employee training: a study of education and training department in various corporations. Sydney: General Books.

Sandhusen, R. (2008). Marketing. New York: Barron’s Educational Series Inc.

[supanova_question]

Description of the Research Process – The Montessori system Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

This action research began with the definition of the problem to be studied and the formulation of the research questions.

The problem statement focused on the analysis of the extent to which an authentic Montessori mathematics environment is compatible with the regular mathematics classes in order to fulfill the needs of all students.

In this regard, the research involved comparing the Montessori system with the conventional education system in order to identify the model that best suits learners’ needs.

The research was done in a privately owned Catholic school in Campbell, California. The school’s learning program promotes intellectual, emotional, and physical development of students. Thus, it provided the best setting for conducting an action research in Montessori education.

The participants were recruited from a class that consisted of 12-year-old students. They were mainly from middle and upper upper-middle class families.

Even though, most of them came from families with relatively stable financial backgrounds, nearly 5% of them depended on financial aid. Overall, fourteen students participated in the study.

Several methods were used to collect data concerning learning activities in the class. The methods include the following.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More First, I used the results of formative assessments to collect data concerning students’ performance. The assessment results were retrieved from mathematics worksheets and students’ homework.

Second, formal and informal observations were used to collect data. This method was used to collect data concerning students’ participation in class activities, as well as, the suitability of my instructional methods. In particular, is used videotaping to observe my performance in various lessons.

The aim of these observations was to enable me to identify the strengths and weaknesses of my instructional methods. The observations concerning students’ performance were recorded in teaching journals.

Consequently, it was possible to evaluate students’ performance and the suitability of my instructional methods.

Third, focus group discussions were used to collect data from the participants. The participants in these discussions included teachers and students. Through the focus group discussions, I was able to collect data concerning students’ knowledge, opinions, and class experiences.

Concisely, the discussions gave the opportunity to collect data concerning the instructional methods that the students were familiar with, as well as, the challenges that they faced in the process of learning. Furthermore, the discussions enabled me to obtain feedback concerning my teaching methods.

The data collection methods that have been described in the foregoing paragraph were used to collect information through learning activities that took place in the class. Verbally administered questionnaires and interviews were also used to collect data.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Description of the Research Process – The Montessori system specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Concisely, the questionnaires and interviews were used in the evaluation of students’ understanding and performance in each activity. This involved asking students questions that were related to the learning activities.

The learning activities or the lessons that have been completed and from which data has been collected include the following.

The first, exercise involved evaluating the students’ knowledge and skills in mathematics. The tests focused on skills such as ability to write numbers from 0 to 9, applying, and number concepts. The evaluations were conducted through written tests and the scores are indicated in appendix A.

Having tested the students’ math skills, I proceeded to the next exercise, which involved evaluating the learners’ sensorial skills. The evaluation was done with the aid of Montessori sensorial items such as flowers. The students were expected to classify the flowers into different categories.

The assessment for this exercise was done through verbally administered questionnaires. Each questionnaire had ten questions with 10 points each. Red and blue Montessori rods were used to assess the students’ ability to apply the concept of more than and fewer than.

The students were assessed individually using 10 questions, which focused on testing their ability to compare numbers between 1 and 10. Numeral counters were used to demonstrate the concept of odd and even numbers.

The evaluation involved asking the students to place the counters under each number in order to illustrate the odd and even arrangement, as well as, to demonstrate the concept of less than or more than. Students’ scores in these activities are recorded in appendix B.

The students’ ability to apply the concept of addition and subtraction was tested using California state standard curriculum content and Montessori materials. Colorful illustrations are often used to attract students’ attention.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Description of the Research Process – The Montessori system by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Even though the pictures distracted students from their work, they were able to visualize math concepts after the Montessori addition and subtraction materials were presented to them. Appendix C shows the students’ performance in this assessment.

Students’ mathematical skills were also evaluated through positive sake games, the hundred board, the hundred chains, and teen board. The test strategy and questions that were used for this assignment are listed in appendix E. These assessments were done in the first and second quarter of the year.

The second phase of classifying objects involved the use of drawings, photographs, graphic organizers among others. These items usually motivate students to learn. The exercise involved a problem solving process in which the students asked themselves questions regarding the things they did and how they did them.

The students’ performance was reviewed on a weekly basis. The conclusion on these activities is that Montessori sensorial materials enable children to understand fine details.

Additional lessons included the study of fractions, money, and clock (time). The faction lesson began with an explanation of the importance of studying fractions. The students were provided with pieces of paper, which they were required to fold into half in order to understand the concept of dividing things equally.

They were also expected to identify the shapes that they created by folding the papers. Additionally, the students completed the dotted paper and shape-drawing exercises, as well as, dividing shapes equally. The evaluations were done using 10 questions with 10 marks each.

Using Montessori material involved dividing an apple into smaller parts in order to demonstrate the concept of the whole, half and quarter. I also made various shapes and divided them into equal parts.

The students were expected to explain why they thought the parts were equal or unequal. Evaluations for this assignment were based on a standard formative matrix plan and rubrics.

Using money to teach number concepts improves students’ understanding. The money lesson was meant to enable students to use their math skills to count coins. The concept of one cent was presented with the aid of red and blue number rods, as well as, number cards.

The classroom was setup as a shop so that children could practice the concept of buying. I dollar, half a dollar, and a quarter dollar were used to represent the concept of one whole, half and quarter.

In the clock lesson, the concept of one whole was used to explain the rotation of the minute hand from 12 to 12. Assessments were done using scoring rubrics. Additionally, anecdotal evidence was measured using a scale of 1 to 4.

Having completed these exercises, the next stage will involve using Montessori materials to evaluate students’ ability to apply concepts such as the decimal system, addition, subtraction, division, and geometry.

The materials that will be used to demonstrate the decimal system include introduction tray, building tray, large numerical cards, 45-tray, nine-tray, and the change game. The concept of addition will be illustrated using bank materials, stamp game materials, and bead frame.

The materials will be used to create and solve mathematical problems by the students. Subtraction exercises will also involve the use of bank materials, stamp materials, and bead frame. These materials will be used to construct subtraction problems and answers.

Multiplication exercises will be presented with the aid of bank game, multiplication board, and bead box. Bank materials will be used to illustrate multiplication operations. The concept of division, will be illustrated with the aid of bank game, division board, stamp game, bead frame and dot board.

Bank materials will help in illustrating division operations. Students will slide down their fingers until they meet the answers in the division board. Finally, geometry exercises will be demonstrated using cylinder grid, geometric solids, and cards, as well as, constructive triangles and other shapes.

References California State Board of Education Sacramento. (1999). Mathematcis Content Standard for California Public Schools. California: California State Board of Education.

Har, Y., Segaran, N.,

[supanova_question]

Learners with Down Syndrome: A Handbook for Teaching Professionals Critical Essay essay help free

Table of Contents Article Information

Purpose or Problem Statement

Design/Procedure

Data Analysis

Conclusions/Implications

Critique/Evaluation

Article Information Down Syndrome Victoria (2009). Learners with Down Syndrome: A Handbook for Teaching Professionals. 1-21. Web.

Lemons, C. J., Mrachko, A. A., Kostwicz, D. E., Paterra, M. F. (2012). Effectiveness of Decoding and Phonological Awareness Interventions for Children with down Syndrome. Exceptional Children, 79(1), 67-90.

Purpose or Problem Statement The purpose of the research consists in highlighting the challenges that disabled children face, particularly those who have Down syndrome, as well as how these challenges could be surpassed by implementing new educational programs.

The main problem is that the existing strategies fail to address the educational issues of disabled people efficiently (Lemons et al., 2012).

In addition, school counselors should take greater responsibility for this category of people to improve conditions and introduce new reforms. This is of particular concern to reading intervention programs.

Design/Procedure The research premises on a set of research studies to provide experimental evaluation of current programs that address education of children with disabilities. Three programs have been selected to research the problem due to deep empirical base of the studies.

The rationale for selecting these programs is also predetermined by cost-effectiveness and availability of the programs. The research design and methodology involve an experimental and evidence-based approach.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The dependent variables involve reading interventions whereas independent variables focus on assessment of reading skills.

Each study is premised on different intervention strategies, which allows the researchers to assess which one is the most effective. In order to check the reliability of the programs 15 children have been chosen from age 3 to 15 (Lemons et al., 2012).

Children have been engaged in different programs with regard to their grades at school, as well as their reading skills. The interventions have been delivered both individually and at a group level.

All observations have been carried out through recording and transcribing. The procedure has also involved screening and participant selection, as well as training and implementation.

All the stages have been conducted through series of multiple baseline design studies to define whether there is a functional connection between reading interventions and measurement of reading skills among disabled children.

Data Analysis The main purpose of the selected programs consists in enhancing immediate word identification and improving reading comprehension skills among disabled children.

The instructors should provide background information about the main sounds and phonetic pronunciation of words for children to grasp the main approaches to reading. The analysis of the result has been premised on performance test and scale evaluations to define the degree of phonological awareness.

We will write a custom Article on Learners with Down Syndrome: A Handbook for Teaching Professionals specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusions/Implications The proposed experiment has approved the hypothesis about the evident connection between students’ development and intervention strategies. Over 30 % students have managed to improve their reading skills by means of the proposed programs whereas 70 % were not that good at mastering reading comprehension.

Despite the failure to achieve greater results, the research could serve as a foundation for other studies in the sphere of developing intervention programs for students with Down Syndrome.

More importantly, the proposed study contributes greatly to increased awareness of parents and school counselors who should be more concerned with designing efficient intervention programs.

Due to the fact that the research focuses on learner-centered approach in study, the scholars have managed to provide accurate numerical study and reliable information on the problem.

With regard to the research, being a special educator teacher implies continuous improvement of special education programs and services in an academic environment. Understanding social and cultural diversity is vital to highlight learner differences and develop an individualized approach under CEC Advanced Standard 3.

Critique/Evaluation In conclusion, the article under analysis discusses urgent issues and develops a consistent framework for analyzing the influence of intervention on the degree of students’ reading comprehension (Down Syndrome Victoria, 2009).

Continuous exploration of current programs dedicated to the analysis of disabled students’ skills and abilities can significantly improve the quality of education in this particular field.

Therefore, the article presents an extensive overview of approaches and techniques that teachers and professionals could employ while dealing with children with Down syndrome.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Learners with Down Syndrome: A Handbook for Teaching Professionals by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Business Expansion: A Case of Wal-Mart Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Current Strategy at Wal-Mart

Technology used at Wal-Mart

Recommendations on the Organizational Strategy in China

Conclusion

References

Introduction Global organizations continue to expand their physical borders as they venture into the international market in search of huge revenue and profits.

With the advent of globalization, most international companies find it easier to coordinate and control their operations as they target the achievement of bottom-line organizational objectives. However, challenges continue to influence the extent of success that organizations record in their international market operations.

Organizational culture, organizational transformations, and conflict management, for instance, are important aspects that managers must address as they pursue their expansion plans and programs.

This paper seeks to discuss the topical issue of business expansion comprehensively, especially by paying close attention to Wal-Mart. The analysis evaluates the ability and possibility of Wal-Mart expanding and successfully establishing its operations in China.

Current Strategy at Wal-Mart Wal-Mart mainly focuses on localization as its main strategy of expanding into international markets. Through localization, the retailer acquires establishments through buy-out or enters into a merger with the locally existing and already established firms (Jones, 2010).

Because the local firms already understand the market better than Wal-Mart itself would do, the firm seeks to enter a foreign market through an already existing venture.

This gives it the necessary competitive advantage over other rival firms because it does not begin its operations in a new international market from a new start, but continues with what already exists.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, the international market strategy by the firm involves maintaining the local brands exactly as they existed before. Even after buying or forming a merger with a local enterprise, Wal-Mart does not re-brand it with its own symbols, logos, and colors.

This is an important strategy in international market operation because local consumers often feel comfortable with local names and brands, which they view as representing their true beliefs, lifestyle, and attitude (Jones, 2010).

In the UK, for instance, Wal-Mart operates in the market under the brand name Asda, while in Japan the company operates under the brand name Seiyu (Walmart, 2013).

Maintaining the local connection is an important factor for any market, and the retailer achieves this through adopting names that are well recognized by the local market. The organizational structure adopted by the company is also crucial in its performance.

Centralization is pursued partly, where the retailer manages its sales, marketing, as well as materials management at the company’s headquarters. Store operations, on the other hand, are divided and distributed according to regions that are headed by regional managers (Jones, 2010).

Technology used at Wal-Mart From an organizational point of view, Wal-Mart relies on the capabilities of information communication technology to help in the formulation and implementation of decisions. Part of the retailer’s technology innovation in the business model focuses on reduction of operation time and the related cost.

The radio frequency identification technology, abbreviated as RFID, is particularly used for communication and exchange of data between the organization and other external organizations.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Business Expansion: A Case of Wal-Mart specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The RFID tags help Wal-Mart to communicate effectively with its suppliers concerning stock levels to avoid stock-out situations (Roberts

[supanova_question]

Case Analysis Report: Management Issues in Mergers Report college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Executive Summary Performance of an organisation may be enhanced in a variety of alternatives. Formation of mergers is one of these alternatives that can help to increase the trading price of organisational shares, efficiency ratios, and increased value of a company in share markets. Bancolumbia utilised this strategy to enhance its organisational transformation. Mergers bring different organisations together with different organisational cultures and ways of accomplishing tasks.

Consequently, various management issues arise during mergers. This paper utilises Bancolumbia as the case study to analyse such issues, discuss key decision criteria, prescribe alternatives, provide recommendations, and prescribe an action and implementation plan to handle management issues associated with the formation of mergers.

Problem Statement Bancolumbia conducted two of the largest mergers that had been experienced in Columbia with a period of less than 10 years under the leadership of Jorge Londono as the CEO. The success of these mergers as an organisational transformation strategy was dependent on the roles played by the persons charged with the entire process, factors such as organisational communication, and the leadership strategies deployed to enhance the overall collective transformation process. The main problem was to utilise organisational communication through leadership strategies to enhance the success of the new merger, which brought together persons who were inspired by different organisational cultures.

Supporting Evidence Bancolumbia merged with Corfinsara and Conavi in 2004. The rationale for this merger was based on the argument that a merger can exercise competitiveness based on the advantages associated with economies of scale (Richard Ivey School of Business 3). In Columbia, this case was perhaps crucial since the era of 1990s saw the country experience an economic downturn resulting to decreasing financial entities to about 37 percent in 1995 through 1999 and to 62 percent in 2006 (Richard Ivey School of Business 2).

The reduction evidences that the only organisations that would survive the impacts of economic downturns were the prominent ones. Consolidation was a strategy that would see the organisations acquire more clientele levels. Consequently, a new trend emerged in the banking industry focusing on having fewer but bigger banking institutions. The success of this strategy for the case of the merger between Conavi, Bancolumbia, and Corfinsara was realised through communication to shareholders about its value in enhancing the success of the company.

Key Decision Criteria Conavi, Bancolumbia, and Corfinsara’s merger decision criteria was based on the slogan “being one, we are more” (Richard Ivey School of Business 5). Realisation of this slogan led to the convening of a meeting by top executives of the three companies at Sata Marta. The main issue at hand was to determine the values, mission, and vision of the merged entity. Training and performance team did the facilitation of merger.

According to Richard Ivey School of Business this entangled offering technical advice to all parties involved in the merger on how to “ generate dynamics that would make people think on how to build a new organisation” (6). Arguably, the decision-making criteria on the approaches adopted in making the merger effective were based on communication strategies that would help to resolve a stalemate that would arise in case the parties, which perceived their organisational culture, would be eroded.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Alternatives Analysis Although the analysis of a merger is based on the impacts that it would have on the overall performance of the merged organisation in terms of market divide and efficiency ratio, management needs to consider other issues that would to make the merger successful. Such issues include how to respond to questions that would emanate from workers who would be subjected to the changing working environment, new working processes and procedures, and addressing issues of layoffs and degrees of contributions of every company on the daily business of the merger.

Richard Ivey School of Business Reports, “Bancolumbia accounted for 75.5%, Corfinsara 12.7%, and 11.8% for Conavi” (7). Resolution of the challenges associated with change of work environment requires effective organisational communication. Analysis of the legal implication of a merger is also a critical alternative analytic aspect in the evaluation of decisions to form a merger.

For instance, in the case of the merger between, Conavi, Bancolumbia, and Corfinsara, employees were concerned that the merger would result in their layoffs. Such unsatisfied employees would file legal petitions against the merger decision made by their respective organisations. Consideration of how this effort would influence the performance of the merger both in the short and in the end is essential.

Recommendations In the resolution of dominant challenges associated with organisational changes encountered in mergers such as those experienced in the merger between Conavi, Bancolumbia, and Corfinsara, it is recommended that, amid consideration of any other effort to enhance the success of the strategy, the merger should treat employees as the most crucial resource available for enhancing the success of the merger.

This provision would put more emphasis on the organisational communication through adopting a communication strategy having the following elements:

Incorporating the needs of different organisations’ stakeholders such as employees, managers, customers, and investors among others

Providing information on who would be making decisions that would influence customers and employees either directly and indirectly

Help in monitoring issues and needs handled during the integration process

Prepare employees for new roles that would arise following the mergers

Action and Implementation Plan In the implementation of organisational transformation strategy through a merger, an effective action plan is required (Galpin and Herndon 23). As argued before, since a merger involves many organisational changes, communication of such changes is an immense challenge. As evidenced by the merger between Conavi, Bancolumbia, and Corfinsara, to resolve this challenge, the following action and implementation plan for effective organisation communication strategy is proposed.

Building Awareness

The implementation of the plan entails linking various integration alternatives with various strategic plans. The alternatives should reaffirm to the different organisations forming the merger about equal adaptation of organisational values in the merger and communication as advised by Harrison (Para. 3). They should touch issues such as equal participation of the each organisation’s management coupled with the support of the merger so that stakeholders of one organisation do not feel disadvantaged.

We will write a custom Report on Case Analysis Report: Management Issues in Mergers specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Merger Status

This action plan is organisation-specific. It seeks to demonstrate the participation of senior organisational management in the merger process in the effort to bargain for better rewards for each organisation’s stakeholders forming the merger (Watson 16). It also ensures that the rationale for the merger is reaffirmed to all organisation stakeholders besides creating a bigger picture of the merger in the minds of all the stakeholders.

Rollout

The scope of this plan is integration-specific. Its implementation entails the provision of specific information of the likely changes in the work environment showing how such changes would influence workers in the merger organisations. This strategy helps in avoiding situations in which employees would be caught unaware by the changes.

Works Cited Galpin, Tim, and Mark Herndon. The Complete Guide to Mergers and Acquisitions: Process Tools to Support M

[supanova_question]

The NSW Government Strategy on Education: Identification of Gifted and Talented Students Analytical Essay essay help online

Introduction Gifted and talented students have skills that set them apart from the other average students.

Gifted students have superior intellect and academic performance above average while talented students perform above average in more than one area of human performance particularly in physical, creative, intellectual, and social areas.

However, these students fail to achieve their full potential because of lack of an appropriate policy, curriculum challenges and lack of appropriate identification procedures.

Prior to the NSW policy, the education of the gifted and talented students had low priority and the existing curriculum could not meet the needs of these students. In this respect, the Australian Government undertook considerable changes towards promoting the education of gifted and talented students.

In order to attain high quality educational outcomes for the gifted and talented students, “the NSW government committed itself to developing an appropriate curriculum that could cater for the needs of these students within educational settings” (Braggett, 1985, p.28).

The gifted and talented students are diverse and come from different cultural and socioeconomic groups making the identification of such students quite a challenge. These students are easily identifiable in school settings where their natural abilities are evident.

The identification procedures should be inclusive involving the input of all the people who interact with these students including their teachers, fellow students, professionals and parents (Gagnés, 2003, p.12). The identification procedures primarily involve the use of nomination, screening, and monitoring of the students.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Off-level testing is also another way of identifying the individual student’s ability in school settings. Effective identification of the gifted students involves a multifaceted approach, which includes both objective and subjective procedures.

Qualities of Gifted and Talented Students Gifted and talented students have distinguishing intellectual and personal characteristics that set them apart from the rest of the other students.

According to Babad and Budoff (1994), these students have exceptional reasoning capability, which is associated with intellectual curiosity of their surroundings and a passion for learning new things (p.53). Intellectually, they have higher learning concentration and analytical skills.

They also possess a high level of creativity characterized by divergent thinking and endeavor to challenge the existing concepts coupled with a higher rate of learning new ideas and concepts in addition to keen sense of abstraction and imagination.

In addition, they also exhibit moral concern in their actions and have a deep sense of justice. Even though not solely, the gifted and talented students portray such rational traits largely as compared to ‘normal’ or average students.

In addition to the intellectual qualities, the gifted and talented students also exhibit peculiar personality traits that do not exist in other students. They possess a greater tendency towards introversion as opposed to extroverted personalities.

They are also insightful relying on their own exceptional reasoning capability to analyze situations (Babad,

[supanova_question]

Karam Pizza Case Study essay help: essay help

Strengths Strong reputation

The reputation of the business as the only restaurant that offers unique and best quality is amongst the strengths of Karam Pizza business. The reputation ensures increased clientele as well as helps in building the business brand loyalty. The strong reputation the business has built in the last three years will help it retain its customers. It will also aid the business gain the needed competitive edge.

Outsized client base accruing from the operational environs

The large pull of customers is a strength to the business. The customer base consists of the delivery businesses alongside the increasing number of the office workers. These large pools of customers will result into the increment in pizzeria sales revenues. This will eventually be used for its global expansion and growth.

Quality foodstuff and remarkable menu choices

Along with the provision of unique menu, the pizzerias are also committed to providing quality products to its customers. Given the fact that the competitors are capable of copying and introducing the pizzeria exceptional menu, the only way to set apart its food is through quality. This will make certain the customers sustainability.

From the time when it was instituted, Karam Pizza has seen an incredible growth because of the extraordinary menu choices its clients have. Karam Pizza brings together an assortment of Italian and Indian cuisines. This amazing menu is amongst Karam Pizza’s biggest strength that augments its competitive advantage.

Weaknesses Centered on producing particular food products

Karam Pizza has various weaknesses. One of the weaknesses of the restaurant is that Karam Pizza is facing lack of diversification. The restaurant specializes just in one of its pooled cuisines. Different form its market competitors that have diversified offers, the restaurant only offers one best combination.

This would lead the restaurant into losing its competitive edge across the global markets. This is because some independent competitors are adding favorite food items into their menus. Thus, they lure more customers in their restaurants compared to Karam Pizza.

Inadequate financial resources

Karam Pizza appears to lack funds and this is perceived as a hindrance to its rapid global expansion. Karam Pizza is just a mere one-shop restaurant but faces strong antagonism from other entrenched restaurants. As a result, Karam Pizza has not generated enough pool of capital to expand on its business and market operations. Moreover, the restaurant is not large enough to benefit from the economies of scale. Lack of enough capital or financial resources has a negative effect on its capacity to deliver services to its global clientele.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Inability to service the arriving clientele

The pizzeria limited, Karam Pizza’s capacity to service a large pool of walk-in customers contributes negatively to its sales revenues. As the restaurant reputation grew, its capacity to serve customers especially during dinnertime was very limited. The limitations were seen in terms of the quantity of food as well as efficiency in delivering services. Order delays together with low food productions have made the restaurant lose some of its loyal customers who made it succeed.

Opportunities The prospective to enlarge the business

Karam Pizza has numerous promising opportunities for it to expand its business operations particularly into new areas. Moreover, the business can expand its services on the business-to-business (B-2-B) basis. Other areas where the business can expand its restaurant services are the business functions including sales meetings and birthday lunches.

Improved demand for take-away

The Karam Pizza restaurant should take advantage of the increasing demand for take-away. The increasing number of take-away customers that throng the restaurant during evening hours offers an incentive for the growth of the restaurant. The restaurant should increase its capacity to meet the rising demand that will eventually provide revenues for expansion.

Innovative menus that are exclusive of direct rivals

The restaurant has an opportunity to offer new menus that are not presented by other market competitors. Offering an original menu that is different from those in the market can provide the Karam Pizza restaurant with an increased competitive edge. The opportunity to offer a new-fangled menu with no direct competitors will increase the demand for its food items thereby increasing the consumer base.

Tremendous development reported in the pizza market division

From the case, it is apparent that there is growth potential in the restaurant business, as additional cuisines are needed. Moreover, the growing number of the working class in the community where the restaurant operates provides a new opportunity for business growth. Besides the growing number in the walk-in customers, there is simultaneous growth in the number of business within the area. This also presents a growth opportunity for Karam Pizza.

Threats Market rivals are prone to implementing identical menu

The pizzeria offers a combination of foodstuffs that can easily be imitated by other restaurants. Currently, the Independent Restaurant is already offering some of its combinations luring some of its customers to their businesses. This results into the reduced number of its customers and sales revenue. Besides, the pizzerias are facing the threat of increments in prices of inputs as well as the cost of doing business.

Rivalry budding from entrenched restaurants

From the case study, the biggest threat facing the restaurant is competition from large and well- time-honored food restaurants. These restaurants already have networks around the town where Karam Pizza is operating. Moreover, self-governing contenders that offer some of its combinations also pose serious threats to Karam Pizza business.

We will write a custom Case Study on Karam Pizza specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Enlarge the efficiency and capacity of the pizzeria

From the case, Karam Pizza has the alternative of increasing its capacity to meet the needs of all its customers. In essence, the restaurant should thrive to ensure that both the walk-in and business customers are serviced as required. The advantage is that Karam Pizza will continue to expand its sales while building its reputation and global brand image.

Another advantage is that the business will not continue to lose its customers, but instead amplify its client base. However, increasing the capacity can be costly to Karam Pizza business. The other disadvantage is that the pizzeria will be forced to charge different prices. For instance, lower prices will be charged to the individual walk-in customers while higher prices will be charged to business deliveries.

Enlarge operations into the business-to-business ventures

Though the business-to-business deals might not be potential now, it offers the best opportunity for future growth. As the number of business increases, the business-to-business deliveries are viable for future growth. The advantage of business-to-business deliveries is that they are highly priced thereby increasing the revenue generated by business enterprises.

Another advantage is that such deliveries are undemanding since they only require a few staffs to accomplish. The disadvantage with these kinds of businesses is that they are prone to competition. Furthermore, they may take long before making any payments.

Curtailing the charged prices

Given the increased rivalry from independent pizzerias offering comparable combination of cuisines, Karam Pizza can opt for price reductions. However, to attain the reduced prices objective, the business must offer large quantity of food while increasing its operational efficiency.

Mass production will cover the costs incurred while ensuring that the business enjoys economies of scale. However, in situations where the customer base reduces, price reduction might not be feasible. Finally, the competitors may equally curtail their prices and this might negatively affect Karam Pizza business plans.

[supanova_question]

Reflection on Neo-Confucian Discourse Essay essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Evolution of Neo-Confucianism

Behaviors and Appropriate Relationships

Conclusion

Bibliography

Introduction Imperial western powers led to the unprecedented alteration of traditions of the Confucianism religion that existed in Asia. Consequently, no other tradition of the Asian continent was profoundly affected as the Confucian notion. Adler’s work on Varieties of Spiritual Experience: Shen in Neo-Confucian Discourse points out how the notion suffered “the potential risk of built-in biases caused by projecting foreign concepts onto the subject matter” (2004, p.1).

The idea was to make Chinese traditions reoriented with concepts of globalization, westernization, and modernization as the main paradigms for fueling the spreading of imperialism that was championed by western nations. The merger between the western religious teachings and Confucianism introduced a paradox that was resolved by scholars through the articulation of the two religious beliefs, core values, and goals.

The results were the enrichment of the Confucian tradition to assume a new paradigm of neo-Confucian. Consequently, Confucianism is no longer taken as an ancient philosophic, political, or religious tradition but a concept that is open to the future and modern world. The idea of neo-Confucianism is to promote healthy interactions between the culture of China and other cultures interplaying in the modern world.

Evolution of Neo-Confucianism Ren is among the qualities that link with Confucianism that explains the role of selflessness coupled with humanness for various people in the society. From the Confucianism view, humanness is well explained through the ethics of reciprocity. The concept of humanism is an incredible tool to understand how concepts of neo-Confucianism relate with the development of political pedology that is inspired by the Confucianism culture.

Indeed, Confucianism humanism is built on the pillars of humanness, integrity, propriety, and knowledge. Confirming the argument, Adler (2004) says, “the fundamental Confucian belief that human values are rooted in the natural world, and that it describes a form of religious life best characterized as a system of ultimate transformation and ultimate orientation” (p.2).

These pillars help in the construction of society that is both just and fair to all and hence the reason why neo-Confucianism proponents disregard the treatment of Confucianism philosophical paradigm as irrelevant in the modern globalized world. Neo-Confucian innovations and syntheses in the development of ‘mysterious learning’ are fostered by the spirit as an aspect of mind, which enables Sage’s mind to penetrate to the most difficult and deep mysterious things.

This role aids in the detection of incipient changes and principles coupled with a total comprehension of moral order. However, this exposition does not mean that all people can become Sages. Nevertheless, according to Confucianism, cultivating spiritual clarity can transform people and those who surround them thus helping them to embrace proper behaviors and appropriate relationships.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Behaviors and Appropriate Relationships Nations where Chinese have settled are tremendously influenced by Confucianism culture. Such nations include Vietnam, China, Japan, Taiwan, and Korea among others. Recognizing these immense impacts, Clart and Pao (2003) question whether there is a popular Confucianism.

In the Neo-Confucianism culture, despite these nations being inspired by Confucianism, no single person identifies himself or herself as Confucius, but the concepts of Confucianism serve as complementary ethical aspects that help in guiding beliefs and ideologies such as Marxism, Islam, Buddhism, democracy, and capitalism among others.

Therefore, the central concern of Clart and Pao’s article about the Confucianism culture is to prescribe some fundamental guidelines for promoting good cultural behaviors during interactions as prescribed by key icons of the concepts of Confucianism. For instance, different people undertake some chores at different ages in the society.

Here, one sees the divisions of work within all members of the society. For instance, at the age of six, boys learn how to write while girls are given ordinary women’s task. While divisions of tasks are crucial, Confucianism culture faces critics for its failure to accord equal rights to all people particularly the accessibility of education for women and confinement of women to home-based chores.

For example, at the age of 10, girls need to fully get involved in household chores among them being weaving, cooking, and breeding silkworms since they are the best duties for women. This argument is a departure from the concepts already learnt in class, which are effective in encouraging an embodied and lived understanding of proper behaviors and appropriate relationships among people.

Conclusion Confucianism culture has manifested itself in a variety of forms in East Asia from responses to hierarchical issues, ritual practices, and gender roles. Li, translated as ritual, moral, or etiquette is used in the Chinese language to refer to various secular functions encountered in the daily life of people.

While using the concept of li to explain how people ought to interact, Clart and Pao (2003) argue that, although it is loosely translated to mean rituals, it does not mean that it refers to “arbitrary practices but the routines that people engage either knowingly or unknowingly in the due course of execution of their daily chores” (p. 12). The principle tied within Confucianism culture that facilitates the realization of such a society is the interplay between emotions and its impacts on composition of people’s character.

We will write a custom Essay on Reflection on Neo-Confucian Discourse specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, according to Clart and Pao’s article, cultivation of harmony within individuals makes them virtuous. Doing contrary to this principle destroys the character of people. In this sense, harmony is an essential virtue that is effective in encouraging an embodied and lived understanding of proper behaviors and appropriate relationships among people.

Bibliography Adler, Joseph. Varieties of Spiritual Experience: Shen in Neo-Confucian Discourse. New York: Cross Road, 2004.

Clart, Philip, and T’oung Pao. “Confucius and the Mediums: Is there a ‘Popular Confucianism’?” JISC 89, no.1 (2003): 1-38.

[supanova_question]

Community Mental Health Research Paper essay help online

Community mental health services are reserved for the people who are suffering from mental illnesses. Health care facilities such as specialized hospitals for people with mental disorders initially provided the services. The coming of reforms in this sector has led to the closure of many mental hospitals because of violation of patients’ rights.

Most mentally ill persons were neglected in mental hospitals (Atkinson, 2006). It is perceived that the ignorance in mental hospitals was caused by the sudden increase of patients. Besides that, Richards and Campania (2010) explain that the mental hospitals were not serving their intended purpose of meeting the needs of the mentally ill, but one expected that for every mental hospital that is closed a community-based center replaces it.

This would bring the services closer to the people who need them the most. The establishment of mental hospitals may have been a noble idea, but there are many people who continue to suffer in silence because they cannot afford the required money to send their loved ones to such institutions.

Similarly, the quality of service delivered in mental hospitals was very poor probably due to congestion. According to Golightley (2004), prior to the implementation of the changes many mentally retarded person could not get access to medical services because the insurance companies had barred them from taking medical cover. This means that unless friends and relatives help such persons, their health will continue to deteriorate.

It is in this regard that insurance companies are being encouraged to streamline their requirements to make insurance cover affordable to many people. This is because currently it is mostly the employed who are able to buy insurance products. This implies that governments have to combine efforts to assist the people who are in extreme poverty by paying for their mental health services (Power, 2010).

Weare (2000) contends that the reforms in mental health services require the government to hire more medical personnel. This is because lack of enough personnel has been sighted as one of the core reasons for the decline in the quality of mental health services. This suggests that governments have to borrow more money because as new experts are being hired there is also technology and infrastructure, and all of these are to be carried out by governments.

That is why non-governmental and private entities are required to help in improving the delivery of mental health services. Among the approaches employed in improving service delivery in this sector is the incorporation of mental health centers with existing general health care centers and establishing new ones at the community level. When services are brought closer to the people, there is no excuse of not accessing them (Atkinson, 2011).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The major hurdle in implementing changes in mental health services has been lack of money to facilitate the construction of new facilities and recruitment of more personnel. It is expected that once these measures are put in place the quality of mental health services will go up because there will be many service providers, and thus there will be stiff competition (Golightley, 2004).

This means that mental health service providers will have to improve their work and reduce their service charge rates. Presently, people are simply taking what is available because they do not have alternatives (Segal

[supanova_question]

Terrorism Handling in Our Life Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Defeating Terrorism

Strategies for Defeating Terrorism

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Terrorism is one of the most serious criminal activities and it has greatly jeopardized world peace and safety. Defining terrorism is not very easy and its meaning has been subjected to a lot of debate by many scholars. “Terrorism can be defined as a tactic used by a small set of extremists to fight against an overwhelmingly powerful opponent while surrounded by a large population that mostly just wants peace”.

The use of military is not the only way of dealing with terrorism. It is possible to defeat terrorism through these strategies. “First, it is important to understand how terrorists are kept away in the best case, then how terrorists can fight against this mechanism”. Finally, in order to foil those aims, it is imperative to determine the strategies that can work, and those that cannot.

Defeating Terrorism Terrorism can be defeated if many people in the society can trust the authorities in their work. If people have faith in the authorities, they will inform them about terrorist activities. The Unabomber who killed many people through mail bombs was finally forwarded to the F.B.I. In this case, it was his brother who identified his writings and informed the authorities about his actions.

He took that step because he believed in the authorities. “Terrorist acts can never be totally eliminated, but a cohesive community that trusts its authorities can defeat a continuing terrorist movement”. A more complicated situation in dealing with terrorism arises when a society has not been civilized, and they also do not trust their authorities.

In this regard, terrorists find support from sympathizers, who might not want to be part of the terrorists, but are against the authorities. One of the best tactics employed by terrorists is creating misunderstandings between people and the authorities. Terrorists become stronger when they erode that trust. They do this to weaken the thin blue line. “The ordinary people, or at least some of them, support those they see as fighting for freedom, religious faith, or patriotism against overwhelming odds”.

Strategies for Defeating Terrorism The important question is how to defeat terrorists after understanding their tactics? When people begin to isolate them as criminals, by reporting them to police authorities, then they have defeated them. What weapons can be effective in fighting them? It would be naïve to think that terrorists can only be eliminated by killing all of them. Such a naïve strategy cannot work in the real world.

In an attempt to find and kill terrorists, many innocent people will either be injured or killed. This can make some of their friends, and siblings to contemplate joining terrorists as away of retaliating. Moreover, this will produce more terrorists than those destroyed. Therefore, if military confrontation is used most of the time, it will lead to genocide, and it will also recruit more terrorists.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More “The ‘weapon’ that is need is the trust and cooperation of the general population of the country where the terrorists are based”. Secondly, the authorities dealing with terrorists should avoid using overwhelming power even if they have it. They should try to demonstrate justice, and avoid using massive retaliation.

A good example is the case of U.S troops in Iraq. Terrorists strike them in order to provoke retaliation from them. When they retaliate, they end up damaging people’s properties, and they also cause unnecessary deaths. This weakens the trust Iraqi citizens have in U.S troops.

Conclusion Terrorists should be handled carefully, but not through the ordinary military tactics. If soldiers have to be used in this process, they should be trained differently so that they can handle terrorists properly. The use of military force requires rethinking because it has largely been abused by the authorities. “The “simple” strategy above for defeating terrorism requires great knowledge, cleverness, and wisdom to put into action”.

Works Cited Netanyahu, Benjamin. Fighting Terrorism: How Democracies Can Defeat Domestic and International Terrorists. London: Wiley, 2001.

Sageman, Mark. Understanding Terror Networks. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004.

Scheuer, Michael. Imperial Hubris: Why the West is Losing the War on Terror. New York: Potomac Books Inc, 2004.

[supanova_question]

Socio-Economic and Educational Characteristics of Appalachia-KY Essay college essay help online

Introduction The term Appalachia refers to distinctive-cultural counties, which are located, in the eastern part of the United States of America. The Appalachian regions include various states such as; Kentucky, Ohio, Tennessee, Georgia, Alabama, Mississippi, Virginia, among others.

The inhabitants of the Appalachian regions were seen as illiterates, who accounted to high levels of poverty despite the regions vast natural resources.

Socio-economic characteristics, which influenced the, population density in the Appalachian regions included; unemployment rates, urban and rural population, families below poverty level, racial and ethnic minority population, household income data, and number of children per family.

Educational characteristics included school enrollment, high school dropouts, numbers of private and public schools, public school expenditures, high school graduates, numbers of secondary and post-secondary schools, minority student population, numbers of school personnel and adult illiteracy rates (Langman, 1971).

Socio-economic characteristics of Appalachia in Kentucky Kentucky State used to be a very poor region, with a vast number of its localities living below the poverty levels mark. Despite the rich agricultural land, the inhabitants were very illiterate and therefore, could not convert the available natural resources to their own advantage (Langman, 1971).

Therefore, the communities lived in abject poverty levels. The introduction of coal mining and large scale mining activities aided the natives to earn a basic salary. These activities supplemented their livelihood, but due to poor management methods, the activities did not help them much.

Much later, the federal government sought alternative ways of eliminating the existing poverty levels in the Appalachian regions (Billings and Blee, 2000). The government introduced new and better farming methods, and ensured cheap electricity was facilitated through the construction of numerous dams.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore, the enactment of the Appalachian regional commission (ARC) which had a mission to eliminate poverty levels provided educational opportunities and improved health care services to the natives (Billings and Blee, 2000).

Social Characteristics Religion

The need for independence led to the dire need to establish religious movements in the Appalachia. These religious movements originated from England and have been undergoing various changes with the changing times (Williams, 2000).

Among the common current religious practices are; congregational applauding, preaching and baptism, which are practiced with different religious forces such as catholic and protestant (Leonard, 1999).

Ethnicity

The Appalachia settlers were mostly from the Anglo- Scottish border regions such as Lancashire, Westmoreland, Yorkshire, Berwickshire, and Cumberland, among many others. Europeans and Italians were attracted to Appalachia due to booming manufacturing and coal mining activities (Billings and Blee, 2000).

Americans are the native inhabitants of the Appalachia regions while the Melungeons are all over eastern Kentucky. The ARC regions are mainly inhabited by African-American communities who live in the urban areas while the Germans settled in the southern mountains.

Dialect

The Appalachia dialect is strongly influenced by the Scottish dialects although it boasts of a rich and unique American origin (Keefe, 2009). The Appalachian dialect is grouped into the northern midland dialect, Pittsburgh English and the southern Midland dialect.

Folklore

They comprise a mixture of European, Native American and bible influence. The natives taught the European how to plant corn and squash, and knowledge of medicinal herbs and roots.

We will write a custom Essay on Socio-Economic and Educational Characteristics of Appalachia-KY specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They used the biblical signs to know the time to plant such as the phase of the moon (Keefe, 2009). Their fork tales comprised of the Irish fairy tales, Scottish and English. They also told tales of the wild animals, short stories and murder stories.

Music

It is the most known of the Appalachia culture. Traditional music is both a composition of English and Scottish ballet tradition with some aspects of Irish and Scottish fiddle music ((Keefe, 2009). English and ballet songs were passed down from generation to generation.

In the 1920’s, commercial recording of Appalachia music had a great impact on the growth of country music. Appalachia music is preserved by holding a dozen of music festival in the region every year.

The financial stability in the Appalachia was greatly enhanced by various activities which included manufacturing, logging, mining and agriculture.

With the changes in technological advancements, international and domestic tourism practices led to an increase in the economical level in the Appalachia territories.

Economic Characteristics Timber harvesting/logging

Vast areas of Land in the Appalachia region is covered by numerous forests that provided enough jobs in the timber milling sector to feed the families (Henry, 1986). However, local people did not benefit much from it as most profits went to outsiders and the locals only got the wages.

As Myles Horton, a local Appalachian resident describes it “Appalachia is rich in resources but poor in people. All riches go to out and we must find a way to take it back some of the riches that belong to the people” (Henry, 1986).

Coal mining

Coal mining provides a source of employment to the Appalachian people. Mining is being replaced by oil use which in turn has caused the region economic hardships (Weise, 2001).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Socio-Economic and Educational Characteristics of Appalachia-KY by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The key indicator of mining depletion is low employment rate which is a third of what the coal mines of the initial work force; no new investment is being channeled to the mines and production being moved to the western American seams (Weise, 2001).

Tobacco farming

Tobacco farming is one of industries that have boosted the Appalachian economy. Tobacco is one of the major crops grown in the region. It is grown by small scale farmers in the southern and central Appalachia regions (Yarnell, 1999).

In the 20th century the government introduced the allotment system which allowed the farmers to grow a small amount of tobacco for better prices. This system has helped farmers to generate stable and regular income which is supplemented by other farming activities (Yarnell, 1999).

Tourism

According to Starnes (2005), tourism is also the oldest economic activity in this region, and it dates back to 18th century. It brings close to 30 billion USD and offers over 600,000 jobs. The mountainous terrains are the major tourist attraction sites (Wilson, 2009).

It also has the world known hiking trails like the great smoky mountain park, which is the most visited the park in the region. Other tourist attraction sites include: the Biltmore estate and the Eastern Band of the Cherokee, which are in the Northern Carolina.

Many tourists also visited the mountain springs which was believed to have medicinal value in the 18th century (Wilson, 2009).

The ranges provided cool escapes for the elites from the lowland sides and which beautiful hotels were built. Today the states are focusing on how they can promote tourism in the region and at the same time conserving the local communities (Wilson, 2009).

Education

Education has lagged behind due to struggle with funding from the government and people failing to recognize its importance. In early years, education curriculum was based on Christian morality and learning how to read the bible (Polakow, 2004).

Learning was done in small rooms and children came to school when they were not needed in the farms. After the war, education became compulsory and the state helped in the building of the new schools. In that time, many higher learning institutions were established.

During the 19th and 20th era, amenity organizations formed settlement schools mostly in the rural areas (Polakow, 2004). The settlement schools contributed to promotion of culture legacy of Appalachian.

From 2001, many public schools have been losing funding as they try to make sure that every child gets an education (Keefe, 2009).

Conclusion Appalachia has strongly undergone modern changes, which have made the states to become developed. However, compared with other non-Appalachian’s states show they still lag behind, as most non-Appalachian states are far more technologically advanced.

Reference List Billings, D. B., and Blee, K. M. (2000) The Road to Poverty: The Making Of Wealth And Hardship In Appalachia, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

Henry, D. (1986) Appalachia on Our Mind: The Southern Mountains and Mountaineers in the American Consciousness, 1870-1920, Massachusetts: Shapiro Publisher

Keefe, S. E. (2009) Participatory Development in Appalachia: Cultural Identity, Community, and Sustainability, Tennessee: Univ. of Tennessee Press

Kiffmeyer, T. (2008) Reformers to Radicals: The Appalachian Volunteers and the War on Poverty, Kentucky: University Press of Kentucky

Langman, R. C. (1971) Appalachian Kentucky: An Exploited Region Selected Studies in the United States, New York: McGraw-Hill Ryerson

Leonard, B.J. (1999) Christianity in Appalachia: Profiles in Regional Pluralism, Tennessee: Univ. of Tennessee Press

Polakow, V. (2004) Shut Out: Low Income Mothers and Higher Education in Post- Welfare America, New York: SUNY Press

Starnes, R.D. (2005) Creating the Land of the Sky: Tourism and Society in Western North Carolina: The Modern South, Alabama: University of Alabama Press

Weise, R. S. (2001) Grasping At Independence: Debt, Male Authority, and Mineral Rights in Appalachian Kentucky, 1850-1915, Tennessee: Univ. of Tennessee Press

Williams, J.A.(2002) Appalachia: A History, North Carolina: UNC Press Books

Wilson, G. S. (2009) Communities Left Behind: The Area Redevelopment Administration, 1945-1965, Tennessee: Univ. of Tennessee Press

Yarnell, S. 1999. Southern Appalachians: History of the Landscape, Pennsylvania: DIANE Publishing

[supanova_question]

Social and Political Philosophy Critical Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Plato’s critics on Athenian way of life With the conviction of Socrates, Plato, one of the great Socrates’ supporters, sees Athenians as prejudiced people who convict the innocent freeing the guilty. He observes “…his conviction resulted from his unwillingness to address the Athenians the way they would have liked him to do” (Plato 245).

Plato criticizes the way of arriving at judgment upon hearing the evidence set forth by the accusers who, though many hardly say anything true.

In support of his argument that paints the Athenian jury of 501 persons, as prejudiced, Plato prophesies, “the history will come to see his conviction as shameful for Athens” (Plato 386).

As reflected in arguments by many historians, Socrates’ death was voluntarily by mere fact that he did not intend to sacrifice his beliefs and political aspirations that he strongly subscribed to for the sake of acquaintance. Socrates’ arguments were solid and rigid.

Even in the light of death punishment, Socrates opted to die rather than honoring people with blurred and victimized capacity to reason. He could not have imagined sacrificing his moral principles that dictated his concerns in teaching about “the nature of virtue” (Plato 397).

It seems intriguing to arrive at a conclusion on how Athens jury arrived at a decision to execute an old man on impiety accounts initiated by a poet linking his teachings as catalysts of corrupting the youth.

Plato also worries about the capacity of the Athenians to change charges from one nature to the other, as it was difficult to determine whether Socrates’ charges were purely impiety, political in nature or a combination of both.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Plato’s concerns on Athens’ way of life stand out in the republic. Plato postulates an argument seeking to determine whether just people are happier than unjust people are.

To arrive at the premises of his argument, attempts are made to define what justice is in the first place from a philosophical perspective and literal dimensions, both of which are subjected to introspection to determine loopholes in the weight of thought.

The proposition of a just and perfect republic model in his argument, in a big way, reflects modeling a society that would seem completely opposite to that of Athenians. He indicated that, “Pleasures which are approved of by the lover of wisdom and reason are the truest” (Plato 441).

A jury from such a society should have treated Socrates case justly and without prejudices. In ‘The Republic’, he tries to compare a city ruled by independent thinkers-philosophers for instance Socrates, and dependent thinkers like the Athenians.

In addition, he also examines the roles of poets and philosophers in the society. Conflicting roles, as observed from ‘The Republic’, endow poets and philosophers with different approaches in reasoning and therefore the two never concur in arguments.

Plainly, these stand out as major reflections of concerns encountered in his former teacher’s case before the Athens’ jury.

The Laws’ Argument in Crito The arguments of the laws in the Crito are persuasive. Laws form the basic guiding principles of any city. Since the people make the laws, they stand out as subject to the laws. The question therefore comes concerning who is greater between the laws and the people who make them.

We will write a custom Essay on Social and Political Philosophy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Oscillating around the anticipated consequence of disobeying the laws of the land, results to doing what is right, as expected of a law-abiding person. For example, the scenario of Socrates features Crito comforting him with ideas of how to escape from prison.

Socrates reasons that doing as it subverts the force of law does not pass for the best thing to do as law-abiding citizens of Athens. Supposing Socrates had the ability to escape from the prison and exile in what he referred to as “well governed cities”.

What makes the cities well governed? If it were the laws of the cities, then what would be the perception of the dwellers of the cities towards Socrates?

As a coward of the action of the law, he could have avoided it in the first place by acting in a manner that pleased his accusers not by violating his rationale of being guided by reason: not force of masses.

Escaping from the prison amounts to disobedience of the laws: made by people. How then would he possibly articulate with people by the fact that he disobeyed the very laws that binds the people together? Certainly, this appears like retuning injustice with injustice: what Socrates refrains from as a just and reasonable person.

In ‘The Republic’, people regard democracy as “the most beautiful constitution (politea)” (Plato 327). However, Socrates criticizes the actions of a ‘democratic man’. Laws measure up to the will of the people.

In this context, as opposed to Crito, what worries Socrates is the distinction between the city and the laws since laws remain confined within particular cities. Democratic actions by a democratic person are tantamount to obeying the laws of the land/city.

The relationship between the two accounts of Socrates is that, democracy translates to a person acting in accordance to the expectation of thoughtful members of the society. In one way or another, laws serve similar objectives.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Social and Political Philosophy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Can unjust man be truly happy? In ‘The Republic’, there appears a tale of a man who supposedly possessed a ring, which conferred to him invisibility powers.

The argument emanating from the story is that, a man who lives a life purely worth to pass him for a just person would fall into unjust traps and individualistic acts and yet evade punishment if at all he possesses such a ring.

Plato subdivides soul into its constituent parts: desires or appetites, reason and indignation, further referred to as spirit. Whether a just man is happy or not, is a function of the manner in which he orders the three constituents of soul.

He notes, “…a just man is happy because his soul is well ordered, with reason ruling all, indignation supporting the rule of reason, and holding the desires in check” (Plato 191). A happy man is analogous to a society, which has gorgeous rules of law in force.

Military functions to support it while because of its support to the rule of law, the public enjoys the final product: peace and happiness. Supposing desires come first? Civil wars mushroom.

If any of the constituents of the soul takes the place of reason and becomes the propeller, the more the internal fights within a man takes place. Consequently, the man becomes unjust. The more the man conducts himself in unjust manner, the unhappier he becomes.

The worst of the predicament is the situation of tyranny. Many would consider tyrant the happiest person of all. He/she has a power sufficient to surpass all other people and share amounts, in almost everything, beyond his fair share.

Unfortunately, according to Plato, the person passes for the, “most miserable man. Far from being a ruler without equal, he is actually more a slave and a prisoner than anyone…” (Plato 194).

His desires imprison or enslave him. Outer physique of a person does not matter based on the deceptive nature of people’s perceptions. The tyrant never experiences happiness: he remains the only one who knows that.

The just man is not even recognized leave alone people getting an opportunity of scrutinizing his justness. However, while in that unknown myriad vast land, he remains happy.

Justice, Metaphysics and Epistemology In ‘The Republic’, Crito Plato explores what justice means as portrayed in all of the rest of his earlier work. The aim of doing this is to demonstrate philosophically that, “the best part of a human being life is the one devoted to virtue and knowledge, for such a life will result in happiness” (Crito, and Plato 290).

Virtuous people have all their constituents of soul working in harmony and in an ordered manner as priory discussed. Towards the end of book IV, Plato depicts justice as psychic harmony, a state only realizable based on the existence of knowledge subject to metaphysical reality.

For administration of justice, the administrator must accept that justice itself exists. Such a person is perceived to have knowledge. On the other hand, a ruler who denies existence of justice but admits the existence of its forms does not have knowledge. Rather, such rulers have only beliefs.

Knowledge rests on platforms of what is true while on the other hand the objects of belief can be set out on what seems true or false. From a metaphysical approach, “one can have only beliefs about the particulars and particulars only beliefs, and only knowledge of forms and of forms one can only have knowledge” (Plato 306).

Such an argument suggests that the knowledge of justice differs from any justifiable belief. Plato argues, “Since one can only have knowledge of forms, one cannot have any false belief about forms” (308). Therefore, justice prevails in situations of adequate knowledge of the existence of various forms of justice.

The subjects to whom justice is ought to be administered to, will consequently get satisfied with the applicability of the various forms of justice.

Beliefs to the objects over which justice rests intermediates what completely justice is on one extreme with the other extreme showing what it is not. Accepting existence of justice forms the starting point of seeking and executing it.

Plato’s Concerns about Deterioration of Good Government in Book VIII Socrates addresses the concept of disintegration of good governments by starting with an ideal state: Aristocratic state. The ideal state disintegrates into the first form characterized by corruption: timocracy. Such states function as the least unjust. Undying ambitions characterizes the timocratic man.

The next form of government in the disintegration process entangles a form of government whose rulers are avaricious sons of timocrats. “They are wealthy property owners” (Plato 92). Later a class, midway between the poor and the rich comes into being.

Through alliances comprising of the members of that class and the poor, revolutions initiated targets to overthrow oligarchy. Unfortunately, democracy characterizes disorderly states represented by a man with “unbridled appetites tamed only by enfeebled moral sense” (Plato 120).

Insatiable internal urges and unquenchable thirsts for freedom slowly convert democracy into its newborn form: tyranny. Ruthlessness acquired from the descendants of the tyranny man, makes him strain to establish his niche to survive. The man encounters a dilemma demanding a choice between ‘being killed’ and ‘killing’.

Individualism, emanating from his character, forces him to make the killing choice, an act he does till his opposition erasure takes place. The repercussions follow ranging from an enslaved state through escalated death threats and/or expulsion.

The ultimate effect of disintegration of good governments, according to book VIII, is excessive freedom, which Socrates associates with the worst kind of slavery.

From book VIII, lessons for the US modern day politics are incredible. The US inhibits politics of democracy. No political campaign fades away without a mention of the word ‘democracy’. Drawing from the repercussions of excessive freedom, the US needs to evaluate the direction headed by her politics.

The issue on whether democracy heads the politics of the US towards integration, a guiding based on reason, or toward emergence of a leadership dominated by individuals with undying appetites and avarice, as Socrates predicts in the disintegration process of good governments, needs a second thought.

Works Cited Crito, and Plato. Republic. Oxford: Oxford paper backs, 1981.

Plato. A Defense of Socrates. Oxford: Oxford paper backs, 2008.

[supanova_question]

Project Management: Sydney Water Company Analytical Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction The essay is a case study analysis for project management of Sydney Water Company. The company decided to develop a project that would improve its customer services.

The first section entails the pre-contract planning, business and functional requirements. The second part highlights the tracking of the project against the business case. The third part is on project planning and key milestones. The final part is a table on PMBOK knowledge areas.

Pre-contract Planning, Business Requirements and Functional Requirements With regard to pre-contract planning. Sydney Water unveiled the importance of the Customer Information Billing System (CIBS) project to its operations. The project would make the customer services better, supplement the existing information systems and provide efficiency in business.

This is how important the CIBS project would have been to the organization. The company did not carry out sufficient planning and specifications regarding the project. This later on resulted to numerous requests for changes and eventually led to colossus extra costs and delays.

Prior to getting into the contract with Price Water Coopers, a competent project team should have been set up to do the work. This should have comprised of one member with intimate knowledge in the subject of the project.

However, the selected team lacked competencies in handling the work meaning there were no proper mechanisms put in place to select a capable team to do the work.

Although Sydney Water realized the significance of a business improvement process, it resorted to the utilization of a computer system during the project. The project was not implemented via a company information technology.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More After coming up with the project, they realized that the computer architecture of the CIBS project was incompatible. Consequently, a functional requirement was not met. It was a business requirement for the company to continue with a project requirement that was integrated. However, this did not materialize.

Although testing was a functional requirement, it really delayed and was not done adequately. Relevant documentation was not provided by Sydney Water which made it difficult to have a full access to the selection of a contractor.

Nonetheless, apparently, Sydney Water was able to select and evaluate the contractor in a thorough manner. The administration of the contract was inadequate resulting to single variation to the contract leading to a transfer or roles and risks to Sydney Water from Price Water Coopers.

Some business requirements were not available for the project. These include important contingencies, hard ware and soft ware that were not included in the initial budget. Besides, from the start of the project, there were unclear procedures on how the project was to be reported to the board of directors.

The information given was not clear enough to make the board of directors make a decision or assess the position of the project. Such insufficiency made the board not to be fully informed regarding important aspects and risks pertaining to the project.

Management of risks is a very important aspect in any business venture, and more so, in a business project. It is a critical business requirement prior to beginning any project. This is because every project or business is always susceptible to risks.

It was therefore a requirement for the project team to identify main risks to the project and come up with sufficient mechanisms of managing the risks.

We will write a custom Essay on Project Management: Sydney Water Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Nonetheless, it did not happen by both the company and the project team. The culture of this organization reveals that all project risks have to be transferred to the contractor when outsourcing of the organization’s key projects.

The Tracking of the project against the Business Case A business case is a document whose purpose is to provide the project’s baseline by elaborating the benefits of the business as a result of the project (Gregory, 2009, p. 138). Apparently, there was no support of the CIBS project from a strong business case.

The company did not provide a version of the business case that had been endorsed by the board of directors. Even though it was an obvious fact that costs were escalating and benefits were reducing in the course of the project duration, the board never asked for the preparation of a revised business case.

The board had the mandate of overseeing the project including making some directions for the business case to be revised. However, the board did not direct the GM-Finance to do a review on the business case of the project and to be responsive on the project’s fiscal matters.

The evidence of choosing CIBS project over other alternatives was not adequate. For instance, there was a discrepancy between the cost of upgrading the existing system in comparison to the budgeted cost of the CIBS project.

There are changes that were made on the contingency cost by both the DMR and the board. The business case was not revised accordingly to reflect these changes.

This was in spite of prompts from several parties alluding to the revision. For example, in 2001, after the DMR findings, the GM – customer services realized the necessity to make some revision on the business case.

The director of Sydney Water project made inquiries with respect to the duration required to complete the project and a budget that the board could accept. Within the same year (2002), the internal audit suggested a formal revision of the business case.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Project Management: Sydney Water Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This was a reflection of the project management’s belief that what really mattered was the successful implementation of the remedy and that costs were flexible.

For example, the recommendations to access the business case from the internal audit to the Sydney Water management were embraced and addressed after six months. This did not materialize and the management reported that it was more concerned with the positive results from the project.

An increase in costs seems to have been accompanied by a reduction in benefits during the time the project has been in progress.

At almost the close of the project, there were ninety people from the CSD performing several duties on CIBS. This required adoption of several strategies for maintaining business services. These would include outsourcing functions, hiring staff temporarily and beginning business improvements.

The extent at which staff reduced due to CIBS was less in comparison to the benefit outlined in the business case.

After a multiple revisions on the R3 benefits realization, still the stakeholders failed to approve it. There were some areas of benefit that varied from the initial business case. These include for instance, e-commerce, closure of some offices and ownership changes.

One of the views held by the Sydney Water people was that in the public sector, it was possible for projects of this nature and size to not only go over budget, but to also delay. This could be one of the reasons behind not updating the business case.

Project planning This is a task that should be done by the steering committee. Their role should be to assess the feasibility of the project, develop the project’s business plan and take responsibility regarding the project outcomes.

The steering committee also ensures that there is an alignment between the scope of the project and what the stakeholders require.

The scope of the project is supposed to be defined by the business plan of the project which should be owned by the steering committee.

In the project undertaken by the Sydney Waters, this was not adequately captured. This is due to the absence of the steering committee to devise a business plan which should outline the project scope.

Second, the CIBS project manager did not come up with a specific Project Execution Plan which should have outlined the responsibilities of the project team.

The project manager should plan for the project effectively by forming sub-projects to help in the delivery of the project. This took place since the CIBS project was sub-divided into three: release 1 release 2 and release 3.

Third, effective project planning requires the presence of a competent project team. The team should work according to what has been laid down in the Project Execution Plan. Representatives from different units affected by said the project should be part of the project team.

The team should also comprise of members with requisite skills. The project team for the CIBS project did not have all the required skills to handle the job meaning that there was no plan in place regarding the selection of the members of the team and their specific qualifications. These skills should be part of the process of project planning.

The Sydney Water project fell under the customer services division. However, this division did not have a clear channel of communication with the project team. Also, during the project planning in 2000, input was not sought from Sydney Water by PWC.

Moreover, due to the dissatisfaction by PWC’s general project plan, Sydney Waters insisted on improvements. This negatively affected the project success. Thus, there was inadequate project planning in this respect.

Key Milestones A milestone is a mark of progress that indicates when important points in a project have been attained. Milestones are embedded within the project’s time frame and show the important path towards the ultimate output. It is the end of a certain stage that shows a work package or phase has been completed.

It is often marked by a high profile review meeting, endorsing of some documents and a completion event. There are several aspects in the CIBS project that point to the way in which the management of the project milestones was conducted.

The CIBS project was mainly subdivided into three phases: release 1 (R1), release 2 (R2) and release 3 (R3). R1 and R2 were fully implemented even though R2 was not fully functional. R1 had been scheduled to be completed in August 2000 but it took longer than this.

The implementation date for R2 was also changed due to technical issues and phased roll out. Implementation of R3 was also delayed from March – September 2002. This was due to requests for change in closure of price negotiations. All these delays were due to inadequate project planning and specifications

Another key milestone in the CIBS project was the testing of the solution. It ended up taking a longer time than was anticipated. This made the project to take longer than was planned. Testing also produced numerous errors.

Correction of errors took longer than expected because changes were to be sent to the STS in the UK and the feedback was not immediate. The management ought to have known this in advance and use another system that would be in line with the project’s time frame.

PMBOK Knowledge Areas Process Group Section Evident Not Evident Comments Initiating Develop Project Charter

[supanova_question]

How has Internet Changed the Workplace and Organisations? Essay college essay help online

Since its inceptions in the early 1990, the worldwide web has dramatically changed the landscape of many organizations and the workplace. Although in many cases, the workplace and the organization culture do influence the use of information technologies in organizations, the influence is greater in the other way round.

The use of the worldwide web significantly influences many aspects of the work process in organizations. The use of the World Wide Web influences many aspects of the business like business strategy, organization culture, workplace structures; communication in the workplace and the management processes of organizations (Andrew, 2004.p35).

This paper outlines and reviews the impacts and the implications the World Wide Web has had on organizations and the workplace since its inception.

The World Wide Web made its debut in the early 1990s and triggered a wave of changes that affected many aspects of organizations and their workplace around the world. The internet has changed the way organizations operate in the modern world.

The internet technologies have changed the basis of organization structures from a basis on the use of manual labor to the use of knowledge management (Claire, 2004 p100). The use of the internet in the workplace has also changed the social systems of organizations.

The internet has also become a key factor to the competitiveness strategy of organizations (Barbara, 2003, p75).

The organizations that will not adapt to the rapid change in internet technologies cannot survive well in the modern or the future marketplace.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The dramatic effects of the internet on organizations and the workplace have captured the headlines of the media and organizations have been experimenting with the ways of exploiting the internet for the maximum advantage (Jason, 2005, p332).

The modern workplace has therefore become a netcentric environment in which the capabilities and the influences of the World Wide Web have permeated the working environment on a very big scale (David, 2003. P.270).

Net centricity has triggered many changes in the workplace. One of the major changes netcentricity has been making the desktop or the personal computer a gateway to the world for communication using email and the social networking websites.

With the internet, it is now possible for organizations to use the internet to share information or exchange ideas with other organizations at nay part of the world (Kate et al 2001, p 360).

The internet has changed work context in organizations, the nature of organizations in general and has became a catalyst for new strategies for organization structures (Jackson, 2007, p. 114).

The internet has brought new factors that affected the competitive landscape of organizations, has created new competitors and rivalries and in the process creating new pressures for organizations, that many organizations find it hard to address.

The internet has changed the way people think about running organizations and has led to a change in the roles that people play in the value chain process of the organization. The World Wide Web has also made the organization landscape very competitive and has made the workplace very fast moving (Laura, 2001 p50).

We will write a custom Essay on How has Internet Changed the Workplace and Organisations? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The World Wide Web has enabled twenty-four hour connectivity through technologies such as cell phones, wireless devices and the social networking media (Linda, 2004.p220).

All these factors have resulted in a re conceptualization of what constitutes a workday or worksheet. For example, twenty-four hour connectivity has led to development of work at home professions where people work at the comfort of their home anytime for twenty hours (IDG, 2003, P34).

The internet has also led to the growth of outsourcing business. Organizations now have the chance of outsourcing their work to third parties in any part of the earth significantly changing the nature of the workplace nowadays (Lynn, 2004, p115).

The netcentric nature of the today’s workplace has changed the concept of work balance because of the highly competitive nature of the netcentric workplace that makes each worker accessible any time at any place (Information Gatekeepers nd p1).

Employees of organizations can share data with colleagues from just anywhere on earth using the internet. The internet has introduced a concept where people are always connected and always on the mode for work are both a disadvantage and a drawback the internet has brought to the workplace (IRRA, 2002.P20).

The internet has also brought many changes to the organization management and leadership structures. The management of people in the netcentric age has both opportunities and drawbacks for organizations.

The managers of organizations nowadays must learn how to use their management skills not only in the face to face environments of the traditional workplace but also acquire managerial skills that makes them to manage their workers through interaction via networks (Muragan, 2006, p100).

The employees of today now include their managers more often in their conversations through internet technologies like the social networking websites.

Not sure if you can write a paper on How has Internet Changed the Workplace and Organisations? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The modern day leaders and managers of organizations must therefore learn how to use and take advantage of the World Wide Web to effect change and communication in the workplace (Pavel, 2005, p24).

The World Wide Web has also brought quick access to information in the workplace. This quick access has had enormous influence of the nature of information that an employee can access on their desktops.

Intranets, social networking websites and email and blogs provides employees with the huge information that provides the workers with huge information and update information on just anything they need for in their work (Mehdi, 2006.p234).

Organizations that take advantage of this wealth of information available to employees can make use of the knowledge to make the employees able to solve problems easily and increase their productivity in the workplace (Paul, 2001, p307)

The internet has also enabled distant education and electronic learning and this changed the way many organizations provide professional development training to their employees. Distance education programs have grown at alarming rates since the advent of the internet.

The advantages of these distance-learning programs in the workplace are very powerful because they cut travelling costs for employees and the time employees spend out of work. These distant learning programs offer flexible learning opportunities for the modern day employee (Peacock, 2008.p112).

The internet has also changed the way organizations hold their employee meetings for brainstorming or organizational briefings. In the traditional way, face-to-face briefings were the main way organizations carried out these meetings.

The advent of the internet has brought innovative technologies take advantage of the internet to allow holding of these meetings virtually via the internet. Examples of these technologies include video conferencing technologies (Paul, 2001, p309)

The internet has also changed the nature of employee privacy in the modern organizations.

With the internet it is easier for organizations to servile their employee by the employers the netcentric environment of the modern day worker has greatly increased the scope and the ease in which the employers can perform surveillance of their employees (Stein, 2007 p410).

Many digital documents remain accessible for years in the internet while software that track internet surfing are very common in the workplace nowadays. Today these issues raise may ethical and legal issues in the workplace because of the violations of the privacy of the employees in the workplace (Weckert, 2010, p40).

One of the negative aspects the introduction of the internet has had on organizations and the workplace is the effect it has had on employment and displacement in jobs. The rapid rise of the internet has generated a wave of many job displacements and changes in the remuneration packages for employees (Wallace, 2004 p8).

For example, in some organizations some employees trained in certain aspects of information technology are placed in privileged categories in the workplace because of shortage in the workforce. Some types of information technology staff continue to remain in vey high demand because of short supply of these workers.

Mostly these specialized workers are placed in special compensation plans by their organizations.

In areas where there is no shortage of employees, some jobs and whole business departments in organizations have became victims of disintermediation, restructuring and phasing out leading to job losses in some organizations (Winter

[supanova_question]

Sustainable Tourism and Market Economics Argumentative Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Values and ethics of sustainable tourism

Mass Tourism

Market Economics

Market failure

Tourism Impacts

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction As socio-environmental and economic consequences of tourism persist, there has been increasing need for the tourism industry to adopt sustainable approaches in its management of protected areas.

Sustainable tourism refers to putting in place measures that ensure that tourism activities have low impact on the region’s environment, economy as well as the local culture while generating economic benefits to the people (Mowforth and Munt 17).

It aims at providing positive experience to tourism firms, the local people as well as the tourists themselves. They also come to understand the local culture as well as the significance of conserving tourism resources.

Business management approaches have continued to dominate tourism institutionally as well as philosophically (Hall and Lew 199). The study therefore is built on market-driven approaches and strategies based on socio-environmental as well as economic strategies aimed at achieving financial sustainability.

Values and ethics of sustainable tourism Sustainable tourism advocates for inclusive and sustainable community commitment. Tourism development has to involve the community that is seeking to achieve positive benefits from tourism.

Sustainable tourism takes into account the Whole Place Development theory which advocates for development of sustainable communities.

According to Billington, Carter and Husain (5) Whole Place Development refers to the dynamic process of creating public as well as private spaces by utilizing the input of the stakeholders who are the community to develop a desirable place with good living environment where the community is able to sustain itself and prosper.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Whole development helps utilize community partnerships in harnessing strategies, finance, science as well as narratives and cultures in creating socially and economically attractive, vibrant and efficient tourist destinations.

Sustainable tourism also involves balancing economic, environmental as well as social goals of tourism. This should include imposing limits and restrictions on specific tourist activities. There should be limits which are formally accepted by key stakeholders.

In addition, the carrying capacity needs to be clearly defined. Stakeholders in tourism are also obligated to provide tourists with honest information about their destinations regarding travel, hospitality as well as stays.

It has to ensure partnerships as well as establishment of balanced cooperation between tourism providers and tourists in achieving sustainable tourism development plus equitable distribution of benefits.

It must aim at benefitting those who exploit tourism resources and those who neither exploit nor damage the environment in which they stay and earn a living from without direct involvement in tourism. The local communities should be able to share equitably the cultural, social as well as the economic benefits generated.

Tourism policies should be designed to help improve the standard of living of the local people. Socio-environmental concerns have to be effectively addressed as tourist operators and developers aim to attract tourists and increase revenues. Part of the revenue should be used to develop tourism resources.

Tourism infrastructure and activities have to be designed in a manner that helps protect and conserve the natural heritage. Finally, tourism has to promote mutual understanding as well as respect among societies and between people.

We will write a custom Essay on Sustainable Tourism and Market Economics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Mass Tourism Mass tourism refers to the act of visiting tourist destinations with a large number of people at the same time. It is therefore important to understand the impacts of a large number of visitors on a particular destination or over-exposure of a destination to a single group of tourists.

Tourism operators usually construct physical facilities based on the mental images of the physical appearance of tourist destinations and also tailor images according to what they think consumers need. In most cases, the desired image of the physical facilities influences the services and activities offered.

This could in turn consistently attract a specific group of tourists. Mass tourism is encouraged by technological developments especially in the transport sector and other tourism facilities.

According to Weaver (57) mass tourism is likely to minimize tourist interaction with the local people.

On the contrary sustainable tourism aims at achieving places where tourists and the local community are able to involve in socio-cultural exchange. Meaningful spaces help create positive interactions between the community and tourists.

Tourist operators should also define the limit of social, economic as well as ecological usage of resources to avoid adverse mass tourism impacts. The aspect of carrying capacity is very important and helps define mass tourism.

An increase in the level of mass tourism without adequate control measures put in place could damage the natural environment and the habitats for wildlife thereby interfering with the future capacity of the region to attract tourist.

For mass tourism in natural environments, the tourist operators have to provide a certain timeframe which is enough for recovery. Mitigation measures should be put in place to help avoid or recover from environmental damages attributed to mass tourism.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Sustainable Tourism and Market Economics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Market Economics Market economics refers to a situation where economic decisions as well as prices of goods and services are less controlled by the government but are instead left to be determined by the interactions of citizens and businesses (Dwyer, Forsyth and Dwyer 21).

Under market economy, it is assumed that market forces like supply and demand best determine the country’s well-being. The government therefore less engages in intervention measures like price fixing, industry subsidizations as well as license quotas.

In tourism, market access and economics ensures that the tourism management works hand in hand with the regional destination management units as well as key stakeholders in order to ensure that the industry maximizes global and domestic transport systems to the tourism resources (Bull 64).

They also have to consider accommodation and intermediaries as key components of tourism (Sinclair

[supanova_question]

History of British Empire Argumentative Essay custom essay help

Introduction The European empires had common characteristics that marked colonial relationships including the importance of trade and extraction of wealth by the colonizers.

The Great Britain or the British Empire conquered vast lands in Southeast Asia and the Pacific including India after which it turned to Africa beginning with Egypt, Southern Africa, and Eastern Africa. This great accomplishment meant the colonies were forced or encouraged to venture into tradable goods thus it resulted to trade for the colony and forced labor. This marked the beginning of colonization of and these countries were placed under British rule and were not allowed to choose their own political leadership.

Colonization brought many good things to the colonies including education and other forms of civilization. However, the resulting social injustices, discrimination, and forced labor with low pay led to formation of liberation movements thus revolution by the colonies thus the beginning of decolonization in the period after the Second World War (Smith 92).

The pressure of liberation movements and other factors led to the British Empire’s decolonization of its former colonies. Given that, the British Empire was one of the most successful in capturing colonies around the globe, various historical landmarks that were beyond the Empire’s ability to contain marked decolonization.

Nevertheless, the question remains; what caused decolonization and what were the effects of the same?

Well, as exposited in this paper, the Second World War, anti-colonial movements, the United States, the United Nations declaration, the Cold War and the USSR were the main forces behind the decolonization while the end of British Empire and formation of the common wealth coupled with the bearing British legacy are some of the outstanding results of the decolonization.

Decolonization Decolonization may mean different things depending on the perspective from which one looks at it from. On one hand, it is regarded as the obtaining of independence and self-governance where the colonies could determine the form of government that they wished to rule them.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More From the colonizers point of view, decolonization meant the giving away of political dominance of the colonies translating to loss of world power, which came after a series of historical events that discussed later (Shunhong 4).

Decolonization is the process by which a colony, in this case an oppressed country, is determined enough to demand self-governance or the right to determine the political system of their respective country.

The fact that there are many cultures in the world means that there are different ways to live thus the need for the people to determine how to live. Determining ‘how to live’ may range from how to take care of their well-being, manage their expenditure and how to express their human rights.

Though not globally accepted, decolonization is the source of today’s emphasis on democracy, good governance, and human rights activism (Hunt, Martin, Rosenwein, and Smith 8).

To some extent, the imperial retreat of the British Empire was not determined by their own will though they could manage to whom and how they would transfer power to their now enlightened colonies.

The British decolonization mainly took part after the Second World War ended in 1945 that took a general direction of confrontation between the local nationalists and the British imperialists.

It consisted of different forms and sometimes, peaceful negotiations were carried out between the colonizers and the colonies like the emancipation of the British India in 1947, while sometimes it was the result of bloody liberation wars and violent protests.

We will write a custom Essay on History of British Empire specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, in most cases, there were departures of the nationals and confiscation of their goods and weapons.

The British Empire’s Stages of Decolonization The Great Depression had a big impact on the industrialized world as much as it had on the rural colonies due to the fall in agricultural prices faster than those of industrial goods did from around 1925 to World War II. International trade flows were damaged because the colonial powers shifted focus to domestic issues.

While some colonies like British Malaya retreated to small-scale farming, others like India and Africa, diversified leading to industrialization and as a result, they could no longer fit into their colonies systems.

The colonizers owned and run plantations were more susceptible to deflation compared to the natives, which led to reduction in their dominance and finally their retreat back to indigenous elite.

Later in 1930s, colonial efforts made only hastened their end; most notably, they changed from collaborative systems to creation of genuine bureaucratic governments. Political nationalism sprouted all over colonies and the British Empire appeared less capable of dealing with it.

The Government Act of 1935 was the culmination of reforms in the British Raj and direct control was reduced in Egypt. The World War II was followed by post war chaos and it presented a loophole for colonies like India in mid 1940s.

India’s leader Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi led the masses in a peaceful resistance against the British Empire.

He became an icon of peace in comparison to the British imperialism leading to giving people a sense of nationalism. Indian citizens viewed their colonizers as the cause their violence and miseries leading to an independent India in 1947.

Not sure if you can write a paper on History of British Empire by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Malayan Emergency began in 1948 and lasted until 1960 and its main origin was anti Japanese movements who after the defeat of Japan in the Second World War turned to the British Empire in hope that independence would be granted.

The Malayan Muslim collaborated with the British to overcome the guerilla attacks largely made up of Malayan-Chinese. It was not until 1957 when through independence a consensus was finally reached to give independence under commonwealth.

Britain continued to dominate as a world power and established her presence in the Middle East despite losing India because of the base at Suez Canal. The Suez Crisis engineered by Britain and France in a bid to regain it from the powerful Egyptian government that had nationalized it only served to expose Britain’s hidden cracks.

It was in such agreements that followed the Suez crisis that Sudan was decolonized followed by the Gold Coast in West Africa.

The Wind of Change Speech by the British Prime Minister Macmillan marked the last stage of British decolonization.

The Prime Minister wanted to avoid a ‘colonial war’ like the one France was fighting in Algeria resulting to Britain decolonizing most of its African colonies. However, the British white settlers in Eastern and Southern Africa only served to complicate the withdrawal.

Causes of British Empire’s Decolonization The Second World War

Britain and its Empire did win the Second World War but it could not shy away from the devastating effects that the war had left both at home and in her colonies. Although Europe had previously dominated the world, it was now a limping continent because it was in ruins.

Britain was almost bankrupt because of the high cost of the war except for a negotiation of a $3.5 billion loan by the United States that helped to prevent insolvency. The loan was been repaid to the United States and the last of its installments was repaid in the year 2006.

Anti-colonial Movements

Anti-colonial movements increased in the European nation’s colonies in the period after the Second World War.

The British considered the African colonies as immature and only introduced democratic level at the local levels or in the villages, forgetting that they had educated a number of Africans in the Western education system in the 1930s.

The leaders mentioned include Kwame Nkrumah of Gold Coast, Senghor of Senegal, Jomo Kenyatta of Kenya, and Felix Houphouet-Boigny of Cote d’ivore. These people came back to their home countries only to begin a revolt and lead their respective countries in the struggle for independence.

The nationalistic movements arrived at different times in different territories of the empire and this explains why independence was obtained at different times. Generally, India and Malay got independence almost immediately after the Second World War while most colonies in Africa had to wait until the 1960s.

The movements used different approaches in their struggle for self-determination and independence. Some used violent protests and guerilla wars while others like Gandhi in India used non-violent protests.

The Role of the United States

The then President of the United States, Franklin D. Roosevelt, met with British Prime Minister Winston Churchill on 12 February 1941 in a discussion on the world matters after the war, which resulted to the Atlantic Charter.

Roosevelt was keen to introduce a provision in the charter, which stated that the imperial colonies would become autonomous implying self-governance.

The United States had the power to do impose such a clause for she was emerging as the new world power considering she had given Britain a loan to enable participation in the war. When the war ended, the African colonies and the United States exerted pressure on Britain based on these particular provisions.

Churchill had no option but to introduce the Charter in parliament, intentionally misinterpreting the term colonies to mean the ones they had captured from Germany during the war.

The Charter passed through parliament and it was on its provisions that most African colonies got independence through non-violent protests.

The Suez Canal Crisis came after the Second World War and presented another challenge for the government of the British Empire. The British wanted to maintain its wading presence in the Middle East and maintaining its base at the Suez Canal was crucial.

However, the lack of support by the United States served to weaken the prospects of British advancements and her army left in shame and defeat that led to the resignation of the then Prime Minister Anthony Eden.

The Role of USSR

The Soviet Union was the main party against colonization. The Bandung 1955 Conference of the third word countries led by Nehru for India, Nasser for Egypt and Tito for Yugoslavia led to the creation of Non-Aligned Movements in 1961 and the movements were supposedly neutral because they supported neither the “first” nor the “Second” worlds.

However, the US refused to support decolonization fully against its European allies and this led to the nationalist movements, which were yet to win independence, lean more to the East.

China later appeared on the world scene led by Mao Zedong and created a conflict between the Soviet Union and other independent movements.

Although the non-aligned movement had a goal of being independent of both the US and the Soviet Union, they finally went the way of USSR and the smaller independent movements depending on their ideologies chose either U.S.S.R or China.

An example is the Cuban government that was neutral at first but later went towards Moscow and later sponsored other liberation movements itself in Angola and Mozambique.

The Cold War

Historians do not necessarily agree on the exact time that the Cold War began but a general agreement is that, it is the period between 1947 and 1991.

The period as shown relates to the period immediately after the Second World War, which was coupled with political conflicts and economic competitions between the Soviet Union and the United States and their respective allies.

It was because of the tension between the West and Soviet Union that each of them went ahead to support decolonization to gain global support.

Although the US was neutral in the beginning, it had to change and support decolonization based on the Atlantic Charter of 1941 that emphasized on the right of all people to choose their own form of government.

It is important to note that the Cold War rivalry complicated the aspect of decolonization further because in principle, both nations were against colonialism.

However, America was opposed to communism while the Soviet Union was against imperialism and therefore, the United States would support existence of the British Empire if only to keep communism at bay.

The United Nations Declaration

The UN General Assembly voted in favor of the ‘Declaration on the Granting of Independence to Colonial Countries and Peoples’ (“United Nations: Declaration on Granting Independence to Colonial Countries and Peoples, 1960”).

The declaration said in part that it recognized the desire of the world to end colonialism and that the continued existence of colonialism was a barrier to achieving international economic co-operation.

The declaration stated that everyone had a right to self-determination and further declaring that any inadequacy whether social, political, or economic was not going to be an excuse for delaying independence.

The British Empire was a member state of the UN since its formation in 1945 and was required to implement faithfully and strictly the provisions of the Charter. The Charter was a serious step towards decolonization especially for Africa whose liberation movements was greatly out-numbered military power and few numbers.

The ‘Wind of Change’

The British Conservative Prime Minister Harold Macmillan went for a tour across the African British colony for a month. He concluded his visit by addressing the South African Parliament in Cape Town on 3 February 1960 and it is on this day that he delivered the now famous ‘Wind of Change Speech.

The speech was the clearest indication that the Conservative party led British government was planning to grant independence to its colonies in Africa. This was a continuation of what the Churchill-led government had begun during and immediately after the Second World War.

The speech owes its name to a quotation in Macmillan’s speech that declared ‘The wind of change is blowing through this continent…’ (Myers, Frank 557). The speech marked the beginning of the last phase of British decolonization and most of the African British colonies won independence between 1960 and 1968.

However, this wind of change excluded Southern Rhodesia where racism had prompted the British colonial rule to supervise until 1980 when elections were held and Robert Mugabe became the Prime Minister of the newly formed state of Zimbabwe after winning the elections held in 1980.

End of the British Empire

By 1981 after granting independence to Zimbabwe, the New Hebrides and Belize in 1980 and 1981 respectively meant an end to the decolonization process that had began after 1945.

However, in 1982, Argentina invaded the Falkland Island one of the British overseas territories and the British were quick to respond in a bid to retake the island, which was seen as an opportunity to rejuvenate itself and prove as a world power.

Later, Canada, Australia, and New Zealand delinked their respective constitutions from Britain that meant an end to British involvement in constitutional changes of these countries. The last major British territory that remained was Hong Kong that British government had to negotiate a deal with China.

It was agreed that Hong Kong would be an administrative region of the People’s Republic of China and this remained so until the handing over that took place in 1999. This handing over ceremony according to some that marked an end to the British Empire.

The British Empire Legacy

The Great Depression of the 1930’s, the Second World War, and the decolonization period marked a downward trend of the British Empire from where it were regarded as a world power until the emergence of the US and U.S.S.R who came to undermine Britain’s superiority.

However, the British Empire has proved to be the most successful of all the colonizers of the world. Until 2002, Britain had 14 overseas territories spread across the globe although British sovereignty of some of these territories lies in dispute.

These territories still rely on the British government for foreign relations and defense although they govern themselves. Britain succeeded in passing to its former colonies several of their cultures, traditions, and institutions.

The English language is a mark of the dominance of the British Empire and spoken by approximately one and a half billion people around the globe today (Hogg 224).

Most of the former colonies used the format of the English parliamentary system as the starting point of their governments and most of their constitutions that they are still using today were drafted in the United Kingdom.

During colonization, the Empire drew boundaries some of which became sources of conflicts between indigenous people and sometimes between the indigenous and white settlers from its former colonies.

The British Empire exported among other things its sports for example, football and the idea of driving on the left hand drive.

The Commonwealth

The British Empire gave birth to the British Commonwealth, which was later to be known as The Commonwealth. The Commonwealth is an intergovernmental organization of fifty-three independent member states all of which are former colonies of Britain except Mozambique and Rwanda.

These member states work together guided by the Singapore Declaration on 22 January 1971 after the conclusion of the first Commonwealth Heads of Government Meeting where they promote upholding of human rights, good governance, democracy and observing the rule of law among others (Shunhong 77).

Conclusion The British Empire had conquered the world with its economic and military power but it is important to note that it is on these same points of economic power and military strength that was its greatest undoing. The Second World War also exposed the colonies to politics empowering them through education.

Its passion to remain a world power made it to enter into debt and the British economy almost crumbled, which was the beginning of the process of decolonization by the British Empire that ended around 1980.

These reasons certainly caused the British Empire to give in to the pressure of the independent movements and decolonize its colonies.

The British Empire however, did not become extinct and the formation of the commonwealth is a testimony of the same. Continued partnerships and bilateral trade agreements between Britain and its former colonies go a long way to state the fact that colonization had a lasting effect to the colonized countries.

However, in today’s world, the effects of colonialism have continued to cause pain and suffering to former British colonies in the form of weak governments, civil instabilities, and human rights violations.

Talking of human rights violations, a delegate of former freedom fighters from Kenya accompanied by their lawyers visited the United Kingdom last month to present a case in court to be compensated for bodily harms caused during the colonization epoch.

It will be important to look into a form of decolonization that will involve new negotiations on the benefits the Empires got through contemporary trade and political relations.

Works Cited Hunt, Lynn, et al. The Making of the West Peoples and Culture. Boston: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2008.

Myers, Frank. “Harold Macmillan’s ‘Wind of Change’ Speech: A Case Study in the Rhetoric of Policy Change.” Rhetoric and Public Affairs 3.4 (2000): 555-575.

Shunhong, Zhang. The Collapse of the British Empire. China Social Science Documentation Publishing House, 1997.

Smith, Tony. A Comparative Study of French and British Decolonization. Comparative Studies in Society and History 20.1 (1978): 70-102.

[supanova_question]

Modern State Formation: The Case of Former Yugoslavia Essay college essay help near me

War historians and political analysts are in agreement that the ideological, economic and political conflicts between the Soviet Union and the United States immediately after World War 2 influenced, in large part, the formation and political orientation of many countries in Eastern Europe.

Indeed, the deep-rooted ideological, economic and political differences between the two countries coupled with the Soviet’s Union’s gradual influence in Europe before the end of the war played a significant role in initializing the Cold War era (Eskridge-Kosmach, 2009).

This paper purposes to analyze how the former Yugoslavia regime functioned during the Cold War Era.

In particular, the paper will analyze the pillars of the regime’s support, the extent to which it employed the cult of personality or ideology, how it re-organized the nation’s economy and society, and how it fitted into the overall picture of European and International politics.

Under the firm control of Josip Tito, the former Yugoslavia regime central pillar of support came in the form of embracing a vigorous program of socialization that was deeply rooted in Marxist theories.

Although Tito leaned towards the socialist policies learned from his former training in the Soviet Union, he pursued an independent course in foreign relations and refused to be subdued by what he termed as the Soviet’s bureaucratic caste and the its attempts to subjugate Yugoslavia’s economy (Banerji, 1950).

This implies that the regime benefited from Financial, military and technology aid from the United States and other Western powers, who were keen on using Tito’s uncompromising stand on the Soviet’s socialist policies to nip its budding influence on Eastern European countries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is also imperative to note that the regime thrived on crushing opposition voices, executing leaders perceived to entrench a different ideological orientation other than communism, and limiting intellectual freedom (Marxists Internet Archive, n.d.).

Tito’s regime in former Yugoslavia was deeply rooted in communist and Marxist ideologies. Individuals like Karl Marx and Vladimir Lenin were exalted for providing the art and the science through which the regime thrived, and any form of capitalism or revisionism was dispelled (Banerji, 1950).

A comprehensive analysis of some of Tito’s works reveals that Lenin’s personality cult was deeply entrenched in Yugoslavia in the form of a strict system of command as well the people’s unconditional obedience to the rule’s and demands of the regime (Marxists Internet Archive, n.d.).

Consequently, Tito, the regime leader, was able to overwhelmingly impose himself upon the national communist party and the state.

Tito’s regime in former Yugoslavia re-organized the national economy along the contours of redistribution of wealth.

The regime decried the economic model used by the Soviet Union, which it said perpetrated capitalism through selling commodities as high as possible to achieve as much financial gain as possible from other socialist countries (Banerji, 1950).

The regime re-organized the national’s economy by giving factories to the working class with the aim of strengthening this group of the population. This, according to Tito, was in line with the science of Marxism and Leninism.

We will write a custom Essay on Modern State Formation: The Case of Former Yugoslavia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In redistribution of wealth, profitable organizations were taxed to subsidize unprofitable ones, and employed workers were taxed to subsidize unemployed workers in line with the socialist policy of profit-sharing among community members (Vodopivec, 1990).

A national fund for capital accumulation was established, and each factory or organization was obliged to give a proportion of its accumulated funds – calculated in relation to its productivity – to improve the living standards of the workers and to promote general industrial development (Banerji, 1950).

The compression of personal income disparities within an organization was also encouraged for the purpose of achieving equality among the working class (Vodopivec, 1990).

This compression was also aimed at minimizing discontent among the masses that, according to the regime, could be triggered by unequal distribution of wealth.

Lastly, it can be argued that Tito’s national socialist regime was lukewarmly accommodated by western powers, mainly by Truman and Eisenhower administrations in the U.S., particularly in its conflict with Stalin and its blatant refusal to align its internal and overseas policies to the Soviet hegemony (Marxists Internet Archive, n.d.).

The two U.S. administrations were willing to ignore the ideological differences that existed between the former Yugoslavia and the Western world in order to attain potentially substantial geopolitical advantages (Eskridge-Kosmach, 2009).

However, other European countries had their reservations for an independent but still socialist Yugoslavia.

Reference List Banerji, K. 1950. “Interview with Marshal Tito.” Fourth International 11, no. 6, 188-192. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Modern State Formation: The Case of Former Yugoslavia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Eskridge-Kosmach, A.N. 2009. “Yugoslavia and U.S. Foreign Policy in the 1960-1970’s of the 20th Century.” Journal of Slavic Military Studies 22, no. 2, 383-418.

Marxists Internet Archive. n.d. “Josip Broz Tito 1892-1980.” Web.

Vodopivec, M. 1990. “How redistribution hurts productivity in a socialist economy (Yugoslavia).” World Bank. Web.

[supanova_question]

Advertising and Promotion Report essay help: essay help

Executive summary Advertisement plays a key role in business operations. The market position of a given product company will highly be influenced by the company’s ability to expose their products to their customers and how they prove their products to be well above the others in the market.

The medium that is used in the advertisement will affect its effectiveness, as it will reflect on the size of the audience reached. There has been a constant shift on the media that are appropriate for advertisement due to the technological advances that are registered daily.

With the increased technology and the increased competition in the current markets, many companies would want to produce products that have incorporated more than one function.

The convergence enables some kind of flexibility in the products and services that these companies can deliver to the market and will greatly contribute to their high position in the global market.

A key contributor to the current rapid technological advances is the increasing need to do away with the analogue system and adopt digital equipments. The shift from analogue to digital signal system is set to provide a more relaxed environment to the users in the technology world.

It will also be a basis for competition among various production companies. The conversion to digital technology is also positively influencing the sales of products as it reduces the cost of selling a given music product.

Introduction Music, movies, and games are liked by a good proportion of the UK population and thus the music industry is one of the major industries in the region. Music, in particular, is viewed not only as a local but also as a global culture (Brown, et al, 2000, p.2).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The rise in the modern technology has increased the individual’s access to these products. A good proportion of the population listens to music from their computers.

There is need by the companies that specialize in these products to find ways through which the products could be accessed easily by their customers. This calls for the service of an advertisement agency.

The agency considers the kinds of products that organizations produce and the target group for such products. It then examines the communication medium that is most popular among the identified groups and carries out the advertisements.

The industry has recently suffered great losses resulting from piracy. Despite the copyright acts that prohibit the vice, many users still obtain these entertainment products through illegal procedures. However, more legislation and strategies are being set that are likely to end piracy in the near future.

The principles underlying the roles of the Accounts Manager The account manager of any organization or agency will be charged with various responsibilities that are geared towards the success of the organization. As the accounts manager of the advertising agency, I had to establish and maintain good business relationship with our clients (Field, 2009, p.106; Ryals

[supanova_question]

The Success of Organizational Learning Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu

The journal by Helen Shipton called “Towards a typology for organizational learning research,” compares and contrasts approaches to organizational management as there exists a close linkage between individual training and entire workplace training (Shipton, 2006).

This paper discuses the main issues and contributions brought about in the article.

The article gives reference to scholars who seems to have been the originators and first advocators for organizational learning, Cyert and March (1963) according to these early scholars, organizations respond to changes in the external environments and it is through the external environments that they align their organizations learning needs.

To some extent, the above observation of early scholars still holds however in modern times, strategic management approaches to business management puts less emphasis on need for organizational learning to have been initiated by an external influence (Kleiman, 2000).

They are of the opinion that the best approach to organizational learning is to have an ongoing program of learning, training, developing, mentoring, coaching and counseling to ensure that operations within an organization are well up-to-date.

In modern organizational learning theories, there exists a close relationship between organizational learning and performance in an organization; as brought about in prescriptive/normative theory literature, organizations that have well framed learning programs have higher tendencies of having higher outcomes; they make decisions that are responsive to the needs of business environment/industry.

Apple Inc. has become the world’s largest electronic industry because of its well planned organizational culture, the company ensures that there is a believing on the changes happening in the industry, as a response to the learning programs, staffs have come-up with new methods of reducing operating costs and have innovated new products (Henderson, 2003).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Zappo International Company has enacted policies that facilitate learning in the organization, they involve their staffs in decision making and keeps undertaking internal and external situational analysis to see the areas that employees needs training.

When appraising staffs, which takes place quarterly, the management leaves a section to be filled by staffs on areas they need training; this has facilitated training in the international apparels company (Muller, Maclean and Biggs, 2009).

How theories brought about can be advanced in the future and what challenges must be overcome

Though organizational learning has been taken as one of strategic management approach deeply in rooted in organizations, and undertaken by human resources management assisted with other line managers, in the future the area should be a full department and section within an organization.

It would yield better results if there were some people within an organization who can liaise with human resources, production departments, marketing, research and developing, business intelligence, and customer relation management teams to come up with policies and identify learning needs in an organization.

Such a department will ensure that an organization gets the right training, mentorship, and coaching to facilitate an improved business (Meinolf, Ariane, John and Ikujiro, 2003).

The success of organizational learning is hindered by internal and external factors facing an organization if the factors are not managed appropriately; internal factors include organizational culture, organizational politics, leadership and informal team in the organization.

To ensure that the practice is not hindered, management has the role of developing effective communication systems that facilitate sharing of information across the organization.

We will write a custom Assessment on The Success of Organizational Learning specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Organizational culture should be shaped to support training and mentorship programs; leaders should always have it in mind that organizational learning can only be effective if trainers and mentors are well informed and have good training skills (Hornsby and Warkeoczeski, 2000).

References Henderson, R., 2003. Compensation Management in a Knowledge-Based World. 9th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Hornsby, T. and Warkeoczeski, L. 2000. New roles for leaders: A step-by-step guide to competitive advantage. Franklin: Hillsboro Press.

Kleiman, L.,2000. Human Resource Management: A Tool for Competitive Advantage. Cincinnati: South-Western College Publishing.

Meinolf, D., Ariane, A., John, C. and Ikujiro, N.,2003. Handbook of Organisational Learning and Knowledge. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Muller, J., Maclean, R. and Biggs, H., 2009. The impact of a supportive leadership program in a policing organization from the participants’ perspective. Work, 32(1),Pp. 69-79.

Shipton, H.,2006. Cohesion or confusion? Towards a typology for organizational learning research. International Journal of Management Reviews, 10(11), PP.1468-2370

[supanova_question]

Falling Angels by Tracy Chaveliar Critical Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction Falling angels is the third novel of Tracy Chevalier, an American born writer. It began in January 1901, which marked a new epoch since Queen Victoria had died. Her son, Dandy King Edward became an emperor. This novel presumes a wide cultural focus, looking at death and burial as shown hundred years ago.

This narrative is ruthlessly prepared with around ten first person voices all of them differing in age and societal position. Girls, looked upon maids, disturbed fathers and the gravediggers son form the main characters of this novel and help carry the story line.

This novel describes how fundamentally societies can transform within the space of ten years. Tracy Chevalier in her setting of this novel was motivated by her increasing interest in eras of change, moving from one array of values to another (Tracy 215).

Two incompatible families are obliged into contact by a condition of having elaborate family graves. One of the graves is triumphed by an angel while the other one is surmounted by an urn. The two tombs are besides each other.

One of the families is advancive of intellectual personalities and tastes while the other is firmly bourgeois, being totally spiritual and conventional.

Elements of lost arts of entombments and grieving in this narrative are fascinating and prompts us on how much peoples approaches to death has culturally detached us from our predecessors.

Tracy Chevalier in this novel investigates the injustice and faults of a changing time in opposition to a gas lit background of societal and political history. Tracy chevalier in her novel discusses a theme with a great effect to the society, which is the status of the female individual.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This paper will discuss gender inequality as demonstrated in this novel and assess how post modernism has helped solve this problem (Mitchell 138).

Gender inequality and post modernism as illustrated in this novel Tracy Chevalier in this novel illustrates an actual division between male and female sexes. The female world functions nearly as a subversive movement with predicaments of sex and pregnancy being dealt with without discussing or complaining to the men folk.

Post modernism refers to a movement away from the perspective of modernism. It entails the conviction that noticeable realities are merely societal constructs and are vulnerable to change. Post modernism in this novel emphasizes sharp issues such as gender inequality, that is, males versus females (Benhabib 141).

In this novel, post modernism tries to problematise modernist boldness, by depicting how confident the females in this novel need to be in order to meet their theoretical purposes.

Women characters in this novel especially Kitty Coleman struggle to obtain self determination and overwhelm loneliness. It shows how issues faced by female characters in this novel differ with the issues faced by women today.

Post modernism in this novel is illustrated through feminism whereby the women in this novel get involved in movements headed for identifying, instituting and safeguarding equal political, financial and social rights. Its perceptions go beyond those of womens’ privileges.

Feminism is a post modernism aspect which mainly concentrates on womens issues. Since feminism tries to find gender equality, men’s freedom is an essential part of it.

We will write a custom Essay on Falling Angels by Tracy Chaveliar specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Feminism in this novel is seen through the surfacing of feminist movements such as the womens suffragettes association. It also entails the social creation of sex and gender.

Feminist campaigners in this novel are seen to be struggling for womens rights such as education, rights to vote and reproductive rights. Women are in opposition to domestic aggression and sexual harassment ( Hamilton and Jones 318).

Gorgeous and restless, Kitty Coleman and the plain religious Gertrude Waterhouse are the main female character in this novel.

Kitty looks forward to modernism while Gertrude sticks to Victorian customs.Richard Coleman, Kitty’s’ husband, initiates the novel as an open minded scientist devoted to his wife but towards the middle, he becomes an opponent and suppresses Kitty.

These matriarchs are completely opposed in nature yet they develop to a moving joint society reflecting its inflexible class distinctions. Supporting feminism in this story is the cruel ubiquitous truth of male power and the impediments of prudery. This makes actual interactions between both male and females impossible.

This is evident when Kitty’s husband instructs her to have sex with another man. She conforms to this with no complaining. In this case, Kitty falls under the enchantment of a drastic feminist. She even carries out an abortion at a time when this is frankly risky.

Post modernism in this case is shown where Kitty enthusiastically turns her concentration to the women’s suffrage movement. It is clear that discussing with these intellectual women gives Kitty some of the psychological sustenance she needs.

She gets drawn in womens rights and starts to dump the Victorian regulations. The woman’s suffragist movement played a very big role in the society. It was concerned with women who didn’t worry about politics or those uninterested in search of enthusiasm.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Falling Angels by Tracy Chaveliar by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Gender inequality in this novel is further demonstrated where bright adult women were not allowed to take part in public live and in nearly all intellectual undertakings. This is evident where early in the novel, Kitty stares at her husband go for work.

She feels a sense of enviousness just like she had felt before while young as she watched her brother leave for school. Girls were kept from going to school. She however cannot help this situation and only begins to cry. Kitty seems to be uninterested with her family and her way of living.

She craves of being back to her home with her fostering father and brother in order to be liberated to learn and make art. In this novel, men do not understand how education could fit women for any broadly extending responsibility until they came to an agreement of their true stable duty in the society.

Male chauvinism is also illustrated where the existence of young females at home is taken as a basis of anxiety. Families with daughters are not interested in seeing their daughters happily married but in the finances they get if marriage occurs. This novel plays a role in depicting promiscuity in females.

Fallen women including seduced maidens and remorseful maladies are portrayed as playing a didactic role to caution the female audience against the remunerations of sinful sexual satisfaction. Paradoxically, such tasks were played by the same women who had tentatively yielded to such enticements as actresses.

Tracy deems the actress and prostitute areas of work as parallel and not automatically convergent. She contrasts female musicians who present on the public stage with prostitutes.

Such women are in close immediacy since prostitutes were very common in concert halls. Daughters who chose these kinds of life were regarded dead in their families.

Due to this issue of gender inequality, Maude, the only daughter of Coleman, is seen to suffer devastatingly rather than declare her menstruation to her father.

She is not free with her father and cannot explain to him her menstrual problems. She therefore continues to perform her home duties at the expense of her suffering. These approaches are however shifting with the new century.

Gender inequality is also illustrated where women were not allowed to participate in elections. During this time, almost all men were allowed to vote discriminating only those who did not possess property, those living with their bosses, male illicit and lunatics.

This is so unfair since women have contributed so much to bring in peoples liberty and rights. Post modernism was however demonstrated in this novel since women started agitating for their rights to vote in 1906.

Tracy Chevalier in this novel is concerned with the continuing change in the role of women in the society. In reality, Richard Coleman has insignificant grounds for disapproving his wife’s’ conduct. The novel opens with a stint of wife swaps initiated by him.

Post modernism here is seen where Kitty denies Richard the right of entry to her bed from the time Maude, their only daughter, was born. Tracy Chevalier also illustrates how women have changed sexuality to their benefits in the twentieth century.

Women in this novel achieve a right to be heard at a very high cost. Feminine character is built and maintained through enduring pain and sacrificing. Kitty Coleman enrols in the womens suffragettes association so as to make an assertion before a traditionalistic husband and a dictatorial mother in law.

Kitty becomes a member of this movement hoping that she is doing so for her daughter Maude, to enable her to vote and go to institutions of higher education. This would allow Maude to be possibly free from the powers of any man. However, Kitty is slightly understood by Maude.

She relentlessly suffers from lonesomeness. Post modernism in this case is demonstrated whereby Kitty recompenses with her own life for preferring a path different from that designed by her mother in-law (Anderson 72).

Gender inequality is also portrayed whereby in the Victorians brains, women are perpetuated as sensualised, vulnerable and fallen. Money due to its shady influence is said to belong to a man’s world and not in a woman’s extra ethical world.

The base of the issue of women rolling up at the public stage was the tie in Victorian minds. This was between female artists and prostitutes who sanctioned to be employed for the amusement of anyone who could pay for the price. Female actresses were equittted with prostitutes.

Gender inequality is also portrayed where upper and middle category women were not permitted to work beyond their homes and in remunerative jobs. Their hypothetical idleness at their homes acted as a symbol of the male relative capabilities to sustain them in a manner applicable to their social status.

Cases where women played a role in the family income or were self accommodating were considered unfavourable on gender responsibilities. Social accountability was at risk.

Post modernism was applied in cases where the society recognized that some gentle women families were facing hard times from the demise of husband or father or from other monetary constraints. Women in this case were allowed to work until the financial crisis was resoluted.

Women were restricted employment chances due to lack of solid edifications or marketable skills. This predicament was especially common in spinsters who lacked sufficient funds. They therefore ended up doing dress making jobs or acting as ladys’ attendants. All these were carried out under a home environment.

In this novel, women were supposed to be satisfied with what men considered necessary for them. Men had all the authority in the world though they succeeded to women only a small segment of this power.

Women in this novel are encouraged to present their music in commission to others rather than for self enhancement. Young women equipped with a skill in music sought jobs as music governess in homes or as presenters in public appointments.

This was however opposite to the males who were allowed to present their music in national functions.

Conclusion Feminists believe that women are unrestricted to equal rights and respects. People are however not required to give a judgement on the fact that women are being treated unfairly in the society.

The causes of disagreements both with and within feminism are however hard to identify. As a result feminists should have certain goals for creating social change on the behalf of women.

The above explained novel focuses on the development of female characters. Women in the society should follow the character traits of Kitty so as to live a happy life.

They should join women movements that bring meaning to their lives. As such, women should struggle by all means to fight cases of gender inequality and male chauvinism which act as hindrances to their success.

Works cited Anderson, Elizabeth. What is the Point of Equality? London: Oxford University Press, 1999. Print.

Benhabib, Seyla. Situating the Self: Gender, Community, and Postmodernism in Contemporary Ethics. New York: Routledge, 1992. Print.

Hamilton, Geoff and Jones, Brian. Contemporary Writers and Their Work: Literary Movements. NY: Infobase Publishing, 2009. Print.

Mitchell, Sally. The fallen Angel: Chastity, Class and Womens reading 1835-1880. NY: Bowling Green University Popular Press, 1981. Print.

Tracy, Chaveliar. Actresses as working women: Their social identity in Victorian Culture. London: Routledge, 1991. Print.

[supanova_question]

Guantanamo Bay best college essay help: best college essay help

In the light of the growing interest over whether the United States Administration is faulting with the rights and freedom of several hundred unlawful combatants still detained in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, it is imperative to critically evaluate if the notion of “jihad” has been overhyped by policy makers, the media and other stakeholders interested in the fight against global terrorism, and if majority of the detainees still held in the facility are indeed radical extremists or disaffected and confused men.

The knowledge that many of detainees still held in Guantanamo bay are Islamic terrorists focused on carrying out “holy war” under the banner of “jihad” is in public domain (Aaron, 2008).

To comprehend the US Administration’s attitude in the Guantanamo Bay case, one only needs to remember the brute and unwarranted killings of innocent civilians in the 9/11 terrorist attacks.

Since that date, the U.S. considers itself to be in a constant state of war against international terrorism which is largely perpetrated by jihadis and other terrorist organizations. To therefore assume that the notion of jihad has been hyped is to miss the point.

The jihadis have avowedly sought “…the destruction of western democracy and the conversion of the world to their concept of Islam” (Aaron, 2008, p. 1).

It is important to note that not only do the jihadis perpetrate their murderous killings based on a largely misplaced notion of the ‘holy war’ as described in Islam (Aaron, 2008), but it is increasing hard for the U.S. to wage war against a common stateless enemy scattered throughout the world.

In addition, jihadis are extremely dangerous since they come from a culture and religious orientation that is largely incomprehensible to the U.S., not mentioning that they do not speak with one voice (Aaron, 2008).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Consequently, all necessary measures need to be put in place to guard against these extremists and to stress the real dangers posed by these stateless groups.

On this account, it is strategically wrong and politically irresponsible to assume that the concept of jihad has been overhyped since this amount to conferring on jihad terrorists’ greater legitimacy and will to attack than they already have.

There exist many reasons and influences as to why many unsuspecting young Muslims leave their homes and volunteer to join jihad.

Indeed, Curcio (2005) cites influence of imams, devotion to Islam, indoctrination with untenable religious beliefs and unemployment as some of the factors that influence young men to join the movement.

But however much one would want to sympathize with these unsuspecting minds, the damage they cause cannot escape mention.

What is perplexing is the fact that the adherents of jihadism believe that they can achieve their goals, especially the creation of a global fundamentalist Islamic State, through violent means (Aaron, 2008).

It is therefore of immediate necessity to put in place strong measures to quell this utopian line of thought, which is in essence not supported by mainstream Islam. In this perspective, the question of hyping the notion of jihad does not even arise; states must at all times be prepared about the possibility a terrorist attack.

We will write a custom Essay on Guantanamo Bay

[supanova_question]

The Regulation of OHS in Australia Research Paper college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Case of Miner’s Death

The Trapped Miner

The BHP Leinster Mine Case

Discussion

Conclusion

List of References

Introduction The OHS regulation in Australia has undergone transformations owing to elevated levels of industrialization and material processing.

The “National Occupational Health and Safety Strategy 2002-2012” is operational in Australia since its adoption in 2002 by the Ministry of Workplace relations (CCH Australia Limited, OHS Industry and Legal Authorities

[supanova_question]

Creativity and Creative Industries Analytical Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction: Creativity and creative industries Creativity can be referred to as developing of a new substance that has never existed; it could be a solution or product. Creativity occurs if one invents something new that has never existed, or if it exists elsewhere, the creator is not aware of it.

Creativity can also refer to a new process of tackling something or inventing a new idea. One can also introduce an existing product into a totally different market.

With the emerging technology, upcoming industrious people are able to create their work and hence establishing outlets for their creativity as a way of promoting and distributing their creative work. The creative industries may include design, architecture, writing and publishing, music, photography, and performing arts.

The screen production such as in the television is inclusive. Hence, creative industries are economic activities that concentrate on the generation of knowledge and ideas.

These industries are usually as a result of an individual creativeness inclusive of talents and skills (Queensland University of technology, n.d). Nevertheless, the creative industries contribute widely in a country’s economy due to their uniqueness in their operations, thus attracting many clients from within and abroad.

Creativity yields creative industries, which in turn lead to employment, growth, and development in a country. Hence, creative industries contribute to gross domestic product (GDP), in distribution term and job creation (Henry, 2007, pp 9).

To build creative organizations, knowledge and leadership is required; therefore, the presence of an ideal leader is important. This is a person who has the capabilities of spotting an idea that suits well with the needs of an organization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He is an entrepreneur who finds ways of selling and guiding his/her through implementation. He is however conscious of how his ideas can be affected by contradicting actions of managers who are not keen.

However, creativity is challenged by several factors, for instance, it is not easy to demonstrate the value of a new service or product that is not in existence. New ideas may be threatening to the existing market; nevertheless, if they sail through, developing of these ideas in to tangible products may be an easy task.

There are a number of factors that an ideal leader should consider including the surrounding environment, which must promote idea generation. Scanning for new opportunities should be done continuously by clarifying the emerging problem.

Practical techniques should also be implemented to encourage the generation of new possibilities. When the idea is finally implemented, a follow-up should be done regularly to ensure that the idea follows the right track (Arnold, 2010).

Creativity can fall in many categories, for instance, the private health sectors. In is evident that private hospitals have more medical facilities as compared to public hospitals, which are limited to facilities.

This is most evident in developing countries where a patient has to be referred to a private hospital to be attended. This may be due to the fact that a certain machine is only available in a certain private hospital.

The profound point here is that, the management of such a hospital thought through how to attract patients or gain fame as a hospital. They then opted to import an expensive life saving machine form abroad, after surveying and discovering that such a machine does not exist in any of the hospitals in that country.

We will write a custom Essay on Creativity and Creative Industries specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Such an idea changes the lives of many people in the society, from the patient to the new employees / experts needed to operate the machine. Another example could be establishing a borehole in a community that has scarcity of water and by use of technology, pumping the water to taps.

The business can decide on how to charge for the water service, thus making a community’s life easier and at the same time making money.

Creativity is what gives sight to the blind, and what provides a better heart to the children with a heart condition. Through creativity, these surgeries are innovated, studied, and taught to medical specialists such that, when they perform the surgeries, they are a success.

Therefore, everything in our lives revolves around creativity, which develops into ideas that form creative industries that deal with different products and services.

Hence, creativity has contributed greatly to the community in that, it provides quality life for people in the society, and this is evident through a number of creative industries that surround us; architecture, designs, advertising, software, publishing, internet, electronics, infrastructure, among others.

With technological know-how, our live move a little fast, since we no longer have to send an urgent letter via post office – that task can be completed through an instant chat message or through yahoo-mail or face book.

Despite the importance associated with creative industries, the cultural industries are also of benefit to a country such as the museums. However, it is due to their tradition state probably shuns visitors away; nevertheless, creative industries can boost such industries technologically to revive their fame.

The creative industries can also contribute to the cultural industries via architectural services, thus improving the outward image of these heritages.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Creativity and Creative Industries by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The internet has emerged as a result of creative industries, with its presence tasks are completed faster and communication is much easier due to the social clouds like facebook, my space among others.

Information can also be acquired fast due to the search sites such as; Google, wikipedia and yahoo among others which can be referred to as information clouds.

With the emerge of cloud culture, the internet has enabled exchange of information through chatting which enables one to express themselves and understand other peoples culture through interaction with other online communities.

Culture gives us a sense of belonging and identity and hence through sharing of information and interaction, through clouds such as facebook, twitter and my space among others.

Knowledge is the key to success, since it is through knowledge that one can be able to develop a generated idea. However, according to Arnold (2010), creativity may be faced by obstacles if the organization’s culture, does not entertain new ideas, but instead it criticizes them.

Management may not be willing to take risks, thus hindering implementation of ideas. In organization where workload is routine and unrealistic expectations are required, it proofs difficult for the creativity to occur, since employee are always occupied with work.

New Zealand’s creative industries According to a journal by Fritsch (2008), creativity is seen as a process mostly, other than a product – in the earlier years, people used their own skills and to expand.

In addition, with the presence of creative process, it leads to creative production and if creative output is emphasized, definitely a creative outcome results, hence leading to an economic success.

The creative industries in New Zealand lead to the creation of goods, services, and knowledge in the textile, design, fashion, production, art and even in the photography sector.

According to Grants et al (2009), the New Zealand creative industries led to 121,000 jobs in 2006; nevertheless, this sector led to increase of incomes, such that, as in 2006, the employee earned about $52,000 per year.

A community creates a relationship that encourages the exchange of ideas and risk taking in a business environment. Nevertheless, the relationship in creative industries included a number of elements among them being an idea, which resulted to a process, experience, innovation, and collaboration.

Creative industries are a part of Auckland, which is in New Zealand. According to Bruin (2005, pp 143), the creative industries in New Zealand are well acknowledged since it is believed to be a major contributor to the country’s economy.

The New Zealand film industry is an example of a creative industry, which has over the years, attained recognition internationally by participating in movie production. For instance, the return of the lords, the whale rider, resulted to winning of an award like the Oscar for the actors, directors, screen artist, and digital animators in 2004.

Due to technology, New Zealand has special effects on their productions, hence producing award-winning films for their international clients. Some other movies that have generated from New Zealand are king-Kong, the lion, the witch, and the wardrobe, X-men, the last samurai, among others.

The New Zealand’s government in 2000 contributed $22 million to the filming production fund, whose aim is to build experienced talents, which will be needed to aid in the development and growth of the filming industry, hence providing jobs opportunities (Bruin, 2005 pp145).

Indeed, this country’s location provides amazing sceneries, thus making it appropriate for filming.

The country’s infrastructure is a plus hence it has been effective in terms of transport and communication networks, which are inclusive of broadband connections, hence effective while coordinating film shooting between new Zealand and another country.

Digital content industry is another creative industry that has grown rapidly in New Zealand, such that, the country is rated among the leaders in this sector. It includes internet animation, game software, digital publishing, and television commercial production.

This industry includes the hallmark production, which is a creative innovation, and has the ability of meeting the world’s demand. The New Zealand multimedia industry serves over 20 countries, and seeks to find other emerging markets.

Some of these industries include sunshine brook, which concentrates on publishing of literacy materials, such as animated CD-ROMs. Another company is the Sidhe interactive, which produces games, and is trending on up-to-date technology with outstanding designs, thus producing original and licensed titles (Anon, 2011).

In addition, New Zealand produces a high level and quality crossbred wool in the world. The favorable farming environment has been a major contributor to the quality production; nevertheless, the country’s wool is regarded as uniform, white, and free from dark fibers and contamination.

This wool yields carpets, beddings, textiles, and even winter jackets, hence earning itself a large market share globally and also providing employment, thus boosting the economy.

In 2008- 2009, New Zealand produced about 154,000 tones of wool ranging as the third highest producer worldwide, hence being able to earn $731 million from its wool export globally. Therefore, this evidently shows how these creative industries are worth in a country and to the community at large.

The relationship between the creativity and community According to Hagoort

[supanova_question]

NO TITLE Essay college admission essay help

Large corporations and businesses introduce new products and services in order to fulfill a market need and make profits. The new-product development process is discussed in your text. Using this as a basis, research product failures that have affected companies in the past and have cost them a substantial amount of money and may also have adversely affected their market reputation, tarnishing their brands.

Research the web and pick one such product failure for a Fortune 500 company and describe this failure. NOTE: A product failure, not a “company” failure such as Blockbuster and not a “discontinued” product because of a failed part, such as the Ford Pinto which was in production and sold for 10 years but was discontinued because of a faulty fuel system and placement of its gas tank. And, not a service failure.

At a minimum, you are expected to provide:

Information about the company
The product
The rationale for the introduction of this product
The costs associated with the product (development and losses)
Synthesize your position on 3 – 5 reasons or specific factors you believe most likely contributed to the product failure, using the product development process in the text
Offer your analysis.
This is a one to two paragraph exercise – do not go overboard, concise description of the company, product, and major reasons you believe it failed.

Suggested Failure Examples For Review (that you may use)

McDonald’s Arch Deluxe Burger
New Coke
Pepsi Crystal
Coors Rocky Mountain Sparkling Water
HP Touchpad
Sony Betamax
Ford Edsel
ESPN Mobile Phone
Microsoft Zune
Not Considered Failures

Samsung Galaxy Phone (battery failed)
WOW Chips (profited from the product)
Heinz Colored Ketchup (profited from the product)
Use three or more references and citations, in APA format, to support your position.

[supanova_question]

Holy Farm Management Evaluation Essay best essay help

Executive Summary The core business activity of Holy Farm was production and sale of milk and cereals. However, the revenues generated from these activities have since declined. In order to increase revenue, the farm was opened to the public. Members of the public were allowed to visit the farm at a fee. The main attraction at the farm includes the milking parlor where the visitors watch the milking process. The farm has a capacity of 250 visitors per day.

However, the owners of the farm have not been able to receive the required 250 visitors per day. Thus, their main concern is to increase the number of visitors to the farm. This objective can be achieved in the following ways. First, the farm can be opened for a longer period. In particular, it can be opened in all months instead of closing it from November to March.

The farm can also be opened during Christmas and Easter holidays. Second, the number of visitors can be increased by organizing educational trips and special events such as dance and coach parties. Finally, more revenue can be generated by opening a souvenirs shop and a restaurant. These can be opened through outsourcing.

Managing Processes Introduction

Holy Farm initially focused on the production and sale of milk and cereals. Following a decline in profits from their core business activities, Holy Farm was opened up to the public in order to generate more revenue. Consequently, the owners of the farm constructed car parks. They also constructed a safe viewing area where the visitors can watch the milking process. Currently, the farm targets schools and the local community with its new services.

The farm has a capacity of 250 visitors per day. However, the owners of Holy Farm are yet to realize the expected returns on their new venture (opening the farm to the public). In general, the number of people visiting the farm has been fluctuating. The demand for visits to the farm is high from April to October, and remains very low in other months. Consequently, the farm is often closed from November to March.

The number of visitors is also very low during the week days. As a result, the farm is usually opened from Friday to Monday. The number of visitors received on Sundays and Saturdays is usually double the number of visitors who tour the farm on Monday and Friday. In light of these fluctuations, the owners of the farm intend to increase the number of visitors by 50%.

However, the farm faces financial constraints and, thus, cannot depend on capital investment to increase its capacity. Consequently, the owners intend to increase the number of visitors through sales promotions and advertisements. In this paper, the current capacity of Holy Farm will be analyzed. The optimal ways of achieving the targeted capacity will then be discussed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Current Capacity

The productive capacity of a firm is the total amount of output in terms of goods and services it can produce within a given time period (Nigel, Alistair and Robert, 2011, p. 299). Potential capacity is the maximum amount of output that can be produced by the firm’s installed equipment and human resources (Clark and Robert, 2008, p. 45).

Actual capacity is the actual amount of goods and services produced by the firm within a certain period. Thus, capacity utilization “is the percentage of the firm’s total possible production capacity that is actually being used”.

Holy Farm’s owners invested in a milking parlor in which 150 cows can be milked using a slow-moving turntable. They also constructed a gallery to enable visitors to watch the milking process. 80 people per hour visited the gallery from 4.30pm to 7.00pm. This means that the milking parlor was open for two and half hours per day.

Thus, the capacity can be calculated by multiplying 80 (visitors per hour) by two and half hours. The result which is 200 is divided by 80% to get 250 as the capacity or the maximum number of visitors who can tour the farm in a day. Thus, the farm’s monthly capacity can be illustrated in the graph below.

The figures for each month are obtained as follows. In April, the total number of visitors is 1,200. By dividing 1,200 by 4, we get the number of visitors per week to be 300. In order to get the number of visitors per day, we divide 300 by 6 and get 50. Thus, the number of visitors on Monday and Friday is 50, while the number of visitors on Sundays and Saturday is 100. This is because the number of visitors on Sundays and Saturdays is double the number on Mondays and Fridays.

In May, the total number of visitors is 1,800. Dividing 1,800 by 4 we get the weekly number of visitors to be 450. The number of visitors per day is obtained by dividing 450 by 6 to get 75. Thus, the number of visitors on Monday and Friday is 75, while the number of visitors on Sunday and Saturday is 150.

In the month of June, the total number of visitors is 2,800. The number of visitors per week is obtained by dividing 2,800 by 4 to get 700. The number of visitors per week is obtained by dividing 700 by 6 to get 116.6. Since we can not get a fraction of a visitor we round off 116.6 to get 117. Thus, the number of visitors on Monday and Friday is 117, while the number of visitors on Sunday and Saturday is 234.

We will write a custom Essay on Holy Farm Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The total number of visitors in the month of July is 3,200. By dividing 3,200 by 4 we get the number of visitors per week to be 800. By dividing 800 by 6 we get the daily number of visitors to be 133.3. This can be rounded so that we get 134 visitors per day. Thus, the number of visitors on Monday and Friday is 134 and the number of visitors on Sunday and Saturday is 268. In August, the total number of visitors is 3,400.

By dividing 3,400 by 4 we get the weekly number of visitors to be 850. The daily number of visitors is obtained by dividing 850 by 6 to get 141.6. By rounding off 141.6 we get 142. Therefore, 142 visitors are received on Monday and Friday and 284 visitors are received on Sunday and Saturday. In September, the total number of visitors is 1,800. The weekly number of visitors is obtained by dividing 1,800 by 4 to get 450.

The number of visitors per day is obtained by dividing 450 by 6 to get 75. Hence, the number of visitors on Monday and Friday is 75. However, on Sunday and Saturday, the number of visitors rises to 150 since the number of visitors for Sunday and Saturday is double the number of visitors for Monday and Friday. Finally, 600 visitors were received in October.

The weekly number of visitors is obtained by dividing 600 by 4 to get 150. The daily number of visitors is obtained by dividing 150 by 6 to get 25. Hence, 25 visitors are received on Monday and Friday, while 50 visitors are received on Sunday and Saturday.

The rate of capacity utilization has a direct bearing on the firm’s revenue and costs. In particular, the capacity utilization rate determines the amount of fixed costs per unit of a product or service (Betts, Meadws and Walley, 2000, pp. 185-196). The fixed costs per unit reduce as the firm increases the rate at which it uses its capacity.

Thus, Holy Farm is likely to have the lowest cost of hosting visitors in August when demand is very high. Since the fixed costs are low and the revenue is high due to the increase in the number of visitors, the firm is likely to make high profits. From November to March when demand is very low, the fixed costs per unit are likely to be very high. Thus, the Farm is likely to make low profits or even loses since the fixed costs remain constant while the revenue reduces as the number of visitors reduces. The result of the capacity assessment shows that the farm has not been able to receive 250 visitors per day. Consequently, the owners of the farm must use available resources to increase the number of visitors to 250 per day.

If the number of visitors is increased by 50%, the number of visitors touring the farm on monthly basis will increase as illustrated in graph 2 below. The number of people visiting the farm on a daily basis is calculated as follows. We multiply the daily number of visitors (current capacity) with 150 and then divide the result by 100. Thus, in April, 75 people will visit the farm on Monday and Friday. The number of visitors will increase to 150 on Sundays and Saturdays.

Graph 2

In May, 112.5 visitors will be received on Friday and Monday while on Sunday and Saturday, the number of visitors will increase to 225. In the month of June, 175 people will visit the farm on Monday and Friday. However, on Sunday and Saturday, the number of visitors will increase to 350. In July, 200 people will visit the farm on Monday and Friday. On Sunday and Friday, the number of visitors will increase to 400.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Holy Farm Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In August, the number of visitors received on Monday and Friday will be 212.5. However, on Sunday and Saturday, the number of visitors will increase to 425. In September, the number of visitors will be 112.5 and 225 on Monday and Friday, as well as, Sunday and Saturday respectively.

Finally, in October, the number of visitors will be 37.5 and 75 on Monday and Friday, as well as, Sunday and Friday respectively. The number of visitors can be increased through demand management since actual capacity is a direct function of the level of demand (Clark and Robert, 2008, p. 143).

Demand Management Demand management involves influencing the level of demand for a given product or service in order to meet the sales target or the desired capacity utilization (Armistead and Clark, 1994, pp. 5-22). In the context of Holy Farm, demand management will involve increasing the demand for visits to the farm in order to meet the desired capacity utilization.

Demand can be influenced through advertising and sales promotions (Croxton, Lambert and Rogers, 2002, pp. 51-66). Currently, the owners of Holy Farm intend to intensify their marketing initiatives. However, they face difficulties in identifying the customers to target with their advertising initiatives. The farm can focus on a specific market such as schools and reach them using the adverts and sales promotions.

Capacity Management Capacity management involves planning for and controlling the existing capacity in order to achieve the desired level of operation (Coughlan and Coughlan, 2002, pp. 220-240). Planning and controlling capacity is the process through which effective capacity is set so that the firm’s operations can respond to changes in demand (Taylor, 2006, pp. 163-186). Planning, as well as, controlling capacity occurs both in the long-run and in the short-run (Diaz, Torre and Garcia, 2002, pp. 286-302).

The full capacity utilization can be achieved in the following ways. First, the farm can be opened to the public for a longer period in order to increase revenue. For example, the farm can be opened from November to March instead of closing it during this period. Second, the farm owners should strengthen their relationships with schools. This can be achieved by organizing educational trips in the farm during the school days.

The educational trips are likely to attract more customers since they are not only for entertainment, but also for learning among the school students. Additionally, the educational trips can help in increasing the midweek capacity utilization since the trips can always be organized on week days.

Third, the firm can also increase sales to coach firms by organizing coach parties in the farm. Special events such as wedding parties can also be organized to attract more visitors. Fourth, the farm should be opened during special occasions and holidays. For example, the farm can be opened during Christmas and Easter holidays. Special events such as dance parties can also be offered during the holidays in order to attract more customers.

Many people are likely to visit the farm during the holiday seasons since they have more time. Additionally, many people prefer to spend on leisure activities during the holidays (Taylor and Fearne, 2009, pp. 379-392). Finally, the farm can generate more revenue by opening a souvenirs shop and a restaurant. Since the farm has no resources for capital investment, the souvenirs shop and restaurant services can be outsourced.

Queuing Queuing theory involves using quantitative techniques to analyze waiting lines and arrival at queues (Voss, Tsikriktsi and Frohlich, 2002, pp. 195-219). It enables mangers to analyze the efficiency of serving customers in a queue (Klassen and Rohleder, 2006, pp. 527-548). The rate of capacity utilization has a bearing on the waiting time or the time required to deliver services. In general, the waiting time increases as the rate of capacity utilization tends towards 100%.

In the context of Holy Farm, queues are used to access services at the milking parlor. The milking parlor is often opened at 4.30 pm. However, the visitors normally arrive at the gallery before 4.30 pm to watch the milking process. Consequently, queues usually build up at the gallery. The queues can be reduced or eliminated by opening the milking parlor earlier. The queues can also be reduced by reducing the waiting time. This can be achieved by reducing the time spend by each visitor to watch the milking process in the gallery.

Conclusion Holy Farm was opened to the public after the revenue from milk and cereal production declined. The objective was to allow members of the public to tour the farm at a fee. This would enable the owners of the farm to generate more revenue. The farm has a capacity of 250 visitors per day. However, the farm has not been able to operate at the full capacity of 250 visits per day. Additionally, the farm is only opened to the public from April to October.

Thus, the farm’s facilities are not used from September to March. In order to achieve the objective of generating more revenue, the owners of the farm intend to increase the number of visitors to the farm. This objective can be achieved by opening the farm for a longer period.

For instance, the farm should be opened from September to March instead of closing it. Additionally, the farm should be opened during Christmas and Easter holidays. More revenue can be generated by opening a souvenirs shop and a restaurant. However, these services should be outsourced since the farm lacks resources for capital investment.

References Armistead, C., and Clark, G., 1994. The ‘Coping’ Capacity Management Strategy in Services and the Influence of Quality Performance. International Journal of Service Industry Management, 5(2), pp. 5-22.

Betts, A., Meadws, M., and Walley, P., 2000. Call Centre Capacity Management. International Journal of Service Industry Management, 11(2), pp. 185-196.

Clark, G., and Robert, J., 2008. Service Operations Management. New York: Prentice Hall.

Coughlan, P., and Coughlan, D., 2002. Action Research for Operations Management. International Journal of Operations and Production Management, 22(2), pp. 220-240.

Croxton, K., Lambert, D., and Rogers, D., 2002. The Demand Management Process. International Journal of Logistics Management, 13(2), pp. 51-66.

Diaz, A., Torre, P., and Garcia, V., 2002. A Capacity Management Model in Services Industry. International Journal of Services Industry Management, 13(2), pp. 286-302.

Edgar, D., 1997. Capacity Management in the Short Break Market. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 9(2), pp. 55-59.

Greasley, A., 2007. Operations Management. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Klassen, K., and Rohleder, T., 2006. Demand and Capacity Management Decisions in Services: How they Impact on one another. International Journal of Operationas and Production Management, 22(5), pp. 527-548.

Nigel, S., Alistair, B., and Robert, J., 2011. Essentials of Operations Management. New York: Prentice Hall.

Pyscraft, M., 2000. Operations Management. New York: Pearsons.

Stevenson, W., 2009. Operations Managemnt. New York: Routledge.

Taylor, D., 2006. Demand Management in Agri-Food Supply Chains. International Journal of Logistics Management, 17(2), pp. 163-186.

Taylor, D., and Fearne, A., 2009. Demand Management in Fresh Food Value Chains:A Framework for Analysis and Improvement. International Journal of Supply Chain Management, 14(5), pp. 379-392.

Voss, C., Tsikriktsi, N., and Frohlich, M., 2002. Case Reserach in Operations Management. International Journal of Operations and Production Management, 22(2), pp. 195-219.

[supanova_question]

Barclays PLC Investment Decision Research Paper essay help: essay help

Brief history Barclays bank PLC was founded in 1690 in the City of London, which has remained its headquarters to date (Berclays Bank PLC). From a meager start, the company has gradually but steadily grown to become a key player in the banking industry. Through its parent company and a host of other subsidiary companies, the firm has diversified its services to investment and corporate banking, retail banking, credit cards, and wealth management.

Currently, the bank’s reputation is universally acclaimed, with a customer base of forty eight million customers in fifty countries. In 1902, the bank made a significant stride towards success when it became listed in the London securities exchange. The journey to the top has been long fought, but staying on top against the prevailing market competition is the company’s primary objective.

Current problem The ever-increasing competition in the bank’s traditional markets has let its management exploit other investment opportunities to ensure that the firm remains competitive. The bank’s management is considering investing in the Middle East market. Even though all the top managers support this decision, the option to pursue has proven hard to choose.

Investing in the Middle East market is suggested to take either direct foreign investment or mergers. Making a choice between the two options is not easy. As such, it is prudent to carry out a complete company analysis to see its ability to pursue either of the two options.

The bank’s long-term objectives The population in the Middle East is approximately 246 million people (Kublin). The bank plans to hold at least 10% of this population in 10 years. By doing so, the bank also plans to develop savings culture among its clients. It will also extend loan services to women groups to empower women in the region as a part of cooperate responsibility. The Middle East region has hit media headlines frequently for gender imbalance and male chauvinism. Other objectives the bank intends to pursue includes

Outreach: To reach many disadvantages people, especially women, who may find it hard securing loans through formal financial services.

Impact: To provide add-on services such as investment awareness campaigns and entrepreneurial training.

Inclusion: To provide tailored services which are accessible to the marginalized groups to ensure their financial security

The bank’s Investment options With little resources yet so many strategies to implement, evaluation is essential to ensure that only the most viable strategy is selected. In fact, evaluation of strategy options is the most important and complex part in the strategy process. This process focuses on the future of the firm, not the past. In view of the challenges Barclays is facing and the desire for a better future, the company considers implementing either or all of the following strategic options.

Exploit the Middle East market as a Foreign Direct Investment

Pursue mergers and acquisitions

Before making any decision on the best strategic option, the company’s analysis must be done. This will ensure that the chosen option is one that the company can finance. It will also help in eradicating the possibility of choosing a less viable investment option.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Company’s current position/situation Competitors

As an international firm, Barclays Bank faces stiff competition on the international platform. Most of its competitors are firms well endowed with financial might such as HSBC, Standard Chartered, Royal Bank of Scotland Group, and Lloyd Banking group. Remaining profitable in such a market is a formidable challenge that requires excellent strategic measures.

This far, the bank has been able to grow its customer base, thereby increasing its profitability, through offering relatively lower interest rates on loans, and more personalized customer experience. The table below gives a brief financial position of the bank in relation to competitors.

Table 1. Market value of competitors and their assets

Bank Headquarters Market Value As of 24 February 2011 $billion Assets As of 31 December 2008 $billion HSBC Canary Wharf 122.4 1,736 Lloyds Banking Group City of London 44.3 1,195 Royal Bank of Scotland Group Edinburgh 49.9 2,508 Standard Chartered City of London 37.1 299 Barclays Canary Wharf 38.3 2,320 Source London securities report 2008/2011

Resources and competencies

As shown in table 1, the bank’s assets were valued at $2,320 billion in 2008. Despite this being a considerable amount in the banking industry, the bank still trails other banks such as Royal Bank of Scotland Group, which has an asset base of $2,508 billion. With no financial dominance in the market, Barclays’ principal focus is in the quality of services rendered to its customers. This is a survival move aimed at remaining competitive. Other areas of the bank’s competence include

Provision of cheaper loan facilities

Concentrated branch networks easing accessibility

Well trained and groomed employees

Wide ATM network and online banking services

Efficient wealth management programme with a fast growing market base

Expectations of stakeholders

The company’s stakeholders include its creditors, shareholders, employees, government, customers, suppliers, community, and trade unions. These groups have an interest in the business operations, which must be fulfilled.

The government

The government expects the company to comply with tax obligation and to operate within the constitutional confines, which it has adhered to so far. Last year alone, the group remitted $1,928,000 as tax (Berclays Bank PLC).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Barclays PLC Investment Decision specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Employees

Employees expect competitive salaries, job security, honest communication, and safety concerns. Barclays employs approximately 146, 523 people globally. At the high of the economic depression of 2008, when many banks chose to lay off employees to cut down on their expenditure, Barclays instead chose to retain most of its employees but instead stopped expansion programmes. Together with a host of other incentives, Barclays has indeed put the interest of its employees at heart.

Community

Barclays bank has an extensive branch network spread all round the globe. In areas where branches are located, the local communities expect much from the company. The company’s obligation is, however, limited to offering job opportunities, environmental protection, and conservation, allocation of shares, and involvement in company’s decision-making process.

Creditors

Creditors expect renewal of their contracts, and liquidity.

Prospects

Barclays bank has excellent prospects for future success. Over the last few years, the bank’s profits have been on the increase. Even after the housing bubble burst that crippled many financial institutions, Barclays has remained stable financially.

Frankly, it can hardly get worse than that. Just when other financial institutions were still shaking off the effects of the housing bubble bust, Barclays posted a “staggering” $11.6 billion profit in 2009 (Wilson 12). Despite the grave effects of the Debt Evaluation Accounting Rules (DVA) to financial institutions, Barclays still has a lifeline because of it has a strong asset base, which it can dispose to settle some of its debts.

Review of company’s current position In the backdrop of the company’s current success lie many weaknesses and challenges. First, the bank has been issuing loans easily, which has resulted in numerous loses. In 2010 alone, the bank lost $1.2 billion in bogus loans (Wilson 14). The bank has also lost the favor of a few persons who feel it recklessly issued loans resulting in the global depression witnessed in 2008/9.

Worst still, the bank’s exclusive markets in Africa and South America are now prime targets for its competitors who have already cut a sizeable chunk of its UK market. Additionally, many markets have become price sensitive, thereby discouraging new products considered expensive. Lastly, the firm’s overreliance on European markets has proven a hindrance to considerable success.

Despite these challenges, the bank will still prevail. This is because most of these challenges cut across the banking industry and, therefore, spares no firm. Secondly, most of the bank’s strategic plans are already a step in the right direction, and if reinforced further, the results can be marvelous.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Barclays PLC Investment Decision by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For instance, the bank’s decision to invest in china was a step in the right direction since Chinese market is growing rapidly. Further, the economic depression that shrunk the company’s profits is easing, which means that the firm could do much better.

Analysis of the company’s investment options The viability of exploiting the Middle East market

The Middle East banking and capital markets authority are among the fastest growing in the world. This is backed by favorable banking rules, and growing population comprised primarily of the middle aged. The increased democratic space is another boost for interested investors.

The stringent rules that discouraged Direct Foreign Investment (DFI) in the region are slowly easing. This has opened up the Middle East for direct foreign investment and mergers. Barclays bank management should, therefore, grasp the presented opportunity and invest in the region.

Change in behavior trend among wealth business people in the Middle East is another reason to exploit the market. Many Arab investors, who until recently preferred investing in European countries have now chosen to invest, at least part of their money, in the local investment markets.

This has increased the customer base for the banking industry. As such, the bank will out rightly lose the withdrawn funds meant for local investment by continuing to have a strong presence in the European markets only. Therefore, by investing in the Middle East, the bank will still benefit from funds invested locally hence growing its capital and customer base.

In 2008 after the great economic depression that sunk many businesses and crippled many more, the UK government introduced an economic stimulus programme to bail out affected businesses. Being one of the affected businesses, Barclays was expected to receive the funding, but failed to accept the offer.

Instead, the company opted to seek its funding from the Middle East to offset its $ 6.5 billion debt (Davidson 32). This move sparked wide outcry from competitors. Nevertheless, it was a revelation for other businesses and investors. It showed that it was time to look up to the east not only for funding, but also for investment. Barclays has ties and links in the region and shall encounter few obstacles in its operations there.

Lastly, the projected growth of the Middle East is another compelling reason for investing in the region. The economies of many Middle East countries are predicted to grow considerably. A geographic segmentation analysis on Jordan and Saudi Arabia showed the countries’ robust growth in the next few years. Increased economic growth brings many marvelous things to businesses such as social amenities, improved security, and extra capital for citizens to spend. These are attractive to any business establishment.

The key challenges that the organization may face by investing in the Middle East market

Barclays faces a stiff competition in the European markets that finding alternative market is welcome news. However, this fantastic opportunity comes with a host of challenges.

Securing sufficient capital for investment

Many companies are still dusting themselves after the enormous economic depression of 2008/9, and Barclays is no exception. The firm is yet to recover fully from the effects of that devastating crisis. The crisis led the bank’s management to take drastic measures such as stopping of expansionist programmes and borrowing of colossal sums of money. The company is still repaying the borrowed funds, which has narrowed its finances.

Therefore, venturing in a new market will be a challenging task. As a bank, venturing in the Middle East will require capital for building banking halls, hiring employees, and installing security details. These are costs not easily met by any investor especially when many branches are to be built.

Competition

The Middle East market has a considerable number of potential customers, but there are some banks already operating in those markets. This may prove quite a challenge. Small banks are known for developing a closer relationship with their clients than established ones.

Leahy claims, “The increasing sophisticated number of products available means that clients sometimes contact banks they know well for impartial advice, regardless of whether the bank is offering the product” (31). This is an indication that breaking customer loyalty may prove hard.

Trade laws and policies

The legal requirements of doing business in a country are the regulations set by the country’s government for investors to abide by to avoid arrest or business fines arising from noncompliance. Breaking some of these laws may even lead to complete closure of business. Countries such as Taiwan have strict rules and trade regulations, which discourage foreign direct investment.

Venturing in such markets may require other alternative methods, which could be limited. Worst still some countries have trade laws in place that are international accepted as just, but their application is selective. Such countries are strict on foreign companies operating with their borders, but slow on locally owned businesses.

Culture

Culture is extremely valuable to business because it influences individuals buying behavior, affects demand for specific products, and brand image. Every business must be able to understand the cultural orientation of its customers to maximize on its sales. As the company scramble for the Middle East market share, its management must realize the need to understand and embrace the culture of the Middle East people to win their trust and make sales.

Political stability

The prospects of doing business in Middle East may be hugely attractive, but investing in the region could be disastrous due to political uncertainties. Political environment has an enormous impact on distribution, sales, and promotion of a company’s products. Therefore, every company that desires to invest in a foreign country must keenly monitor the political climate of the country and consider the possible effects of change in government.

This is because business policies and attitude towards foreign investors change with a change in government. These changes can be either in favor of foreign investment, thereby offering attractive opportunities, or against it thereby introducing stringent measures such as import quotas and increased taxes. Therefore, investing countries such as Syria could be great risk taking.

Possible ways of countering the challenges

Financial constraint

The company should issue more shares to raise the required funds to solve this problem. Chances are high that if shares are floated, public participation will be marvelous considering that the company’s dividend per share was six in 2011 (Berclays Bank PLC).

Competition

There is no one certain method of beating the competition. However, with the right approach such as providing free ATM withdrawals, the bank may make penetrations and win customers.

Culture

The business in the Middle East is mostly relationship driven. Business in the Middle East demands developing a good relationship with the people of the region understanding their culture. It is hard to make a sale by simply presenting a product to potential buyers without developing the relationship first.

This is contrary to western cultures where businesspersons make sales first and then develop relationship later. Understanding of culture and its influence on business operations require analysis of cultural elements such as ethnic language groups, social structure, religion, education, economic philosophy, and political philosophy.

Pursuing mergers and acquisitions

The business environment is dynamic. Mergers and acquisitions are usual occurrences in the life of any growing business. The decision on acquisition or merger is often undertaken to pool resources together in order to improve the quality of service delivery and products. Mergers and acquisitions are distinct.

When a company purchases another company, in cash or shares, it is an acquisition. The acquired company is viewed as a potential source of benefits such as new customers, technology, or patent. Mergers on the other hand, involve joining two or more companies into a larger one. However, the assumptions and expectations of forming a merger are the same as those of acquisitions.

M

[supanova_question]

Policy Setting in Job Training Programs Analytical Essay online essay help

Introduction Employment and Job training program is a valuable tool for ensuring organizations, and even nations at large, gain in terms of increased workers’ productivity. From the dimension of the workers, employment and the on-job training programs are beneficial in the sense that, they result to investment in workers’ abilities and careers, often improving them in the course of execution of such programs. For fresh graduates, employment and job training programs provide them with an amicable opportunity to both learn and work.

For the purposes of realization of these benefits, it is critical that organizations, in both public and private sectors, develop effective policies that guide proper and smooth running of employment and job training programs. The question is, thus, how should it be done? Assuming the position of an external policy analyst, the paper seeks to answer this interrogative.

Akin to development of employment and on job training programs policies, within organizations, is the need to distinguish between two technical terms learning and training. Friedlander and Robbins argue, “Training’ suggests putting stuff into people, when in essence we should be developing people from the inside out, so they achieve their own individual potential – what they love and enjoy, what they are most capable of, and strong at doing, rather than what we try to make them be” (923).

Based on this argument, it is perhaps plausible to argue also that training is the province of organization’s concerns while learning is the concern of people working for the organization on an individual basis. This infers that learning is chiefly an outcome of training, which can be achieved or fail to be achieved, depending on the trainee’s levels of interest and intellectual abilities.

Consequently, the paper proposes that employment and job training policies need to be formulated and implemented, in such a way that, such peculiar differences, amongst the target persons, are well addressed in the attempt to achieve enormous success of employment and job training programs.

While formulating employment and job training policies, it is critical that substantive flexibility is provided. The paper argues that flexibility in policies development and enactment is relevant in the sense of making sure that mechanisms of incorporating dynamic changes, in terms of technological innovation in the programs, are provided.

This implies that, problems should be redefined whenever an attempt is made to derive a new approach in deploying job training programs, in seeking to improve the productivity of the organizational workforce. However, any employment and job training program policy needs to be structured such that, it always defines the problem at hand, considers philosophical and cultural perspectives of the organization (guiding principles, values, ethos, and visions among others), and people (their abilities and financial limitations).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, it should define legal contexts (in terms of discrimination, safety and health); methods of career development, recruitment, succession and selection; financial planning; and social responsibility perspectives (diversity, environment, ethics, sustainability and social corporate responsibility among others).

Training program timing, scale and geographical factors, methods of measuring and evaluating policy achievements, and system tools, among others also need factoring in the policy formulation, implementation and evaluation phases.

With this in mind, this paper focuses on policy development in the area of employment and job training programs. The paper begins by considering problem definition, followed by policy goal setting, then policy tools, and finally, consideration of probability of the proposed policy ability to get into an agenda.

Problem definition Upon passing of the 1961 area redevelopment act in the U.S., policymakers embanked on reshaping and also endeavoring to upgrade skills coupled with employment prospects of people who garnered low income via employment and job training programs that were highly publicized. Many of these programs kicked off their concerns, by availing vocational training opportunities to people, who were displaced and dislocated before shifting in covering people who lived in poverty.

Many of the persons, regarded as weak in the vocational training programs, were largely economically disadvantaged in the sense that, they had a long history that was ideally poor. As Friedlander and Robbins note, “during the 1960s the menu of services provided to economically disadvantaged people expanded, but since that time their variety and content have not changed very much” (927). However, the goals and orientations of employment and job training programs in the U.S. policies can be argued as having shifted incredibly.

For example, within the last four decades, training programs policymakers have indeed changed their emphasis with regard to low costs as opposed to services that are high cost in nature with regard to the extent in which they serve the interests of the unemployed people who often are economically disadvantaged. Much change has also been realized, in the context of such programs capacity, to serve youths in comparison to adults, particularly dropouts of high schools.

The main problem is that such programs fail to produce substantive earning and or employment gains among the youths. This problem is widely supported by the results of non-experimental evaluations coupled with alternative social experiment program models with the exception of findings of Job Corps program. Friedlander and Robbins reckon, “Some evaluations, including one experimental evaluation, report that Job Corp programs services modestly increase participants’ employment rates and earnings” (933).

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Policy Setting in Job Training Programs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The services provided by Job Corps are, however, expensive but comprehensive in nature. The ability of the Job Corps’ employment training program to produce positive results is indeed, however, impacted by the fact that cost benefits analysis show that earnings increase derived from Job Corps training fails to justify the costs incurred in conducting the trainings. Ideally then on margin, chances are that the society may be better off in case the employment training resources could have been channeled to adults other than youths.

Statistically, expenditures on employment training program in the U.S. amount to 0.1 to 0.2 of the GDP depending on the nature of the program being implemented (Heckman, LaLonde, and Smith 43). Almost all other OECD member countries spend much more than the U.S. on employment training program as a share of their GDP (Heckman, LaLonde, and Smith 47).

By considering the magnitude of poverty in comparison to wages inequalities among economically disadvantaged people- who are often targeted by employment and job training programs, it becomes challenging and often sheds light on why training program produces little impact on wages structure and or output. Employment and training programs, with regard to the policies establishing them, they ought not to affect the well-being of participants, on average.

Apparently, based on evaluations, existing programs fails to integrate participants in the realm of the economic mainstream. Indeed even though job training programs may be primarily argued as effective in conducting training, from the workers dimension depending on the differences existing between various people especially their learning abilities, they may fail to ensure that workers indeed learn as intended.

Consequently, amid making people disadvantaged economically less poor, the programs may fail to reduce poverty levels substantially, yet this aim is their noble role. Surprisingly enough, majorities of the programs are executed under lower costs per participant, than the annual cost of normal schooling.

Heckman, LaLonde, and Smith exemplify this point by asserting, “In 1997, programs operated under the Job Training Partnership Act (JTPA) spent on average about $3,000 per participant” (82). Arguably then, anticipating employment and training program to hike productivity output per participant to a sufficient level so that yearly earning escalate, by for instances thousands of dollars, infers that social investments need to have internal return rates that are extraordinary.

In the modern-day, technologies deployed in organizations incredibly change virtually almost overnight. It is thus almost impossible to anticipate that, skills transferred to the population, through formal schooling, would do much such dynamic. Evidently, a mechanism of ensuring that workers remain updated with the emerging innovative technologies and methods of production, especially the ones that reduce production costs, is indispensable.

Essentially, such knowledge is more likely to be transferred to people through employment and training programs that to date forms a concern of every organization that seeks to remain competitive. Reforms of employment and training policies are thus not an option, but a must for embracement by organizations.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Policy Setting in Job Training Programs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This aspect is perhaps largely significant by considering that, the question of effectiveness of employment and training program are likely to attract large public interest, especially by noting that, creativity and innovation are the key drivers of modern economies. Arguably, continuous training is the core of workers productivity output improvement. One of the most plausible ways of ensuring that employees continuously learn is the deployment of vocational training in every sector of production-something many nations have ardently embraced.

However, change of policies governing vocational training is essential to make the current vocational training program more effective. To resolve the problem of failure, of employment and training programs to produce substantive earning and or employment gains among the youths, calls for change of the vocational training programs from being voluntary to mandatory.

However, these trainings consume money and hence, the government essentially needs to either fund them on differed payment mode or treat then as part of essential services it provides to the citizens free of charge. Where charging is necessary, then, temporary assistance to needy families needs being considered.

Policy goal setting The goal of developing vocational training policy by declaring that, it is mandatory for every student to attend mandatory vocational education and training program, in the due course of his or her education, is pegged on the idea of improving chances of students being considered for jobs upon clearing their formal education.

Students, who have attended technical and vocational training programs, have experience on their line of specialization and hence are better placed to handle responsibilities delegated to them with minimal on the job training. Additionally, the goal of making such a policy is based on the belief that by placing students on mandatory vocational training program, they would get a lid of stereotyping associated with their careers.

This has the consequences of making them develop impression that is realistic in relation to their careers of choice. Moreover, students would get acquaintance with their specialties’ “culture of industry and commerce, to develop the students understanding of the role and functions of different employees within an organization and to provide the discipline of employment” (Conger 30).

Making technical and vocational training mandatory is necessary, especially by considering that, experience has shown that technical and vocational training institutions have an immense opportunity of having their students placed, as compared to other students who do not attend such programs. In this essence, the goal of making technical and vocational training mandatory is to ensure that students become demand-driven, dynamic, competitive, at both national and international levels, and quality conscious.

Ensuring that students develop abilities to respond to work environmental dynamics would apparently mitigate the challenges previously encountered in training programs over the first two decades of the last four decades in which upon conducting on the job training, minimal results were obtained in terms of increased workers productivity outputs in comparison to the costs incurred during the training forums.

Even though setting the goals of making technical and vocational training mandatory may sound as having the capacity of providing students with mechanisms of being recruited for jobs quick enough upon completion of the formal studies, several nations experience a number of drawback towards institutionalization of technical and vocational training programs. For instance, in India, technical and vocational training has been widely acclaimed as having the ability to improve the output of new job entrants.

However, technical and the vocational training program policies have experienced immense challenges, because in India, there exists low priorities amongst the citizens for vocational training, insufficient industries for linkages, inadequate trainers and teachers, and non-existence of vertical mobility.

Moreover, India boasts inflexible curriculum, non-agreement of various agencies, and absence of overall social appreciation of the roles of vocational education, among others. Application of the policy declaring that technical education and vocational training are mandatory needs also to embrace certain aspects in its formulation if at all the goals of vocational education and training are to be meet precisely.

These aspects include; expansion and upgrading of vocational training and education, expansion and upgrading of technical and higher education, promotion of research in institutions of education and also redesigning patterns of education at school levels to ensure that skills development is facilitated.

Government being the primary organ charged with ensuring the successful implementation of policies applicable at national fronts, on its part needs to ensure that vocational training and education program polices are fully implemented by declaring its roles precisely. Within the broader goals of making technical and vocational training mandatory, a government needs to strengthen, reinforce, and reform vocational training and education.

It also needs to enact extra policies that ensure the capacity of technical and vocational training is expanded, by incorporation of the private sector coupled with promotion of academia and industry interaction, in the endeavor to ensure that, the gaps that may exist between skilled labor demand and supply is magnificently narrowed.

Policy tools Policy tools are essentially engineered to serve as a variety of various evaluation approaches often applicable in the broadest probable application. The main objective of putting in place tools for policy evaluations is to derive the fundamental foundation of basing possible reforms on the proposed policy. In education policies formulation and implementation, there exist several reasons as to why policy tools need being set in place.

One of the reasons is “to assess the nature and magnitude of the opportunities and constraints that face the systems that provide education and training” (Fetterman 18). Secondly, policy tools enable both private sector and the government to establish priorities in the allocation of resources for implementation of resource-constrained policies that are of national interest.

This reason is enormously crucial while determining the capacity of likelihood of success of a policy seeking to make technical and vocational training mandatory and part of educational curriculum in the U.S. This move is particularly significant, since as argued before, for success of such a policy there needs to be heavy channeling of resources to according temporary assistance to needy families.

Upon identification of the constraints, mechanisms of dealing with the constraints are enacted, and hence providing the basis for weighing possible options. Tools and instruments essential for implementation of the policy, stated herein as, “every person shall undergo mandatory technical vocational and training program as part of her or his qualification requirement”, must have cost elements ingrained in them.

This means that justification of costs for running such a policy in relation to the anticipated economic gain is relevant. Therefore, in this context, policy tools are indeed not only mechanism of reflecting outcomes of a given policy, but also a way of providing informed guidance in an attempt of categorization of a policy as relevance or irrelevant both in public and private domains.

Bearing in mind the cumbersome process of making policies in the U.S., providing the platforms of classification of the policy this way, may provide a more competitive edge for resulting in the consideration of the proposed policy in the agenda. Apparently, if the policy is not included in the agenda, it cannot proceed to the next phases before it is approved. In attempting to push for the implementation of the policy, desirability and affordability are somewhat critical elements for consideration.

The argument for desirability is that, technical and vocational training follows systematic procedures, just like any other form of education, and thus it could have myriads of benefits and desirable effects. Reforms in polices are intended to ensure improvement of outcomes from the contexts of quality and quantity of outcomes.

Data providing evidence of investments, in technical and vocational training capacity to result in enhanced economic growth and increment, in employment rates could, in this end, support the desirability of making technical and vocational training mandatory. However, as previously argued, this endeavor would call for substantive government funding.

Ideally then, pegged on the need to contemplate on the aspects of opportunity cost incurred if the policy is negated from inclusion in the agenda often would provide a coercive force to the policymakers who are mindful to the welfare of the society especially while choosing between beneficial and most beneficial policies for inclusion in the agenda.

On the other hand, consideration of costs as a critical tool for ensuring successful implementation calls for taking into account valid dimensions of costs attributed to making technical and vocational training mandatory. These costs are either direct costs, for example, payments of salaries of technical and vocational trainers and teachers, and the costs of financing temporary assistance to needy families’ kitty or indirect costs.

Indirect costs would entail aspects, such as costs for failing to provide financial incentives to needy families and or reduction in total payments payable at technical and vocational training institutions, as reflected in the in economic indicators, such as levels of unemployment and living standards of people.

More importantly, analysis of costs needs to go beyond financial costs and involve political and social capital, among others. Consideration of costs as a tool for promoting the relevance of the policy, arguably entails putting policies makers in conditions of substantive evaluations and considerations of various possible policies for inclusion in the agenda which if not addressed would translate into increased indirect cost in future. This means then that the policy tool relies heavily on information availability and persuasions.

Assessment of likelihood of incorporation of the policy in the agenda Getting an issue into a plan is one of the essential steps in policy development to address certain perceived social problems. This implies that unless an issue appears on an agenda, addressing it in a policy becomes a nightmare (Birkland 59). In fact, a lot of research has been done, by scholars, to determine the processes of getting issues into an agenda, coupled with issues that make an agenda and when such issues deserve to form part of an agenda.

Despite the fact that numerous conditions that impair people’s abilities to contextualize issues relating to justice and fairness exist, evidently, not every condition is a problem requiring government interventions through policies. Unemployment is indeed a social challenge not only in the U.S. but also across the globe. Particularly, during recession, organizations prefer retaining workers who are highly productive to have high levels of output, while ensuring that cost of production is maintained as low as possible.

With the conceptualization of this economic argument, and with justification of the fact that unemployment constitutes a social problem and that vocational training and education may increase chances of job selection coupled with hiking economic growth, getting the policy into an agenda is widely possible.

However, challenges may be encountered, especially considering the cumbersomeness of policymaking process of the U.S. This aspect is perhaps significant by considering that, in some situation, some issues are considered as issues, while others are treated as non-issues, and hence hardly make it to the agenda list.

Some issues are more likely to get into the agenda than others are. Among the reasons, why some issues do not make it to the agenda level includes problem definition, crowding an issue with other issues; the problem may be an illegitimate concern of the state, non-decision making and issues irrelevancy.

The seriousness of issues is expressed in their definition. Poorly defined problems would consequently end up neglected in the agendas. However, even though the problem may have been defied properly, its concerns may be irreverent to the state. However, it is anticipated that in the attempt to make vocational education and training mandatory in the U.S., the link between it and increased productivity indeed would make the policy being considered as an issue.

Perhaps, by considering the concept of non-decision-making issues raised by a Bachrach and Baratz, it is apparent why some issues end up as being agendas while others do not. As Bachrach and Baratz reckon, “non-decision making in a power context is based on the presumption that political consensus is commonly shaped by status quo defenders, exercising their power resources and operated to prevent challenges to their values and interests” (901).

A social condition, which attracts keen interests from the wider society, constitute a social problem, which needs solution often arrived at, after the issue of concern is incorporated in a public agenda. However, some issues that attract immense public interest are non-issues, perhaps because the concerned population may lack the ability to site solution as they may lack the power to do so (Birkland 87).

Even if solutions are available, they may largely violate the interests and the status quo of those influential figures that would set the mechanisms of enabling the incorporation of the issue into an agenda. This implies that, though a social condition may be an agenda issue, the larger population may be forced to embrace it as part of their lives since they are incapacitated to push for likely solutions to it.

A fear is also expressed that, the concerns of vocational training and fostering placement of fresh graduates may be treated as non-issues, and thus produce an impediment for the policy being incorporated in the agenda. Several reasons would account for this fear.

In the debate of whether it is relevant making vocational education and training mandatory or not, it is anticipated it would derive many disagreements among policymakers especially considering the hefty costs that go into it in terms of provision of temporary assistance to the needy families to meet its costs, and this scenario breeds fear.

However, taking a condition entailing “actual disagreements in preferences among two or more groups” (Bachrach and Baratz 904) as comprising an issue is confusing. The question is, even if disagreements exist, do they attract the attention of the wider society.

If so, does the wider society have the power to solicit suggested solution? In addition, if so, is the power limited to the extent that it does not violate the status quo of those in power? Any precondition for compliance with the two queries may make an issue end up being a non-issue and in the context of making vocational training and education mandatory, hinder it from getting into the agenda.

Conclusion In the paper, it has been argued that employment and job training programs are a valuable tool for ensuring organizations and even nations at large gain in terms of increased workers’ productivity. Research proves that employment and job-training program raises the probabilities of job recruitments among people.

Investment in technical and vocational training is arguably one of the ways of enhancing employment and job training programs in the U.S. From this assertion; the paper proposes that in the U.S., a policy that makes technical and vocational training mandatory needs to be enacted. However, the success, of putting such a policy into an agenda, is challenging, considering the cumbersomeness of the policymaking process in the U.S. Hence, substantive tools need to be put in place, for ensuring that the proposed policy gets into an agenda.

Apart from clear and concise problem definition in a manner that it amounts to a social problem and hence worth public attention, consideration of elements such as cost and benefit of making technical and vocational training mandatory may indeed play a crucial role in facilitating articulation of the policy into the agenda. For these reasons, the paper has paid incredible attention in problem definition, goal setting, and the examination of policy tools by assuming the position of an external policy analyst.

Works Cited Bachrach, Peter, and Morton Baratz. “Power And Its Two Faces Revisited: Reply To Geoffrey Debman.” American Political Science Review 69.3 (1975): 892-904. Print.

Birkland, Thomas. After Disaster: Agenda Setting, Public Policy, And Focusing Events. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press, 2008. Print.

Conger, Stuart. Policies Guidelines for Educational and Vocational Training. Paris: UNESCO, 2006. Print.

Fetterman, Martins. Foundations of Empowerment Evaluation. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications, 2000. Print.

Friedlander, Douglas, and Paul Robbins. Evaluating Program Evaluations: New Evidence on Commonly Used Non-Experimental Methods. American Economic Review 85.4 (1995): 923–937. Print.

Heckman, Johnston, Duncan Lalonde, and James Smith. The Economics and Econometrics of Active Labor Market. Amsterdam: North Holland, 1999. Print.

[supanova_question]

Why Kuwaiti Youth are Reluctant About Using Public Libraries Proposal college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction The Ministry of Islamic Affairs in Kuwait accurately notes that the reading culture has declined in Kuwait. In past centuries, Middle Easterners dominated the world owing to their knowledge –seeking culture. However, this is no longer true; few Kuwaitis have cultivated a reading culture, let alone young people. Several issues could have led to this situation, and one of them is the underuse of public libraries. This paper will concentrate on the reasons behind young people’s reluctance to use public libraries in Kuwait.

Background and statement of the problem Public libraries play an important role in furnishing a nation with knowledge and information. If citizens do not use these invaluable resources, then the consequences will be felt across all industries. Not only will such a culture impede development, but it can also affect the social and political climate in the country. Citizens from countries with poor reading cultures tend to engage in unconstructive and immature discussions; they are less likely to vote wisely and may even start civil conflicts.

It is definitely in their best interest to expand their knowledge base by using public libraries. Young people should be given particular attention because they will eventually become leaders or persons of authority. Besides, it is easier to influence or teach young people to love reading than it is to do the same for an older generation. Once the reasons behind young people’s reluctance to use public libraries are found, then stakeholders can address those concerns and move towards the creation of a reading culture.

In Kuwait, various reports indicate that the general public has a poor reading culture. Furthermore, few of them use public libraries in order to expand their knowledge base. The situation is particularly alarming because of censorship laws that exist in the country. The Kuwait Times reports that local bookstores and other public forums provide Kuwaitis with minimal options. The kinds of books found are narrow in focus and they rarely offer new perspectives on life (Al-Qatari, 2010).

This could be part of the reason why young people are not flocking to public libraries. Alternatively, different categories of readers require different types of genres. For instance, very young readers may prefer comic books or well-illustrated narratives.

On the other hand, college or university attendants may look for mentally-stimulating material, yet these may be hard to find in public libraries. Sometimes, logistical issues may impede the youth from using these facilities. They may have difficulties in accessing the libraries, or may find minimal assistance when they get inside them.

In other instances, young people may avoid public libraries owing to external factors that have little to do with them. The mass media has a large role to play in this regard. Few outlets nurture the country’s reading culture by promoting and interviewing authors. Additionally, state-sponsored book fairs are few and far-between. Alternatively, the education level in several learning institutions could also contribute to this fact.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some students may prefer to use their school libraries for research. On the other hand, others may not have been taught about the importance of using these facilities or may lack knowledge about their existence.

Some may even suffer from reading deficiencies, so it may prevent them from using the libraries. Since all these issues exist in Kuwait, it is imperative to determine which ones directly affect the use of public libraries so as to provide a solution to the problem. Once an explanation of a problem has been found, then it is quite easy to solve it.

Research questions and objectives The main research question will be “Why are young people reluctant about using public libraries in Kuwait?”. This research question can be paraphrased as a research objective, that is, “To assess the reasons behind young people’s reluctance to use public libraries in Kuwait”. The main research objective will be divided into the following specific objectives:

To asses whether proximity of public libraries causes reluctance to use the facilities among Kuwaiti youth.

To investigate the relationship between limited book collections in Kuwaiti public libraries and students’ reluctance to use them

To assess whether ignorance about existence of public libraries causes young people’s reluctance to use them

To determine if perceived self-incompetence about the use of public libraries in Kuwait prevents young people from going there.

To examine whether the use of the internet as a source of information makes students unwilling to use public libraries.

To determine the extent to which young people substitute public libraries with university or school libraries.

To assess whether poor reading abilities lead to young people’s reluctance to use public libraries in Kuwait.

To analyze the relationship between poor public library assistance/ services and reluctance to use public libraries among young people in Kuwait.

Study design This will be a correlational study. It will seek to determine the degree of correlation between a dependent variable and an independent one. The dependent variable in all the specific research objectives is reluctance to use public libraries among young people in Kuwait.

The independent variables in the specific research questions are: proximity of public libraries, low diversity of book collections, ignorance about existence of public libraries, perceived self-incompetence about the use of public libraries, preference for school libraries or university libraries, preference for the internet and poor library assistance or services. The aim will be to establish whether there is a relationship between these parameters.

No manipulation of the variables will be done, as in an experiment. Only information will be obtained from participants about the existence of these relationships. After the correlations are established, then only the independent variables that show a positive relationship with the dependent variable (reluctance to use Kuwaiti public libraries by young people) will be considered.

These independent variables will be identified as the main reasons behind young people’s reluctance to use public libraries in Kuwait. In other words, the paper will be a quantitative research. Responses will be quantified and analyzed in order to determine the strength of the relationship.

We will write a custom Proposal on Why Kuwaiti Youth are Reluctant About Using Public Libraries specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Literature review Most studies on reluctance of young people to use public libraries have been carried out in western countries. Few of them look at this problem in Middle Eastern nations, let alone Kuwait. Therefore, this paper will attempt to bridge that gap by looking at the contextual and geographical issues that may be causing this low use of public libraries among young people.

Since most of the papers on this topic have been carried out in western states, then most of them make a series of assumptions about the social and political context of the situation. For instance, few of them have cases of book-censorship; therefore, diversity of book genres is never a challenge in their public libraries. Alternatively, their public libraries may be better-stocked than their school libraries so few of them may prefer the latter over the former. This is the reason why it is necessary to look at the topic in the local context of Kuwait.

When one analyses the researches that have been carried in this area, most of them focus on one aspect of library use such as information seeking. A paper written by Lee et al. (2004) wanted to find out why students are reluctant to ask questions in libraries, and it found that they are afraid of exposing their inadequacies.

Another one carried out by Dee and Stanley (2005) wanted to assess the patterns of library use among nursing students. It was found that most of them preferred print resources and common internet websites due to their lack of database-related computer skills. These two studies are useful in understanding patterns of library use but one of them is overly inclined towards electronic sources (Dee and Stanley, 2005).

The other one already assumes that students use public libraries and only concerns itself with patterns of use inside the public libraries (Lee et al., 2004). This research will bridge the gap by analyzing why young people do not go to public libraries in the first place. One particular research that was done in Kuwait concerning public library use only focused on the use information technology in those libraries and did not address why users may not visit them in the first place (Al-Qallaf and Al-Azmi 2002).

This research, however, provides information about some of the possible reasons behind reluctance such as poor services in the libraries. The lack of IT in public libraries in Kuwait indicates that the services are still wanting in Kuwait. A report made by Al-Qatari (2010) indicated that censorship was one of the reasons why people had a poor reading culture in Kuwait. The source provides a social explanation for the poor use of public services, but this research will attempt to look for other personal reasons behind this pattern of use.

Other papers have focused on how to attract reluctant readers in general. Some of them include Crawford (2004), Krashen (2005) and Haugaard (1973). These researches suggest the use of comic books as possible solutions to the problem of having a poor reading culture. The above papers can be inferred to this research by using their suggestions. One can deduce that poor book choice or the limited collections in public libraries is the problem being addressed in the latter studies.

That reason will be utilized as an independent variable in the proceeding research. Other analyses have found that poverty is an important determinant of book accessibility and hence reading (Feitelson and Goldstein, 1986 and Duke 2000). One can deduce from these analyses that ill-equipped libraries or accessibility of public libraries is another determinant of underuse in public libraries. The above findings will guide the research project under discussion.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Why Kuwaiti Youth are Reluctant About Using Public Libraries by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Study population and sampling. The study population will consist of young people in Kuwait between the ages of 18 and 30. These young people will be located in shopping malls, restaurants and eateries, cyber cafes and other entertainment centers. The other source will be universities from all over the country. Since this is a relatively large number, then it will be necessary to narrow down the number of participants through the use of sampling techniques.

It will be quite difficult to know the total number of young people that visit eateries, restaurants and other entertainment centers. Therefore, participants will be selected using haphazard sampling. No statistical method will be used, so only the most convenient people will be used. Here, willing subjects will be asked to get involved in the research, and the research will be administered. 30 participants people will be randomly collected from this segment of the population.

However, young people from universities will be selected through stratified sampling (Horn, 2009). In this process, the number of persons between the ages of 18 and 30 will be obtained from each of the universities, then their names will be arranged in alphabetical order. The total population size in each university will be divided by the desired sample size: In this case it will be 30. Thereafter, the ratio will represent the nth element; this may be 100 or 40. If n is 100, then every 100th person will be contacted for the research.

Data collection This research will use structured questionnaires. The method was selected because it will ensure uniform responses as no subjective selection of responses will be necessary (Babbie, 2005).

The questionnaires will be personally administered so as to increase response rates and also to clarify possible misunderstandings about the questions. The questions used in the research will be complemented using the Likert scale. Each question will possess five items: Agree, Disagree, Strongly agree, strongly disagree and neutral (do not agree or disagree).

Data analysis All the nine specific objectives will have corresponding questions in the questionnaire form. The responses will be analyzed through their central tendencies. In other words, their modes will be found through percentiles. They will be represented on bar charts so as to nullify or confirm the hypotheses inherent in all the research objectives.

Ethical considerations The use of Likert scales always creates biases in central tendencies, where subjects refrain from extreme responses. Alternatively, others may give responses that make them appear more rational. In order to avoid these challenges in questionnaire responses, it will be necessary to combine both negative and positive statements in the form (Burns and Burns, 2008).

Issues about getting equal representation from the group in the social settings will be a problem. To deal with inefficiency, all the thirty subjects will be selected from 30 different locations and all of them will come from different towns in Kuwait that have public libraries.

Not all the subjects will understand the questions in the same way, they may act like they understand and select an answer when they do not fully grasp what the questions mean. To reduce this problem, respondents will be approached when alone so as to minimize the tendency to impress other individuals. Besides that, the researcher will observe their body language so as to assess whether they understand things.

Conclusion This research aims at determining the reasons behind young people’s reluctance to use public libraries in Kuwait. It will solve the problem of having a poor reading culture by offering. For data collection, personally administered structured questionnaires will be used so as to ensure uniformity, higher response rates and question clarification for participants.

References Al-Qatari, H. (2010). Of sense and censorship. Kuwait Times. Web.

Al-Qallaf, C. and Al-Azmi, H. (2002). Information technology in Public Libraries in Kuwait. The International Information and Library Review 34(4), 289-308.

Babbie, E. (2005). The basics of social research. Belmont, CA: Thomson Wadsworth.

Burns, A.

[supanova_question]

Social World Conflicts and Its Resolution Styles Analytical Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents Former Conflict Style

Current Conflict Style

Resolution

References

Conflict is a major subject in the world and its effects are very diverse in the society causing crisis and other effects. Conflict can be viewed as a disagreement through which the parties involved perceive a threat to their needs, interests or concerns (About Conflict, 2012). In this definition, the key terms are parties, perceive and threat. In any conflict, there must be people or entities involved who have interest in a particular thing like political power, mineral resources and other socio economic activities.

This conflict is said to be from a perceived threat which may be a real threat or something that is imagined but because of lack of understanding of the real situation. Threat in this way means a feeling that what they think is theirs may be taken away or they feel that once certain people get something, they will treat them unfairly.

In the lifetime of a human being, there are situations that lead one to disagreements and struggle in getting something they need in their lives or at the work place. Because of the demands of life and the desire for self actualization, people tend to avoid impediments. If a person or anything is perceived to be an impediment to the journey of self actualization, then a conflict arises. This not only experienced by human beings but also in the animal planet, it’s only that they may not be having a conflict resolution mechanism but the jungle rule.

Another situation is when wild animals and human beings are living in bordering pieces of land as in the boundary between a national park and the general public land. In a number of cases of the world, animals are not checked and controlled by the national park management, which implies that animals may destroy or even kill human beings around that area. This is also a conflict.

However, in this paper, the discussion on conflict is based on the social world and how it is handled. That is why concentration is on conflict resolution styles. Conflict styles are patterned responses that people use in conflict. They can be viewed as having two dimensions which are assertiveness and cooperativeness (Picard, 2002).

In this manner, one can be able to assess the extent to which people attempt to satisfy other people’s needs to avoid or resolve their conflicts. These styles are pegged on personal satisfaction while making a decision of whether one has wronged the other.

Former Conflict Style There are various conflict styles that a person can adapt. In these styles, there is one that comes naturally in a human being and it can be referred to as the default conflict style. About conflict website (2012) lists four styles of conflicts namely “avoidance, collaborating, competitive, comprising and accommodating. In a number of cases it and be necessary to apply all of them in different situations.” For the case of this paper, avoidance and collaboration are discussed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Runde (2007) asserts that avoiding involves a low level of interest in meeting the needs of either person. An example of this type of conflict situation is when a husband asks his wife to cook for him and the wife assumes that she has not heard. The husband repeats the same question while the wife tells him that the food is in the kitchen. The husband decides to go and cook for himself and avoids confronting the real issue.

He does not ask himself why the wife does not want to cook for him. Instead, he avoids her and continues with life normally. The problem might have been solved at that point when the conflict started and could be due to some underlying issues.

However, this conflict style may look okay because everybody is for himself hence, nobody disturbs the other but it is what one may call a time bomb. The problem remains unresolved until it becomes too big to handle. A time comes when the bomb explodes and everything is exposed. It could be a better idea to confront the issue in a different way so that the problem is solved.

The reason for adopting this type of conflict style be based on a family upbringing whereby, the parents are always in conflict and the children have nothing to do about it. Therefore, the best way is to avoid the scene where mum and dad are quarrelling and move to your room.

You will definitely be back when they finish. This way, you will learn to avoid the situation unknowingly and this may be part of you. In a leadership role, this conflict style does not work well because at the end of the day, the problem has to be solved. Applying this style is very dangerous like a detonative device.

A personal experience is illustrated below. A teacher was teaching in a class of forty five students. Every time at the middle of the lesson, a student clicked and the teacher ignored because he didn’t want to get involved in finding out why somebody could click in the middle of a lesson. This went on for quite some time coupled with murmuring. The teacher still ignored his students.

This act finally degenerated to a more embarrassing and disgusting event to the teacher because the students walked out of the class while he was teaching. Later on, he realized that he was losing most of the students while he was teaching or rather delivering his content. It would have been wise for him to try to find out why the students were clicking in class. Maybe, he should have created rapport with the students so that he can get feedback so as to avoid such a situation.

We will write a custom Essay on Social World Conflicts and Its Resolution Styles specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Current Conflict Style Collaboration is a conflict style which if well used, will enable both parties to be satisfied. Lussier (2011) asserts that the key to collaborative style is agreeing that the solution picked is the best possible one. Thus, a win situation is achieved. Harmony is achieved when this approach is used, thus encouraging people to work together. In most cases, work place communication does not tickle down properly to the work force that is the lead.

Because of this conflict, usually arise from the workers and the management. The worker may decide to use avoidance conflict style and thus, affecting their performance. The management has to give notice that it needs to communicate well and in time to the employees so as to avoid a bad situation.

Through delegation of duties to the junior staff, one can be able to identify the problems that may be in the lower cadres of the work force. For best performance of the company, an agreement has to be reached by both the management and junior workers (Lussier, 2011).

In this case, the worker will be able to know what they are limited to and what their rights and responsibilities to the company. If a manager will be in a position to work with the workers and see him/herself as the team leader and not the boss then collaborative style may not work well. And this is the style to adopt in leadership.

Resolution The above conflict styles tend to explain how to handle situations before they degenerate to a crisis. If a conflict is persistent, then it needs to be resolved. And there are various ways of resolving conflicts. Depending on when and where the conflict is, the use of tools like mediation and assertion may help.

Think of a situation whereby, employees have gone on strike, the employee will first try to use assertion to make the employees go back to work. However, employees have a right to withdraw their services for better work conditions. When the strike persists, mediation technique may be used to resolve the conflict. Trade unions and the labour ministry may try to mediate between the workers and the employers.

Finally, there may be a situation whereby, the conflict cannot be resolved after applying different mechanisms of resolution. Zastrow et al. (2010) explains that when the strategies fail then, one can probably conclude that the parties involved in the conflict are not willing to resolve it.

References About Conflict. (2012) Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Social World Conflicts and Its Resolution Styles by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Lussier, R., (2011). “Management Fundamentals: Concepts, Applications, Skill Development”. Mason, OH: Cengage Learning.

Picard, C., (2002). “Mediating Interpersonal and Small Group Conflict”. Ottawa: Dundurn Press Ltd.

Runde, C.

[supanova_question]

Look Out Lipton, Here Comes Oolong! Case Study online essay help

Introduction The case study focused on the emergence and growth of the market for canned iced-tea while laying much attention on the Western markets. Basically, the development of these markets made the Taiwan Shin Shii and Unilever (also known as the USA Unilever Best foods) to further exploit such markets by employing efficient marketing strategies with the newly developed brands namely Kai Shii and Lipton.

This study intends to assess the effective market segmentation strategies as well as the prospective markets that companies which produce iced-tea could enter. Besides, factors which iced-tea companies could use when forecasting their future demands are underlined and consequently described.

Thus, this study objectively aims at:

Understanding the types of markets which drive the elevated iced tea demands in addition to the eminent motivations that cause them to occur.

Offering market entry strategies and market coverage strategies for both Shin Shii and Unilever.

Tendering the viably recommended brand positioning strategies for Kai Shii and Lipton as well as an alternate ready- to- drink, but hot tea beverage to Unilever.

Case study background Basically, the Unilever Group is globally recognized as the leaders in supplying the fast moving consumers’ products or goods (FMCG) (Unilever 2010). The Lipton brand of these suppliers dominates the United States markets and also has an imperative worldwide presence.

The Unilever Group seems to have equally established the canned hot ready to drink tea products using the Brook Bond PG guidelines which according to this case is dubbed as the Brooke Bond. As a small corporation that is situated in Taiwan, Shin Shii proved to have already been triumphant in Taiwan with the famous beverage drink known as oolong iced tea. The company has enjoyed market dominance in Taiwan and currently has a target of joining the feasible and promising Western marketplaces.

However, to properly respond to this case study questions, the following assumptions have to be made.

The iced tea markets have not endured some everlasting changes be it negative or positive, on either the supply or the demand sides.

The iced tea market depicts a steady growth which will move along way prior to reaching its saturation point.

Both the oolong Kai Shii iced tea and the Lipton iced tea are perceived to be primarily similar or very close and could be categorized under identical products categories.

In this case, the entire North America markets are what are deemed to constitute the Western markets.

Despite being a narrative case study, there are some accruing limitations that might hinder the chances of properly answering the prevailing case questions. First, the Kotler and Armstrong (2001, p.302) text that is used as the main reference emanates to be somewhat old-fashioned since it might have failed to incorporate the business portfolio or corporation’s profiles alterations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, the alliance formed between Pepsi and Lipton might not be inexistence any more. Furthermore, obtaining the decisive information on Shin Shii was rather be difficult given that the corporation is still very murky and internationally less known.

Methodology and the theoretical framework In trying to answer the case study questions, there are methodologies and theoretical frameworks that are drawn on. For example, to properly analyze the case study, theories of marketing which relates to strategic SWOT analysis planning as well as marketing planning was used.

Kotler and Armstrong (2001, p.302) critically described each of these theories and both appear to have various components which were well-defined and critically deliberated on. Further research was similarly performed particularly those that pertain to the forecasting of corporations demands. The provisional non-numerical statistics was adequate to support the offered marketing strategies recommendations apart from the situations where the market shares were to be deliberated.

Strategic analysis of the case study The FMCG (fast moving consumer goods) market presents the market supply and demands trends which habitually fluctuate and are extremely volatile. When such circumstances materialize to be the case, it is advisable that corporations that enter this market ought to have well stipulated purpose and objectives in their strategic planning to guarantee their sustainability.

The Unilever for instance, universally aspires to accomplish the individuals every day’s requirements (Zhao et al. 2009, p.378). This is to be achieved through competitively and creatively responding to such needs with services and products that are branded and tailored towards augmenting the quality of people’s lives.

Since the strategic planning have been laid out, it now becomes significant to conduct the SWOT analysis for this corporation prior to embarking on the strategic market planning and a detailed evaluation of the brand positioning factors. The following matrix table highlights the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats that Kai Shii and Lipton faces in the global market operations.

Parameter Kai Shii Lipton Strengths a) Is a well-established Taiwan market dominant or leader having a total of seventy percent of its market shares in the oolong segment a) Is currently well known to the market leader due to its popular brand reputation. b) Has an all-embracing experience with respect to triumphant brand advertising. b) Has an extensive acquaintance to the domestic or local tastes and cultures. c) Has a broad range of products that depict hi-tech preeminence including products such as the canned hot tea for Brooke Bond. Weaknesses a) Has inadequate Westernized consumers experience a) Since it has different brand extensions, this might confuse and equally dilute the perception of the consumers. As a result, it might end up giving new market entrants and fresh competitors a chance to capture its global market share. b) Is completely unfamiliar to the Westernized consumers Opportunities a) Has recently introduced a new-fangled iced tea known as oolong. This might help it to generate inquisitiveness and emerge as the first corporation to bring such an iced tea into the market mainstream. a) Can form an alliance with reputed brands like Pepsi so as to have admittance into the substantial supply networks. Furthermore, the market demand could further be driven by the presence of the recognized market dominant partners. b) Appears to be much aware of the health benefits that tea provides. b) Is greatly aware of the health benefits that tea provides to the consumers. c) Can seize the declining markets that soft drinks and beverages seem to be losing. c) Has the opportunity to capture markets that brews like the soft drinks tend to loose. Threats a) Faces major rivalry from other big tea manufactures and market leaders such as Lipton. a) The market seems to be very congested while the alternatively available small markets have over two hundred different brands that may cause substantial reductions in Lipton brand demand. b) Might be probably be rejected while it tries to find the distributing partners. For instance, the retailers might be very reluctant to take newly introduced products like the Kai Shii. b) There are various other key market players including Nestle and Coca-Cola which the canned iced tea market through hard-hitting competitions. Bases for market planning strategies To enter into the emerging and the already existing markets, companies must first assume proper market planning by determining the types of bases or factors that could be used in apt market segmentation. Basically, market segmentation entails the division of customers or consumers into some distinctive groups that may require different marketing mixes or products (Krider et al. 2008, p.2).

We will write a custom Case Study on Look Out Lipton, Here Comes Oolong! specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Each of these groups must have behaviors, characteristics and different needs. Companies might similarly have their iced tea market segmented according to the consumers’ perceptions or the apparent trends depicted when they purchase similar products.

Therefore, to succeed in such a very competitive market environment, companies can use the following bases in segmenting the market for the iced tea.

Geographic segmentation base including taking account of factors such as towns, villages, city suburbs and urban centers.

Demographic bases which entails incorporating factors like the apparent consumers age groups.

Behavioral bases which include taking into consideration the consumers who seek and hassle for fresh and convenient iced tea refreshments.

From these iced tea market segmentation base factors, it is clear that prices might not be deemed as a key factor that influences the perception of canned iced teas consumers. This is because such products are less or more similarly priced with identical products like iced coffee and soft drinks (Zhao et al. 2009, p.379). Nevertheless, for companies that compete in the production of similar product sets, pricing is considered to play a very critical role.

The identified potential market segments After identifying the market segmentation bases for iced teas products, companies must target particular market segments that provide certain differential potentials which a company might use to gain the competitive edge or advantage over other market rivals (McCarthy, 1993). The selected market segment ought to assist the corporation to craft enduring clients’ values and consequently prop it up for a long time.

The designated market segment might however vary according to the resources possessed and the company size. Shin Shii for instance, has few resources which may force it to have few market segment targets as compared to the Unilever that might yearn for bigger market coverage as it targets various market segments (Greg 1992, p.46). The latter company has ample resources that could help it to meet market segmentation targets.

In the domestic Taiwanese markets, Shin Shii can exceptionally perform given that it has well established and aggressive advertising techniques that might help it create completely novel markets for the new product, iced tea oolong that was practically nonexistence (Sutherland, 2009).

These make the company to stand a chance of targeting each and every age group including the customary bound aged generations who previously enjoyed the consumption of hot tea and never showed any sign of relinquishing their habits.

The Kai Shii drinkers’ selling point should be the new breeds of individuals who consider themselves to be in a newfangled globe. The health benefits and natural ingredients that the product brags of should be made appealing to each consumer in the Far East not excluding the aged populace who very health cognizant.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Look Out Lipton, Here Comes Oolong! by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Since the Shin Shii emerged to be different and unique, it became appealing to the youthful generations. In contrast, the iced tea seems to have therapeutic benefits which lured the middle age working classes that are stressed up in addition to offering a convenient canned drink that complemented their respective tiring routines (Grossman, 1994). The companies can also consider the geographical market segmentations even though the penetration levels could be difficult in some rural market areas.

While targeting specific market segments for Lipton, the Unilever Groups based their segmentation on identical factors including the iced tea health benefits. The company could nonetheless further narrow down its market segmentation by focusing on industrial workers and athletes who partake physical activities that are extremely mentally exhaustive (Krider et al. 2008, p.4). Most population in America is geographically situated within towns or urban centers which materialize to be well linked.

It therefore makes more sense if Lipton restricts its markets segmentation to appropriately serve the American town centers. Nevertheless, given that there are busy metropolises such as Chicago, Boston and New York City which pose unlimited potentiality for the working classes, Lipton iced teas need to be targeted to accomplish the demands of consumers in these areas because they always require quick refreshments amid lunch or snacks.

Conversely, for the Unilever Group, it becomes imperative to note that modifying the iced tea Lipton to serve the various demands within the country would be practically impossible. This follows the fact America is renowned to be a homogenously large market and barely has any assorted beverage tastes. On the other hand, Shin Shii may opt for the modification of oolong Kai Shii iced teas in order to suit the American consumers’ tastes and to equally counter the stringent market competitions through claiming it exclusiveness and superiority.

Forecasting the iced tea market demand Currently in America, iced tea is hugely demanded to an extent that it constitutes nearly eighty percent of the total consumed tea in the American environs. In fact, it has exceptionally emerged to be the Americans habit regardless of the fact that it has a comparatively shorter participation time span in the marketing and trade of teas.

Whereas the ready to drink beverages and iced teas attract the emerging tea consumers, it is anticipated that an upturn impact might take place in the demands for different kinds of teas, particularly those that are specialized. This will eventually cause the demand for tea such as the iced herbal tea to increase.

Thus, companies might employ different factors while forecasting the iced teas demands for their chosen diverse market segments. A great chunk of these factors relates to the current market segmentation base growth rate including certain nationality groups, income and age.

Variations in both socio economic conditions and lifestyles are among the decisive development factors which could significantly influence the iced teas demand particularly in the long-run. For instance, specific to the market for iced teas, when the working class proportionally decreases as result of the ageing populace, the demand for iced teas might be hindered in the metropolitan cities specifically within the commercial regions.

The iced tea beverages outlook generally is still however considerably optimistic with the emergence of instant tea which has become additionally essential in some global markets (Altman, 2002).

While studying the producing nations commodity supply management between the fiscal 1951 and 1970, Goradia showed that the universal liquid tea consumption steadily increased by approximately 145.07% but the tea-leaves consumption increased by just 92.01%. There is absolutely no doubt that these fast progressions will still continue even in the prospective future (Krider et al. 2008, p.6).

Market coverage strategy that Pepsi/Lipton should adopt Pepsi/Lipton has already differentiated the type of the market segment they want to enter into. Identifying and entering into the segment market depends on the company available facilities and resources. The problem of identifying and the segment market can only be sorted out by the market coverage strategy that the company utilizes to penetrate the market.

Normally the market coverage strategy is the method companies use to assess the various market segments in the marketplace (Boone

[supanova_question]

The War On Drugs Analytical Essay college essay help: college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The war on drugs as the war against black women

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The war on drugs is often associated with controversy. Issues of gender and race have been raised on numerous occasions in the war against drugs. The war on drugs was declared in the United States over three decades ago, and individuals of color have been greatly affected by this war.

The policies that have been put in place in the war on drugs have exhibited a discriminatory element. In particular, black women and individuals from the minority groups have been targeted in this war. In this case, such individuals are predisposed to harassment from the state officials.

It can be noted that black women have been made to bear the brunt of police cruelties in the name of war on drugs. Considering the plight of black women in the war on drugs, this paper discusses the concept of war on drugs as the war against black women.

The war on drugs as the war against black women The period between 1986 and 1991 was a critical time for the African American community as a whole. At this time, the community was facing a high amount of oppression making them take out their frustration on the use of drugs. Essentially, top of the list of substance abusers were the black females who recorded twice the number of drug offences compared to their male counterparts. Despite the high number of black women incarcerated for drug abuse, authorities do not place emphasis on this issue.

Criminologists often focus on male oriented cases ignoring the plight of the female community. Feminists specialized in criminology have thus dubbed the exclusion of black female drug offenders as discriminatory policies. This has given rise the campaign that accuse criminologist on the war on drugs as the war against black women (Bush-Baskette, p. 5).

The legislations on drugs have been known to affect the black women more than any other group. It has been established that the black women form the rapidly expanding population that is arrested on drug related offences.

Notably, from the late 1980s, the number of black women who have been arrested on drug related offences increased by 800%. This was double the rate of women from other racial groups. In New York, the percentage of black women arrested on drug offences was over 90% while they make barely a third of the women population in the state (Bush-Baskette, p. 43).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The early form of the war on drugs constituted of the arrest of low level drug users and dealers, as opposed to high-ranking people in the trade. This removed the attention from the drug lords who control the dynamics of the industry across the globe.

Another issue regarding the control of drug use was the misrepresentation and improper recording of the people arrested. Fabricated statistics saw the Increase in the number of blacks arrested for the use of drugs and the decrease in the arrest of whites. This triggered a national out raw which advocated for the equal treatment of all races regarding the eradication of drugs.

Women may get involved in drug dealings due to similar reasons as the male culprits. Nonetheless, there are certain gender-specific aspects that should be considered. It can be observed that black women are faced with various forms of oppressions and thus find it difficult to support their families.

In this case, they are forced to engage in street crimes for survival. Most of these women become involved with males who are drug traffickers and find themselves using the prohibited drugs. These women are often threatened with violence and abusive relationship if they refuse to cooperate with their male partners in drug activities (Bush-Baskette, p. 14).

Though the drug trade is said to be profitable, it can be observed that women do not accrue the benefits associated with this trade is equal measure to their male counterparts. Indeed it has been established that women are likely to spend more time in prison on drug related crimes compared to the male dealers. This is because women are likely not able to reveal their male accomplices to earn shorter sentence. On the other hand, males are known to reveal their female counterparts in the trade when required to do so (Chesney-Lind, p. 37).

Heroin was mostly abused by blacks as opposed to whites faring differently from marijuana which was consumed equality by both blacks and whites. The term the war on drugs as the war on women is used to display the level of disregard the society has for the welfare of the black women.

Women associated with drug use recorded fewer cases of the application of force and violence during their consumption or purchase. Poverty and unemployment are the leading factors for the reason of drug on both male and female cases (Stevens and Wexler, p. 28).

We will write a custom Essay on The War On Drugs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The state of Florida recorded drug peddling as the single most recurring primary offence in the years of 1993-1994. Drug peddling was the main offence reported in the criminal files and records. These records only represent the cases concerning drug use, as opposed to drug use accompanied with lesser charges (Nelson, p. 184).

An analysis of the statistics of the incarcerated women lists black women who take the lead representing 51% of the population. Black males take the second slot recording 49% of the country’s population. In the third position are white women who record a competitive 43%. White males take the last slot recording 38% representing the lowest group in reference to the consumption of drugs (Gartner and Kruttschnitt, p. 29).

The police and state authorities are often accused of racial profiling when it comes to war on drugs. This is because there are significant racial disparities observed in arresting, convicting, and incarcerating black women. Arrest, conviction, and incarceration depend on the discretion of the law enforcers in their war on drugs. It is assumed that black women are vessels for prohibited drugs. In this case, the black women are often perceived by the law enforcers as couriers in the drug trade (Stevens and Wexler, p. 19).

Consequently, these women are targeted by the state and federal officers for strip search aimed at identifying drugs. Therefore, black women have been stereotypes as possible drug dealers. It has been established that black women are most likely to be subjected to X-rays after being frisked than white women. On the contrary, the chance of finding black women with contraband products is half compared to white women who stand a high chance of carrying contraband products (Bush-Baskette, p. 45).

Black women are often exposed to regular and offensive strips and searches by the law enforcement agents in the war against drugs. The war on drugs has gone to the extreme. Enhanced surveillance and policing of the reproduction of black women has been reported in the fight against drugs.

Essentially, discriminatory testing of black women who are pregnant to establish drug use is carried out by state officials. Also, there is enhanced surveillance and policing of poor women of African descent under the guise of monitoring child abuse and neglect. This can be argued as being part of a wider scheme in the protracted war on drugs (Bush-Baskette, p. 32).

It is estimated that about two hundred women in over thirty states have faced prosecution on drug related crimes. In some instances, child or fetal abuse is associated with the use of drugs when the woman is pregnant.

In South Carolina State, there is legislation that women who use drugs during while pregnant can be charged with child abuse. In this case, such women are reported to the state authorities by their doctors. Instead of offering rehabilitation services to such women, they are arrested and prosecuted based on child abuse laws (Bush-Baskette, p. 51).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The War On Drugs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion In conclusion, the fight against drugs has come a long way for the time of its rise in the ten years ago. The U.S. has the greatest number of consumers owing to a number of factors. This rate has been on the rise due to the political, social and economic factors experienced today.

Top of the list are black women who are notorious for the frequent consumption of the substance. This is not ideal because a large number of the same culprits are single mothers. It is thus ideal for authorities to place more emphasis on black women so as to tackle the bulk of the problem.

Works Cited Bush-Baskette, Stephanie. Misguided Justice: The War on Drugs and the Incarceration of Black Women. Bloomington, IN: Universe, Inc, 2010. Print.

Chesney-Lind, Meda. Girls, Women, and Crime: Selected Readings. London [u.a.: SAGE, 2004. Print.

Gartner, Rosemary, and Candace Kruttschnitt. Marking Time in the Golden State: Women’s Imprisonment in California. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005. Print.

Nelson, Jennifer. Women of Color and the Reproductive Rights Movement. New York [u.a.: New York Univ. Press, 2003. Print.

Stevens, Sally J. and Harry K. Wexler. Women and Substance Abuse: Gender Transparency. New York: Routledge, 1998. Print.

[supanova_question]

Roles of an International HR Manager to Identify Possible HR Issues, Which Have Led to Crisis Report (Assessment) college essay help

Critical evaluation of roles of an International HR Manager (IHRM) to help identify possible HR issues, which have led to this crisis International HR (IHR) management aspects have numerous roles influencing operations of any given multinational corporation (MNC). Similarly, it can affect the financial performance of any given country; however, this varies from one state to the next. Contextually, it is possible to unveil the HR issues that led to the crisis (evident in the case provided) upon critical evaluation of IHR Managers’ roles.

Financial meltdown, recessions, and inflations are some of the crisis evident in the case. IHR manager’s roles in any MNC might eventually affect the prosperity and financial aspects of the concerned organization and the country of operation. There are HR issues that have led to the noticed economic meltdown (Davies 2010). Firstly, IHR managers should ascertain the nature of international operations that the business intends to assume.

This means that IHR manager must recognize the international labour demands, focus on the available human capital, create more employment opportunities, and provide lucrative working conditions to increase the productivity of the workforce, reduce unemployment cases, and help in averting the localized and globalized economic hitches witnessed in the case provided. This forms the roles of IHR helpful in identifying the possible HR issues evident in the case provided.

HR has the role of sourcing viable employees who can propel the operations and growth of the concerned companies in order to realize remarkable economic results. It is from this context that an IHR can contribute massively to an economic crisis or flourish. It is evident that the aspects of international labour market similarly contribute to the ultimate global production and financial stability. Failure to manage such international human capital properly has a devastating impact on the national and international economic downturn.

In this context, it is the mandate of IHR manager to ensure that he or she sources cheap and competent labour that will help in propelling the productivity of the concerned MNCs (Forrest 2011). For example, the mentioned internationalized banking corporations like Bank of England, European Central Bank, and Halifax Bank of Scotland among others (MNCs) can utilize their IHR provisions in order to avert the witnessed economic meltdown (Ferrell

[supanova_question]